Mercedes-Benz SLK Class 2005 Owner Manual

SLK 350

SLK 55 AMG

Our company and staff congratulate you on the purchase of your new

Mercedes-Benz.

Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as easy as possible to operate and provide years of service.

Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure, and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time:

앫

Please read this manual carefully, then return it to your vehicle where it will be handy for your reference.

앫

Please follow the recommendations contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz.

앫

Please pay attention to the warnings and cautions contained in this manual.

They are designed to help improve the safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.

We extend our best wishes for many miles of safe, pleasurable driving.

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

A DaimlerChrysler Company

Contents

Introduction

......................................... 9

Product information................................ 9

Operator’s Manual ............................... 10

Service and warranty information .. 10

Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of

Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11

Maintenance .................................. 12

Roadside Assistance ...................... 12

Change of address or ownership.... 12

Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada......................... 13

Where to find it.................................... 14

Symbols............................................... 15

Operating safety .................................. 16

Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16

Problems with your vehicle.................. 17

Reporting safety defects...................... 18

Reporting safety defects ................ 18

Vehicle data recording......................... 19

Information regarding electronic recording devices........................... 19

At a glance

.......................................... 21

Cockpit................................................. 22

Instrument cluster ................................ 24

Multifunction steering wheel ................ 26

Center console ..................................... 28

Upper part ...................................... 28

Lower part ...................................... 29

Overhead control panel ........................ 30

Door control panel................................ 31

Getting started

................................... 33

Unlocking ............................................. 34

Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... 34

Starter switch positions.................. 35

Adjusting .............................................. 37

Seats .............................................. 37

Steering wheel................................ 40

Mirrors............................................ 42

Driving.................................................. 44

Fastening the seat belts ................. 44

Starting the engine ......................... 47

Switching on headlamps................. 52

Turn signals .................................... 52

Windshield wipers........................... 53

Problems while driving.................... 55

Parking and locking.............................. 56

Parking brake ................................. 56

Switching off headlamps................. 57

Turning off engine........................... 58

Contents

Safety and Security

........................... 61

Occupant safety................................... 62

Air bags .......................................... 63

Seat belts ....................................... 69

Children in the vehicle.................... 73

Panic alarm .......................................... 78

Activating ....................................... 78

Deactivating ................................... 78

Driving safety systems......................... 80

ABS ................................................ 80

BAS ................................................ 81

ESP................................................. 82

Anti-theft systems................................ 85

Immobilizer..................................... 85

Anti-theft alarm system .................. 85

Tow-away alarm ............................. 86

Controls in detail

............................... 89

Locking and unlocking ......................... 90

SmartKey ....................................... 90

Opening the doors from the inside. 94

Opening the trunk .......................... 95

Closing the trunk............................ 95

Trunk lid emergency release .......... 96

Automatic central locking .............. 97

Locking and unlocking from the inside ....................................... 97

Seats ................................................... 99

Easy-entry/exit feature* ................ 99

Seat heating*............................... 101

AIRSCARF neck-level heating* ..... 102

Memory function* ............................. 103

Storing positions into memory ..... 104

Recalling positions from memory. 104

Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position (parking aid)....... 105

Lighting.............................................. 106

Exterior lamp switch..................... 106

Combination switch ..................... 110

Cornering fog lamps* (SLK 350 with Bi-Xenon* headlamps and without Sport Package*).............. 111

Hazard warning flasher ................ 112

Interior lighting ............................ 113

Door entry lamps ......................... 114

Instrument cluster ............................. 115

Instrument cluster illumination .... 115

Tachometer.................................. 115

Outside temperature indicator ..... 116

Trip odometer .............................. 116

Clock............................................ 116

Control system .................................. 117

Multifunction display.................... 117

Multifunction steering wheel........ 118

Menus .......................................... 120

Standard display menu ................ 122

AUDIO menu ................................ 123

NAV* menu.................................. 126

Vehicle status message memory menu............................................ 126

Settings menu.............................. 127

Trip computer menu..................... 144

TEL menu* ................................... 146

Manual transmission ......................... 150

Shifting into reverse..................... 151

Contents

Automatic transmission*................... 152

One-touch gearshifting................. 154

Gear ranges ................................. 155

Gear selector lever position ......... 156

Automatic shift program .............. 158

Driving tips................................... 159

Steering wheel gearshift control .. 160

Manual shift program

SLK 55 AMG................................. 164

Emergency operation

(Limp Home Mode) ...................... 166

Good visibility .................................... 167

Headlamp cleaning system* ........ 167

Rear view mirrors ......................... 167

Sun visors .................................... 170

Rear window defroster ................. 171

Climate control .................................. 172

Switching climate control on/off . 175

Setting the temperature............... 175

Adjusting air distribution.............. 176

Adjusting air volume .................... 176

Air recirculation mode.................. 176

Air conditioning............................ 178

Residual engine heat utilization.... 180

Defrosting .................................... 181

Automatic climate control* ................ 182

Automatic mode (basic setting) .... 185

Setting the temperature................ 185

Adjusting air volume ..................... 186

Adjusting air distribution............... 186

Air recirculation mode .................. 186

Air conditioning............................. 188

Residual heat and ventilation........ 189

Defrosting ..................................... 189

Switching off the automatic climate control system ................. 190

Audio system...................................... 191

Audio and telephone, operation .... 191

Operating safety ........................... 191

Operating and display elements.... 192

Button and soft key operation....... 194

Operation...................................... 194

Radio operation ............................ 197

Introduction to satellite radio*

(USA only) ..................................... 202

CD mode....................................... 207

GSM network phones ................... 216

TDMA or CDMA network phones .. 223

Emergency calls “911”.................. 229

Power windows .................................. 232

Opening and closing the windows 232

Synchronizing power windows...... 236

Retractable hardtop ........................... 237

Opening and closing the retractable hardtop....................... 237

Wind screen.................................. 243

Driving systems.................................. 244

Cruise control ............................... 244

Loading .............................................. 249

Roof rack ...................................... 249

Useful features................................... 250

Storage compartments ................. 250

Shelf behind roll bars.................... 252

Cup holder .................................... 252

Ashtray ......................................... 253

Cigarette lighter............................ 254

Electrical outlet............................. 254

Floormat (driver’s side only) ......... 255

Telephone* ................................... 256

Tele Aid*....................................... 257

Garage door opener*.................... 264

Heated steering wheel*

(SLK 350, Canada only) ................ 270

Contents

Operation

......................................... 271

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)......... 272

Driving instructions............................ 273

Drive sensibly – save fuel ............. 273

Drinking and driving ..................... 273

Pedals .......................................... 273

Power assistance ......................... 273

Brakes .......................................... 274

Driving off..................................... 276

Parking ......................................... 276

Tires ............................................. 277

Hydroplaning ................................ 277

Tire traction.................................. 278

Tire speed rating .......................... 278

Winter driving instructions ........... 279

Standing water ............................. 280

Passenger compartment .............. 281

Driving abroad.............................. 281

Control and operation of radio transmitter ................................... 281

Catalytic converter ....................... 282

Emission control........................... 282

Coolant temperature .................... 283

At the gas station .............................. 284

Refueling ...................................... 284

Check regularly and before a long trip..................................... 285

Engine compartment ......................... 287

Hood ............................................ 287

Engine oil ..................................... 288

Transmission fluid level* .............. 293

Coolant level ................................ 293

Battery ......................................... 294

Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*......... 295

Tires and wheels................................ 297

Important guidelines .................... 297

Tire care and maintenance........... 298

Direction of rotation..................... 300

Loading the vehicle ...................... 300

Recommended tire inflation pressure ....................................... 306

Checking tire inflation pressure ... 308

MO

Extended

system* .................. 312

Tire labeling.................................. 313

Load identification ....................... 317

DOT, Tire Identification Number

(TIN) ............................................. 318

Maximum tire load ....................... 319

Maximum tire inflation pressure .. 320

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards (U.S. vehicles) ............. 320

Tire ply material ........................... 322

Tire and loading terminology........ 323

Rotating tires ............................... 326

Winter driving .................................... 327

Winter tires .................................. 327

Snow chains................................. 328

Maintenance...................................... 329

Clearing the maintenance service indicator .......................... 330

Maintenance service term exceeded ..................................... 330

Calling up the maintenance service indicator .......................... 330

Resetting the maintenance service indicator .......................... 331

Setting the date for special works ........................................... 331

Calling up the maintenance service data information .............. 333

Vehicle care....................................... 334

Cleaning and care of vehicle ........ 334

Contents

Practical hints

................................. 341

What to do if … .................................. 342

Lamps in instrument cluster ........ 342

Lamp in center console................ 347

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display.................... 348

Where will I find...? ............................ 369

First aid kit ................................... 369

Vehicle tool kit, vehicle jack......... 369

Spare wheel with collapsible tire.. 371

Spare wheel bolts ........................ 373

Unlocking/locking in an emergency.. 374

Unlocking the vehicle................... 374

Locking the vehicle ...................... 375

Manually unlocking the gear selector lever

(automatic transmission*) ........... 376

Opening/closing in an emergency..... 377

Raising retractable hardtop manually ...................................... 377

Replacing SmartKey batteries ........... 378

SmartKey ..................................... 379

Replacing bulbs .................................. 380

Bulbs............................................. 380

Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 382

Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 384

Replacing wiper blades....................... 386

Removing wiper blades ................. 386

Installing wiper blades .................. 387

Flat tire............................................... 388

Preparing the vehicle .................... 388

Mounting the spare wheel ............ 388

Battery................................................ 396

Disconnecting the battery............. 397

Removing the battery.................... 397

Charging and reinstalling battery .. 397

Reconnecting the battery.............. 398

Jump starting...................................... 399

Towing the vehicle.............................. 401

Installing towing eye bolt .............. 403

Fuses.................................................. 404

Aids for changing fuses................. 404

Main fuse box in passenger compartment ................................ 405

Fuse box in engine compartment.. 406

Technical data

.................................. 407

Parts service ...................................... 408

Warranty coverage ............................. 409

Loss of Service and Warranty

Information Booklet ...................... 409

Identification labels ............................ 410

Layout of poly-V-belt drive.................. 411

SLK 350........................................ 411

SLK 55 AMG ................................. 411

Engine ................................................ 412

Rims and tires .................................... 413

Same size tires ............................. 414

Mixed size tires............................. 416

Spare wheel with collapsible tire .. 418

Electrical system ................................ 419

Main Dimensions................................ 420

Weights .............................................. 421

Contents

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ......... 422

Capacities .................................... 422

Engine oils.................................... 424

Engine oil additives ...................... 424

Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 424

Brake fluid .................................... 424

Premium unleaded gasoline ......... 425

Fuel requirements ........................ 425

Gasoline additives ........................ 425

Coolants....................................... 426

Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system* ......... 429

Technical terms

............................... 431

Index

................................................. 439

Introduction

Product information

왔

Product information

Please observe the following in your own best interest:

We recommend using genuine

Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle model.

We have tested these parts to determine their reliability, safety and special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

We are unable to make an assessment for other products and therefore cannot be held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety, performance or reliability of your vehicle.

Please do not use them.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion parts and accessories approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical modifications, and where proper installation will be performed.

9

Introduction

Operator’s Manual

This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal of useful information. We urge you to read it carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving.

For your own safety and longer service life of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Your vehicle may have some or all of the equipment described in this manual.

Therefore, you may find explanations for optional equipment not installed in your vehicle. If you have any questions about the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper procedures.

We continuously strive to improve our product, and ask for your understanding that we reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle.

Optional equipment is also described in this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrations herein may vary slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle.

If there are any equipment details that are not shown or described in this Operator’s

Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center will be glad to inform you of correct care and operating procedures.

The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance

Booklet are important documents and should be kept with the vehicle.

Service and warranty information

앫

앫

앫

앫

The Service and Warranty Information

Booklet contains detailed information about the warranties covering your

Mercedes-Benz, including:

New Car Limited Warranty

Emission System Warranty

Emission Performance Warranty

California, Maine, Massachusetts, and

Vermont Emission Control System

Warranty

(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and

Vermont only)

앫

State Warranty Enforcement Laws

(Lemon Laws)

10

Introduction


Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of

Mercedes-Benz automobiles

Under California law you may be entitled to a replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the purchase price or lease price, if

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty after a reasonable number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of

18000 miles (approx. 29000 km) on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the following occurs:

(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to repair two or more times, and you have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,

LLC in writing of the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for its repair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a cumulative total of more than

30 calendar days.

Written notification should be sent to us, not a dealer, at Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC,

Customer Assistance Center,

One Mercedes Drive, Montvale,

NJ 07645-0350.

11

Introduction


Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership

The Maintenance Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be performed at regular intervals.

Always have the Maintenance Booklet with you when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for service. The service advisor will record each service in the booklet for you.

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance

Program provides factory-trained technical help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance number

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)

1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)

will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives

24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

For additional information refer to the

Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program Brochure in your vehicle literature portfolio.

If you change your address, be sure to send in the “Change of Address Notice” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center (in the USA) at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interest that we can contact you should the need arise.

If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.

If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used

Car” found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or call the

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at

1-800-387-0100.

12

Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada

If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:

앫 service facilities or replacement parts may not be readily available,

앫

앫 unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available; the use of leaded fuels will damage the catalysts, gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can cause engine damage.

Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to:

In the USA:


European Delivery Department

One Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada:

Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc.

European Delivery Department

98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Introduction


13

Introduction

Where to find it

This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information for you, the vehicle operator. Each section has its own reference color so you can find information quickly.

At a glance

Here you will find an overview of all the controls that can be operated from the driver’s seat.

Getting started

Here you will find all the information you need for your first drive. You should read this section first if this is your first

Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.

Controls in detail

Here you will find detailed information about the equipment installed in your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you.

Operation

Here you will find all the information you need for the proper operation of your vehicle.

Safety and Security

Here you will find descriptions of the safety and security features of your vehicle.

Practical hints

This section provides fast assistance for dealing with problems you may encounter.

Technical data

All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.

Indexes

The glossary provides explanations of the most important technical terms.

The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly and easily.

앫

앫

The following publications are part of your vehicle documentation: this Operator’s Manual the Maintenance Booklet

Separate operating instructions will be provided as required depending on the equipment options installed in your vehicle.

14

Introduction

Symbols

왔

Symbols

The following symbols are found in this

Operator’s Manual:

* Optional equipment is identified with an asterisk. Since standard equipment varies between models, the descriptions and illustrations in this manual may differ slightly from the actual equipment of your vehicle.

Warning!

G

Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

!

Highlights hazards that may result in damage to your vehicle.

i

Helpful hints or further information you may find useful.

왘

This symbol points to instructions for you to follow.

왘

A number of these symbols appearing in succession indicates a multiple-step procedure.

컄

Page This symbol tells you where to look for further information on a topic.

컄컄

This continuation symbol marks an interrupted procedure which will be continued on the next page.

->

Display

In the glossary of technical terms, this symbol is used to indicate cross-references to term definitions.

Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in the type shown here.

15

Introduction

Operating safety

Warning!

G

Work improperly carried out on electronic components and associated software could cause them to cease functioning. Because the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modification made may produce an undesired effect on other systems.

See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for repairs or modifications to electronic components.

Other improper work or modifications on the vehicle could also have a negative impact on the operating safety of the vehicle.

Some safety systems only function while the engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.

Warning!

G

Heavy blows against the vehicle undercarriage or tires/wheels, for example when running over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole, may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety or your vehicle. If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road.

Inspect the vehicle undercarriage or tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other qualified maintenance or repair facility for further inspection or repairs.

Proper use of the vehicle

앫

앫

앫

앫

Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are familiar with the following information and rules: the safety precautions in this manual the “Technical data” section

(

컄 page 407) in this manual the traffic rules and regulations the motor vehicle laws and safety standards

Warning!

G

Various labels are attached to your vehicle.

These warning labels are intended to make you and others aware of various risks. You should not remove any of these warning labels unless explicitly instructed to do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you and others to be unaware of certain risks which may result in an accident and/or personal injury.

16

Introduction

Problems with your vehicle

왔

Problems with your vehicle

If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses:

In the USA:

Customer Assistance Center


One Mercedes Drive

Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada:

Customer Relations Department

Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc.

98 Vanderhoof Avenue

Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

17

Introduction

Reporting safety defects

For the USA only:

The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the

“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.

Reporting safety defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

18

Introduction

Vehicle data recording

Information regarding electronic recording devices

(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)

Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may transmit some data in certain accidents.

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.

DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or as otherwise required or permitted by law.

Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted via that system.

19

20

At a glance

Cockpit

Instrument cluster

Multifunction steering wheel

Center console

Overhead control panel

Door control panel

21

At a glance

Cockpit

22

Item

1 Automatic transmission*:

Steering wheel gearshift control*

SLK 55 AMG:

Steering wheel gearshift control (Speedshift)

2 Multifunction steering wheel

3 Horn

4 Instrument cluster

Page

161

162

26,

118

5 Overhead control panel

6 Glove box

7 Center console

8 Starter switch

9 Steering wheel adjustment handle, manual a Steering wheel adjustment lever, electrical*

24,

115

30,

113

250

28, 29

35

41

41

Item


(SLK 350, Canada only) b Headlamp cleaning* switch c Hood lock release d Exterior lamp switch e Combination switch

앫

Turn signals

앫

앫

Windshield wipers

High beam headlamps f Power window switches g Door handle h Cruise control lever

Page

270

167

287

52,

106

52

53

52

232

94

244

At a glance

Cockpit

23

At a glance


24

At a glance


Item

1

Multifunction display with:

Main odometer

Trip odometer

Automatic transmission*:

Gear range indicator

Automatic transmission*:

Program mode

Outside temperature indicator (or actual speed when selected)

2

Tachometer with:

?

Engine malfunction indicator lamp,

USA only

±

Engine malfunction indicator lamp,

Canada only

Page

344

344

122

116

48,

153

158,

164

132

Item

<

Seat belt telltale

A

High beam headlamp indicator lamp

3

Fuel gauge with:

Fuel reserve warning lamp

4

Fuel filler cap location indicator: The fuel filler cap is on the rear right-hand side.

4

Clock

5

Speedometer with:

1

Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) indicator lamp

-

Antilock Brake System (ABS) indicator lamp

Page

69,

346

52,

110

345

284

116

62,

346

80,

342

Item

L

Left turn signal indicator lamp

K

Right turn signal indicator lamp v

Electronic Stability

Program (ESP) warning lamp

;

Brake warning lamp, USA only

3

Brake warning lamp, Canada only

6

Reset button

7

Knobs for instrument cluster illumination

Page

52

82,

345

56,

343

343

115

115

25

At a glance


Item

1 Multifunction display

Operating control system

2 Selecting a submenu or setting the volume:

Press button

æ up/to increase

ç down/to decrease

3 Telephone*:

Press button s to take a call, or to dial a call t to end a call, or to reject an incoming call

Page

115

117

Item

4 Moving within a menu:

Press button j for next display k for previous display

5 Menu systems:

Press button

è for next menu

· for previous menu

Page

26

i

SLK 55 AMG:

The steering wheel in this vehicle will vary from steering wheel shown. However, multifunction steering wheel symbols and feature description apply to

AMG vehicles as well.

At a glance


27

At a glance

Center console

Upper part

Item

1 Cup holder

2 Audio system, or

COMAND* (see separate operating instructions)

3 AIRSCARF neck-level heating* switch, passenger-side

4 Seat heater* switch, passenger-side

5 Central unlocking switch

6 Hazard warning flasher switch

7 Central locking switch

8 ESP switch

9 Seat heater* switch, driver’s side

Page

252

123

102

101

97

112

97

82

101

Item

a AIRSCARF neck-level heating* switch, driver’s side b

75

passenger front air bag off indicator lamp c Climate control

Automatic climate control*

Rear window defroster switch d Cigarette lighter e Ashtray

Page

102

75,

347

172

182

171

254

253

28

Lower part

At a glance

Center console

Item


Gear selector lever

Manual transmission:

Gearshift lever

2 Retractable hardtop opening/closing switch

3 Tow-away alarm deactivation switch

4 Parking brake lever

5 Storage compartment

Telephone* compartment

Page

152

150

237

87

49

250

Item

6 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror switch

7 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror switch

8 Exterior rear view mirrors adjustment switch


Program mode selector switch

Page

43,

167

43,

167

43,

167

158,

164

29

At a glance

Overhead control panel

Item

1 Interior lighting on/off

2 Interior lighting automatic control switch

3 Right reading lamp on/off

4 Tele Aid (emergency call system) button

5 Garage door opener*

6 Interior rear view mirror

Page

113

114

113

257

7 Left reading lamp on/off

264

42,

167

114

30

왔


Item

1 Door handle

2 Power window switch for opening/closing passenger-side window

3 Power window switch for opening/closing driver’s side window

Page

94

232

232

At a glance


31

32

Getting started

Unlocking

Adjusting

Driving

Parking and locking

33

Getting started

Unlocking

The “Getting started” section provides an overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners should pay special attention to the information given here.

If you are already familiar with the basic functions described here, the “Controls in detail” section (

컄 page 89) will provide you with further information. The corresponding page references are located at the end of each segment.

Unlocking with the SmartKey

SmartKey with remote control

1

2

3

4

‹

Lock button

Š

Unlock button for trunk lid

Œ

Unlock button

Â

Panic button (

컄 page 78)

왘

Press unlock button

Œ

on the

SmartKey.

All turn signal lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the doors move up.

The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed.

왘

Get in the vehicle and insert the

SmartKey in the starter switch.

34

i

Opening a door causes the windows on that side of the car to open slightly.

They will return to the up position when the door is closed.

i

Without the antenna on the left rear side of the vehicle installed, the

SmartKey signaling range is considerably reduced. Hold the SmartKey in close proximity towards the antenna base when locking or unlocking the vehicle.

For more information, see “Locking and unlocking” (

컄 page 90).

Getting started

Unlocking

Starter switch positions SmartKey

Warning!

G

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the

SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Starter switch

0

For removing the SmartKey

The steering is locked when the

SmartKey is removed from the starter switch. If necessary, move steering wheel slightly to allow the locking mechanism to engage.

1

Power supply to some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment

2

Ignition (power supply for all electrical consumers) and driving position.

All lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched on, have it checked and replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on after starting the engine or comes on while driving, refer to see

“Lamps in instrument cluster”

(

컄 page 342).

3

Starting position

35

Getting started

Unlocking

i

When you switch on ignition, the indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster come on. This indicates that the respective system is operational. The indicator and warning lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go out when the engine is running.

!

If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the starter switch, the vehicle battery may not be sufficiently charged.

앫 Check the vehicle battery and charge it if necessary ( 컄 page 396).

Get a jump start (

컄 page 399).

앫

To prevent accelerated vehicle battery discharge or a completely discharged vehicle battery, always remove the

SmartKey from the starter switch when the engine is not in operation.

i

Vehicles with automatic transmission*:

The SmartKey can only be removed from the starter switch with the gear selector lever in position

P

.

For information on starting the engine, see

( 컄 page 47).

36

Getting started

Adjusting

왔

Adjusting

Warning!

G

All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before the vehicle is put into motion.

i

The memory function* (

컄 page 103) lets you store the setting for power seats*, steering wheel adjustment

(electrical)*, and exterior rear view mirrors.

Seats

The seats can be adjusted either manually or electrically, depending on the vehicle’s equipment.

For more information on seats, see “Seats”

(

컄 page 99).

Warning!

G

Do not adjust the driver seat while driving.

Adjusting the seat while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat back in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The seat back and seat belts provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body. Your seat must be adjusted so that you can correctly fasten your seat belt (

컄 page 44).

Never place hands under the seat or near moving parts while the seat is being adjusted.

Warning!

G


SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle.

Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch, the power seats* can be operated when the respective door is open.

Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

37

Getting started

Adjusting

Warning!

G

Children 12 years old and under must never ride in this vehicle, except in a

Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmart

TM1 compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmart

TM

system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed.

Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.

Infants and small children must be seated in an appropriate BabySmart

TM

compatible infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is significantly increased if the child restraints are not properly secured in the vehicle and the child is not properly secured in the child restraint.

1

BabySmart

TM

is a trademark of Siemens

Automotive Corp.

!

When moving the seats, make sure there are no items in the footwell or behind the seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats.

Manual seat adjustment

1 Seat fore and aft adjustment

2 Seat height

3 Backrest tilt

Seat fore and aft adjustment

왘

왘

Pull handle 1 .

Slide the seat to the desired position.

Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far rearward as possible, consistent with ability to properly operate controls.

왘

Allow handle 1 to reengage with an audible click.

왘

Check for proper engagement before driving.

38

Getting started

Adjusting

Seat height

왘

Pull or push handle 2 adjust the seat cushion until your legs are slightly supported.

up or down and

Power seat* adjustment

The seat adjustment switches are located on the outer side of each seat.

Backrest tilt

왘

Pull handle 3 and adjust the backrest until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel.

For more information, see “Seats”

(

컄 page 99).

Seat fore and aft adjustment

왘

Press the horizontal switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 1 .

Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely.

The position should be as far rearward as possible, consistent with ability to properly operate controls.

Seat height

왘

Press the horizontal switch up or down in direction of arrow 2 until your legs are slightly supported.

1 Seat fore and aft adjustment

2 Seat height

3 Backrest tilt

4 Seat cushion tilt

왘

Switch on the ignition (

컄 page 35).

or

왘

Open the respective door.

Backrest tilt

왘

Press the vertical switch forward or backward in direction of arrow 3 until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel.

39

Getting started

Adjusting

Seat cushion tilt

왘

Press the horizontal switch up or down in direction of arrow 4 until your upper legs are lightly supported.

Head restraint height

Warning!

G

For your protection, drive only with properly positioned head restraints.

Adjust head restraint so that the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

Head restraint

왘

Adjust the height of head restraints manually by pulling them upwards or pushing them downwards.

i

Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it is as close to the head as possible.

Steering wheel

Warning!

G

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or driving without the steering wheel adjustment feature locked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.


SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle.

Even with the SmartKey removed from the starter switch, the electrical steering wheel adjustment feature* can be operated when the driver’s door is open. Therefore, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

40

Getting started

Adjusting

Steering wheel adjustment, manual

왘

Make sure the steering column is securely locked by trying to move the steering wheel up and down, in and out before driving off.

!

Do not drive the vehicle until you have properly locked the steering column.

Steering wheel adjustment, electrical*

The lever for the electrical steering wheel adjustment is located on the steering column (lower left).

1 Adjustment handle

왘

To unlock the steering column, pull handle 1 out to its stop limit.

왘

Move the steering wheel to the desired position.

왘

Push handle 1 back to its original position to relock the steering column.

When you hear an audible click, the steering column is again fixed into place.

Warning!

G

Only adjust the steering wheel with the vehicle at a standstill and make sure the steering column is securely locked in place before driving off.

Driving without the steering column locked may cause an unexpected steering wheel movement which could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Make sure the steering column is securely locked by trying to move it up and down, and in and out before driving off.

1 Adjusting steering column, in or out

2 Adjusting steering column, up or down

왘


컄 page 35).

or

왘

Open the driver’s door.

41

Getting started

Adjusting

Adjusting steering column in or out

왘

Move the lever in direction of arrows 1 until a comfortable steering wheel position is reached with your arms slightly bent at the elbow.

Mirrors

Adjust the interior and exterior rear view mirrors before driving so that you have a good view of the road and traffic conditions.

Adjusting steering column up or down

왘

Move the lever in direction of arrows 2 .

Make sure your legs can move freely and all the displays (including malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible.

i

The memory function* (

컄 page 103) lets you store the settings for the steering wheel together with the settings for the exterior rear view mirrors and the driver’s seat position.

Warning!

G

In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks.

Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.

In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary.

!

Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water.

Interior rear view mirror

왘 Adjust the interior rear view mirror manually.

For more information, see “Rear view mirrors” (

컄 page 167).

42

Getting started

Adjusting

Exterior rear view mirror

Warning!

G

The switches are located on the lower part of the center console.

i

At low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.

Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

!

If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or rearward (hit from the front), reposition it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into place. The exterior rear view mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the mirror normally.

i

The memory function (

컄 page 103) lets you store the settings for the exterior rear view mirrors together with the settings for the steering wheel and the driver’s seat position.

왘

왘

1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror

2 Adjustment switch

3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror


컄 page 35).

Press switch 1 or 3 to select the respective exterior rear view mirror.

왘

Press adjustment switch 2 forward, rearward, left, or right according to the desired setting.

!

Before driving the vehicle through an automatic car wash, fold the exterior mirrors in. Otherwise they may get damaged.

For more information, see “Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position (parking aid)” (

컄 page 105).

43

Getting started

Driving

Warning!

G

Do not lay objects in the driver’s footwell. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in the driver’s footwell have sufficient clearance for the pedals.

During sudden driving or braking maneuvers the objects could get caught between the pedals. You could then no longer brake or accelerate.

Fastening the seat belts

Warning!

G

Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passengers are properly restrained, even pregnant women.

Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passenger should always wear seat belts.

If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.

In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are wearing your seat belt. The air bags can only provide the protection they were designed to afford if the occupants are using their seat belts

(

컄 page 62).

44

Getting started

Driving

Warning!

G

Children 12 years old and under must never ride in the front seat, except in a



TM

system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed.

Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.


TM

compatible infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle's seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.


1

BabySmart

TM


Automotive Corp.

Warning!

G

Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.

Warning!

G

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body.

Warning!

G

Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security” section (

컄 page 66) and (

컄 page 69).

45

Getting started

Driving

1 Loop for seat belt guidance

2 Latch plate

3 Release button

4 Buckle

왘

With a smooth motion, pull the belt from the belt outlet.

왘

Place the shoulder portion of the belt across the top of your shoulder and the lap portion across your hips.

왘

Push latch plate 2 into buckle 4 until it engages.

왘

If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.

For more information, see “Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning device and air bag” (

컄 page 66).

Proper use of seat belts

앫

Do not twist the seat belt when fastening.

앫

앫

Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder portion is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder (it should not touch the neck). Never pass the shoulder portion of the belt under your arm.

Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips (over hip joint) and not across the abdomen.

앫

Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.

46

Getting started

Driving

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.

Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same time.

When using a seat belt to secure infant or toddler restraints or children in booster seats, always follow the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Check your seat belt during travel to make sure it is properly positioned.

Make sure the seat belt is always fitted snugly. Take special care of this when wearing loose clothing.

Warning!

G

Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They could tear.

Do not allow the belt to get caught in the door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.

This could damage the belt.

Never attempt to make modifications to seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash, they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

Starting the engine

Warning!

G

Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.

Do not run the engine in confined areas

(such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open.

47

Getting started

Driving

Manual transmission

Gearshift pattern for manual transmission

For more information, see “Manual transmission” (

컄 page 150).

Starting

왘

왘

Depress brake pedal.

Make sure the gearshift lever is in neutral position (no gear selected).

왘

Fully depress the clutch pedal.

Otherwise the engine cannot be started due to the integrated safety interlock.

왘

왘

Do not depress accelerator.

Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position

3

(

컄 page 35) and hold until the engine starts.

For information on turning off the engine, see “Turning off engine” (

컄 page 58).

Automatic transmission*

Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission

P

Park position with gear selector lever lock

R

Reverse gear

N

Neutral position

D

Drive position

For more information, see “Automatic transmission*” (

컄 page 152).

48

Getting started

Driving

왘

왘

Starting

왘

Place the gear selector lever in position

P

.

Do not depress the accelerator.


3

(

컄 page 35) and release it again immediately. The engine starts automatically.

왘

Depress the brake pedal.

The gear selector lever lock is released.

For information on turning off the engine, see “Turning off engine” (

컄 page 58).

Starting difficulties

If the engine does not start as described, carry out the following steps:

왘


0

and repeat the starting procedure.

Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the vehicle battery.

왘

Get a jump start (

컄 page 399).

If the engine does not start after several starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the fuel supply system.

왘

Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

Parking brake

Warning!

G


SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.

49

Getting started

Driving


2 Release button

왘

Pull up slightly on parking brake lever 1 and press release button 2 .

왘

Push parking brake lever 1 down to its original position.

The brake warning lamp

;

(USA only) or

3

(Canada only) in the speedometer dial goes out.

Driving

Warning!

G

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

!

If you hear a warning signal when driving off, you have forgotten to release the parking brake.

!

Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear.

i

Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages and the locking knobs drop down.

For more information, see “Opening the doors from the inside” (

컄 page 94).

50

Getting started

Driving

Manual transmission

왘

왘

왘

Depress the brake pedal.


Move gearshift lever to first gear to drive forward, or to reverse gear to drive rearward.

왘

왘

Simultaneously release the brake pedal and slowly the clutch pedal.

Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.


!

Wait for the gear selection process to complete before setting the vehicle in motion.

왘

왘

왘 Depress the brake pedal.

왘

The gear selector lever lock is released.

Move gear selector lever to position

D

to drive forward, or to position

R

to drive rearward.

Release the brake pedal.

Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

i

During the brief warm-up, transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature.

Warning!

G

Vehicles with automatic transmission: It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of

P

or

N

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

51

Getting started

Driving

Switching on headlamps

Low beam headlamps

The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.

High beam

The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column.

Turn signals


Exterior lamp switch

1 Off

2 Low beam headlamps on

왘

Turn exterior lamp switch to position

B

.

Combination switch

1 High beam

2 High beam flasher

왘

Push combination switch in direction of arrow 1 .

The high beam headlamp indicator lamp

A

in the instrument cluster comes on (

컄 page 24).

For more information on headlamps, see

“Lighting” (

컄 page 106).


1 Turn signals, right

2 Turn signals, left

왘

Press combination switch in direction of arrow 1 or 2 .

The corresponding turn signal indicator lamp

K or

L

in the instrument cluster flashes (

컄 page 24).

52

Getting started

Driving

The combination switch resets automatically after major directional changes.

i

To signal minor directional changes, press combination switch only to point of resistance and release. The corresponding turn signals will flash three times.

Windshield wipers



1 Single wipe

2 Switching on windshield wipers

Switching on windshield wipers

왘

Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain.

0

Windshield wipers off

I

Intermittent wiping

II

Normal wiper speed

III

Fast wiper speed i

Vehicles without rain sensor:

When the vehicle is standing still, the wiper speed returns to the next lower setting.

Vehicles with rain sensor*:

Intermittent wiping interval is dependent on wetness of windshield. After the initial wipe, pauses between wipes are automatically controlled by the rain sensor.

컄컄

53

Getting started

Driving

컄컄

!

The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates on the windshield might scratch the glass and/or damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry windshield.

Vehicles with rain sensor*:

Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when vehicle is taken to an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in the presence of water sprayed on the windshield, and wipers may be damaged as a result.

Intermittent wiping

왘

Set combination switch to position

I

.

i

Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the vehicle is at a standstill and a door is opened.

앫

앫

Intermittent wiping will be continued when all doors are closed the clutch pedal is depressed (vehicles with manual transmission)

앫 the gear selector lever is in position

D

or

R

(vehicles with automatic transmission*)

Single wipe

왘

Press combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 1 .

The windshield wipers wipe one time without washer fluid.

Wiping with windshield washer fluid

왘

Push combination switch in direction of arrow 2 past the resistance point.

The windshield wipers operate with washer fluid.

For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*”

(

컄 page 295).

54

Getting started

Driving

앫

앫

!

If anything blocks the windshield wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediately.

앫 For safety reasons, remove the

SmartKey from the starter switch before attempting to remove any blockage.

Remove blockage.

Turn the windshield wipers on again.

If the windshield wipers fail to function at all with combination switch in position

I

,

앫 set combination switch to the next higher wiper speed

앫 have the windshield wipers checked at the nearest authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center

Problems while driving

왘

왘

The engine runs erratically and misfires

앫

앫

An ignition cable may be damaged.

The engine electronics may not be operating properly.

앫

Unburned gasoline may have entered the catalytic converter and damaged it.

Give very little gas.

Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

The coolant temperature is above

248°F (120°C)

The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling the engine.

왘

왘

Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and turn off the engine. Allow engine and coolant to cool.

Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (

컄 page 293).

In case of accident

If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:

왘

Do not start the engine under any circumstances.

왘

Notify local fire and/or police authorities.

If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:

왘

Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

If no damage can be determined on the

앫

앫

앫

왘

Major assemblies

Fuel system

Engine mount

Start the engine in the usual manner.

55

Getting started


You have now completed your first drive.

You have properly stopped and parked your vehicle. End your drive as follows.

Warning!

G

Vehicles with manual transmission:

Wait until the vehicle is stationary before removing the SmartKey from the starter switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when the SmartKey is removed.

Warning!

G

With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering system. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.

Warning!

G

Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always:

Keep right foot on brake pedal.

Pull up the parking brake lever firmly.

Move the gear selector lever* to position

P

(manual transmission: first or reverse gear).

Slowly release brake pedal.

When parked on an incline, turn front wheels towards the road curb.

앫


0

and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

앫

Take the SmartKey and lock vehicle when leaving.

Parking brake


2 Release button

왘

Pull up parking brake lever 1 firmly.

When the engine is running, the brake warning lamp

;

(USA only) or

3

(Canada only) in the speedometer dial comes on.

56

Getting started


Warning!

G

Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever* not fully engaged in position

P

(manual transmission: first or reverse gear) is dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline, position

P

(manual transmission: first or reverse gear) alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.

Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position

P


When parked on an incline, turn the front wheels towards the road curb.

Warning!

G


SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the parking brake and/or move the gear selector lever* from position

P

(manual transmission: into

Neutral), either of which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.

Switching off headlamps

왘

Turn exterior lamp switch to

M

(

컄 page 52).

For more information, see “Lighting”

(

컄 page 106).

57

Getting started


Turning off engine

왘

Manual transmission: Move the gearshift lever into first or reverse gear.

왘

Automatic transmission*: Place the gear selector lever in position

P

.

i

Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting into first or reverse gear

(automatic transmission*: gear selector lever in position

P

).

On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the road curb.

i



P

.

왘

왘

Press the seat belt release button

(

컄 page 46).

Guide the latch plate to allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt.

왘


0


The immobilizer is activated.

i

With the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on (

컄 page 106).

The message

Turn off lights

appears in the multifunction display.

58

Getting started


i



Warning!

G

To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the door openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are around.

Before closing doors, make sure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door during closing.

왘

왘

Exit the vehicle and close all doors.

Press the lock button

‹

on the

SmartKey (

컄 page 34).

With the hood, trunk and all doors closed, all turn signal lamps flash three times. The locking knobs on the doors move down.

The anti-theft alarm system is armed now (

컄 page 85).

i



Warning!

G



For more information, see “Locking and unlocking” (

컄 page 90).

59

60


Occupant safety

Panic alarm

Driving safety systems

Anti-theft systems

61


Occupant safety

In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems of the vehicle.

The restraint systems are

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Seat belts

Emergency tensioning device (ETD)

Air bags

Child seats

Child seat recognition

As independent systems, their protective effects work in conjunction with each other.

i

For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”

(

컄 page 73).

The

1 indicator lamp in the speedometer dial (

컄 page 24) comes on

앫 for about four seconds when you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position

1

. It then goes out briefly, comes on again and remains lit until you start the engine.

앫 for about four seconds when you start the engine by turning the SmartKey.

i

The

1 indicator lamp remains lit if the SmartKey is turned to position

2

and left there. The indicator lamp will go out when you start the engine.

The

1 indicator lamp goes out shortly after you start the engine. This shows that the restraint systems are operational.

앫

앫

앫

A malfunction in the system has been detected if the

1 indicator lamp

앫 fails to extinguish after approximately four seconds with the SmartKey in the starter switch position

1

does not come on at all comes on after the engine was started comes on while driving

For safety reasons, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked.

For more information, see “Practical hints”

(

컄 page 346).

62


Occupant safety

Warning!

G

In the event that the

1 indicator lamp comes on during driving or does not come on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a malfunction. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.

In addition, improper work on the SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment.

Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Air bags

Warning!

G

Air bags are designed to reduce the potential of injury in certain frontal impacts (front air bags, kneebags), or side impacts

(head-thorax air bags) which may cause significant injuries. However, no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities.

The activation of the air bags temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the air bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble.

To avoid this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or door.

Warning!

G

To reduce the risk of injury when the front air bags inflate, it is very important for the driver and passenger to always be in a properly seated position and to wear their seat belts.

For maximum protection in the event of a collision always be in normal seated position with your back against the backrest. Fasten your seat belt and ensure it is properly positioned on your body.

Since the air bag inflates with considerable speed and force, a proper seating and hands on steering wheel position will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or too close to the air bag can be seriously injured by an air bag as it inflates with great force in the blink of an eye:

앫

Sit properly belted in a nearly upright position with your back against the seat backrest.

컄컄

63


Occupant safety

컄컄

앫

앫

앫

앫

Adjust the driver seat as far as possible rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the air bag cover on the steering wheel must be at least ten inches (25 cm) or more. You should be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and the steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

Do not lean with your head or chest close to the steering wheel or dashboard.

Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and potential severity of hand/arm injury when driver front air bag inflates.

Adjust the passenger seat as far as possible rearward from the dashboard when the seat is occupied.

앫

앫

Occupants, especially children, should never lean their heads in the area of the door where the head-thorax air bag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the air bag be triggered. Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts and appropriately sized infant or child restraint system.


Mercedes-Benz authorized

BabySmart

TM1

compatible child seat, which operates with the BabySmart

TM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise, they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.

1

BabySmart

TM


Automotive Corp.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.

If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you make the buyer aware of this safety information. Be sure to give the buyer this

Operator’s Manual.

64


Occupant safety

Warning!

G

Accident research shows that the safest place for children in an automobile is in the rear seat. Should you choose to place a child

12 years old or under in the passenger seat of your vehicle, you must properly use a

BabySmart

TM1

child restraint which will turn off the passenger front air bag.

BabySmart

TM

will not, however, turn off any head-thorax air bag.

It should be noted, however, that there is a possibility of a head-thorax air bag related injury if occupants, especially children, are not properly seated or restrained when next to a head-thorax air bag which needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.

1

BabySmart

TM


Automotive Corp.

To help avoid the possibility of injury, please follow these guidelines:

(1) Occupants, especially children, should never place their bodies or lean their heads in the area of the door where the head-thorax air bag inflates. This could result in serious injuries or death should the head-thorax air bag be activated.

(2) Always sit nearly upright, properly use the seat belts and use an appropriately sized infant or child restraint system for all children 12 years old or under.

(3) Always wear seat belts properly.

If you believe that, even with the use of these guidelines, it would be safer for your passenger seat occupants to have the passenger head-thorax air bag deactivated, then deactivation can be accomplished upon your written request to do so at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an additional cost.

Please contact your local authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer

Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(1-800-367-6372) for details.

65


Occupant safety

i

Air bags are designed to activate only in certain frontal impacts (front air bags, kneebags), or side impacts

(head-thorax air bags) which exceed preset thresholds.

Only during these types of impacts, if of sufficient severity to meet the deployment thresholds, will they provide their supplemental protection.

The driver and passenger should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for the air bags to provide their supplemental protection.

In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts, roll-overs, other side impacts, rear collisions, or other accidents, the air bags will not be activated. The driver and the passenger will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.

We caution you not to rely on the presence of the air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.

Your vehicle was originally equipped with air bags that are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important to your safety and that of your passengers that you replace deployed air bags and repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.

Safety guidelines for the seat belt, emergency tensioning device and air bag

Warning!

G

앫

앫

앫

Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked. Only use belts installed or supplied by an authorized


Air bags and emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed to function on a one-time only basis. An air bag or ETD that was activated must be replaced.

No modifications of any kind may be made to any components or wiring of the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the

SRS, the installation of additional trim material, badges etc. over the steering wheel hub, passenger air bag cover, door trim panels, or door frame trims,

66


Occupant safety

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫 and installation of additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near

SRS components and wiring. Keep area between air bags and occupants free from objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).

Do not pass belts over sharp edges.

They could tear.

Do not make any modification that could change the effectiveness of the belts.

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may severely weaken them. In a crash they may not be able to provide adequate protection.

Never place your feet on the instrument panel, or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.

Air bag system components will be hot after an air bag has inflated. Do not touch.

앫

앫

앫

In addition, improper repair work on the

SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

For your protection and the protection of others, when scrapping the air bag unit or emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available from your authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

Given the considerable deployment speed and the textile structure of the air bags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other injuries resulting from air bag deployment.

Warning!

G

Only use seat covers which have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of the front side impact airbags. Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.

When you sell your vehicle, we strongly urge you to give notice to the subsequent owner that it is equipped with an SRS by alerting them to the applicable section in the Operator’s Manual.

67


Occupant safety

Front air bags

1 Driver’s air bag

2 Passenger air bag

3 Kneebag (passenger side)

4 Kneebag (driver’s side)

앫

앫

Driver and passenger air bags are deployed in the event of certain frontal impacts if impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold

앫 independently of the head-thorax air bags

앫

앫

The air bags will not deploy in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.

The passenger air bag will only be deployed if

앫 the passenger seat is occupied the

75 indicator lamp in the center console is not lit (

컄 page 75) the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold

!

Do not place objects heavier than

20 lbs (9 kg) on the passenger seat.

This could cause the front air bag or head-thorax air bag on the passenger side to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system’s deployment threshold.

Kneebags

The driver-side kneebag is located on the driver’s side lower instrument panel. The passenger-side kneebag is located on the passenger side below the glove box. They are designed to operate together with the air bags in certain frontal impacts exceeding a preset threshold. The kneebags operate best in conjunction with properly positioned and fastened seat belts.

68


Occupant safety

Head-thorax air bags Seat belts

앫

앫

1 Head-thorax air bag

The head-thorax air bags are deployed on the impacted side of the vehicle in impacts exceeding a preset deployment threshold

앫 independently of the front air bags

The passenger-side head-thorax air bag will only deploy if the system senses that the passenger seat is occupied.

The head-thorax air bags are not deployed in impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.

When the engine is started, the red seat belt telltale

<

comes on to remind you and your passenger to fasten your seat belts. If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened before the engine is started, the seat belt telltale

<

comes on and a warning chime sounds for approximately six seconds when the engine is started.

The use of seat belts and infant and child restraint systems is required by law in all

50 states, the District of Columbia, the

U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.

Even where this is not the case, all vehicle occupants should have their seat belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.

For more information on fastening seat belts, see “Fastening the seat belts”

(

컄 page 44).

i

For information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”

(

컄 page 73).

69


Occupant safety

Warning!

G

Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure your passenger is properly restrained, even pregnant women.

Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your risk of injuries and their likely severity in an accident. You and your passenger should always wear seat belts.

If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe without your seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from it. You can be seriously injured or killed.

In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.

Warning!

G

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly upright position and the belt is properly positioned on the body.

Warning!

G

Never let more people ride in the vehicle than there are seat belts available. Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time.

Warning!

G

Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly stressed in an accident must be replaced and their anchoring points must also be checked.

Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Do not make any modifications to the seat belts. This can lead to unintended activation of the ETDs or to failure.


Have all work carried out only by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized


70


Occupant safety

Warning!

G

USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY

앫

Seat belts can only work when used properly. Never wear seat belts in any other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.

앫

Each occupant should wear his or her seat belt at all times, because seat belts help reduce the likelihood and potential severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint system includes SRS (driver air bag, passenger air bag, kneebags, head-thorax air bags) and ETD (seat belt emergency tensioning device).

The system is designed to enhance the protection offered to properly belted occupants in certain frontal (front air bags, kneebags, and EDT) and side (head-thorax air bags and EDT) impacts which exceed preset deployment thresholds.

앫

앫

앫

앫

Never wear the shoulder belt under your arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move too far forward. That would increase the chance of head and neck injuries. The belt would also apply too much force to the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as your liver or spleen.

Never wear belts over rigid or breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these might cause injuries.

Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in a crash.

Never use a seat belt for more than one person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another person or other objects.

앫

앫

앫

Belts should not be worn twisted. In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of the belt to manage impact forces. The twisted belt against your body could cause injuries.

Pregnant women should also use a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion should be positioned as low as possible on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.

Never place your feet on the instrument panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always keep both feet on the floor in front of the seat.

71


Occupant safety

Emergency tensioning device (ETD), seat belt force limiter

The seat belts are equipped with emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) and seat belt force limiters.

The ETD is designed to activate in the following cases:

앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding a preset severity level.

앫 if the restraint systems are operational and functioning correctly, see

“

1 indicator lamp” (

컄 page 62).

i

The ETDs for the seats will only activate if the respective seat belt is fastened

(latch plate properly inserted into buckle).

In an impact emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a way that the seat belts fit more snugly against the body. Belt force limiters reduce the force exerted by the seat belts on occupants during a crash.

Warning!

G

An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that was activated must be replaced.

When scrapping the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be followed. These are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

!

Do not place objects heavier than

20 lbs (9 kg) on the passenger seat.

This could cause the front air bag or head-thorax air bag on the passenger side and, with the seat belt fastened to secure the object, the ETD to deploy in a crash which exceeds the system’s deployment threshold.

72


Occupant safety

Children in the vehicle

If an infant or child is traveling with you in the vehicle:

앫

Secure the child using an infant or child restraint appropriate to the age and size of the child.

앫

Ensure the infant or child is properly secured at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any


Infant and child restraint systems

Use only a BabySmart

TM1

compatible child restraint for the passenger seat in this vehicle.

We recommend all infants and children be properly restrained at all times while the vehicle is in motion.

The passenger lap-shoulder belt has a special seat belt retractor for secure fastening of child restraints.

To fasten a child restraint, follow child restraint instructions for mounting. Then pull the shoulder belt out completely and let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate that the special seat belt retractor is activated.

The belt is now locked. Push down on child restraint to take up any slack.

To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and let seat belt retract completely. The seat belt can again be used in the usual manner.

Warning!

G

Never release the seat belt buckle while the vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt retractor will be deactivated.

1

BabySmart

TM


Automotive Corp.

73


Occupant safety

!

The use of infant or child restraints is required by law in all 50 states, the

District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.

Infants and small children should be seated in an appropriate infant or child restraint system properly secured by a lap-shoulder belt that complies with

U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.

A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint.

When using any infant or child restraint system, be sure to carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Please read and observe warning labels affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant or child restraints.

Warning!

G




TM

system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front air bag when it is properly installed. Otherwise they will be struck by the air bag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury can result.


TM

compatible infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, fully in accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

1

BabySmart

TM


Automotive Corp.

74

Infants and small children should never share a seat belt with another occupant.

During an accident, they could be crushed between the occupant and seat belt.

Children too big for child restraint systems should use regular seat belts. Position the shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a booster.



Occupant safety

When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat belt to prevent the child restraint from becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle; even if the children are secured in a child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause serious personal injury.

BabySmart

TM1

air bag deactivation system

1

75 indicator lamp

1

BabySmart

TM


Automotive Corp.

75


Occupant safety

Special BabySmart

TM1

compatible child seats, designed for use with the

Mercedes-Benz system and available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center are required for use with the BabySmart

TM air bag deactivation system. With the special child seat properly installed, the passenger front air bag will not deploy.

The

75 indicator lamp 1 will be illuminated, except with the SmartKey removed or in starter switch position

0

.

i

The system does not deactivate the head-thorax air bag and the ETD (emergency tensioning device).

Self-test BabySmart

TM

without special child seat installed

After turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position

1

or

2

, the

75 indicator lamp 1 comes on for approximately six seconds and then goes out.

If the

75 indicator lamp should not come on or is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any child on the passenger seat.

For more information, see “Practical hints”

(

컄 page 347).

Warning!

G

The BabySmart

TM

air bag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat designed to operate with it. It will not work with child seats which are not BabySmart

TM compatible.

Never place anything between seat cushion and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces the effectiveness of the deactivation system. The bottom of the child seat must make full contact with the passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of protecting the child.

Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation of special child seats.

1

BabySmart

TM


Automotive Corp.

76

Warning!

G

When using a BabySmart

TM1

compatible child seat on the passenger seat, the front passenger air bag will not deploy only if the

75 indicator lamp remains illuminated.

Please be sure to check the

75 indicator lamp every time you use the special system child seat.

Should the

75 indicator lamp go out while the restraint is installed, please check installation. If the

75 indicator lamp remains out, do not use the BabySmart

TM

restraint to transport children on the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

1

BabySmart

TM


Automotive Corp.

Warning!

G

Do not place powered-on laptops, cell phones and like electronic devices on the passenger seat. Signals from such devices may interfere with the BabySmart

TM

system.

Such signal interference may cause the

75 indicator lamp not to come on during self-test or be continuously lit, indicating that the system is not functioning.


Occupant safety

77


Panic alarm

An audible alarm and flashing exterior lamps will operate for approximately

2

1

/

2 minutes.

Activating Deactivating

왘

Press and hold button 1 for at least one second.

i


SmartKey signaling range for the panic alarm is considerably reduced. The panic alarm then only functions if the

SmartKey is held in close proximity towards the antenna base.

왘 or

Press button 1 again.

왘

Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.

1

Â button

78

i

USA only:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

i

Canada only:

This device complies with RSS-210 of

Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.



Panic alarm

79



앫

앫

앫

In this section you will find information on the following driving safety systems:

ABS (Antilock Brake System)

BAS (Brake Assist System)

ESP (Electronic Stability Program) i

In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, the BAS, and the ESP is only achieved with winter tires (M+S tires), or snow chains as required.

Warning!

G

The following factors increase the risk of accidents:

앫

앫

앫

Excessive speed, especially in turns

Wet and slippery road surfaces

Following another vehicle too closely

The ABS, BAS, and ESP cannot reduce this risk.

Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

ABS

Warning!

G

Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure so that the wheels do not lock during braking. This allows you to maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.

The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent of road surface conditions.

On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even to light brake pressure.

The

indicator lamp in the speedometer dial (

컄 page 24) comes on when you switch on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running.

80



Braking

At the instant one of the wheels is about to lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in the regulating mode.

왘

Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation.

Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure yields the advantages provided by the ABS, namely braking power and the ability to steer the vehicle.

The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

Emergency brake maneuver

왘

Keep continuous full pressure on the brake pedal.

Warning!

G

The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

BAS

The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in emergency situations. If you apply the brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing braking distance. Apply continuous full braking pressure until the emergency braking situation is over. The

ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.

When you release the brake pedal, the brakes function again as normal. The BAS is then deactivated.

Warning!

G

If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake system is still functioning normally, but without the additional brake boost available that

BAS would normally provide in an emergency braking maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance may increase.

For more information, see “Practical Hints”

(

컄 page 342).

81



Warning!

G

ESP

The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.

The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.


(

컄 page 351).

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is operational as soon as the engine is running and monitors the vehicle’s traction

(force of adhesive friction between the tires and the road surface) and handling.

The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid.

By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and by limiting engine output, the

ESP works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is especially useful while driving off and on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP also stabilizes the vehicle during braking maneuvers.

The ESP warning lamp v

in the speedometer dial flashes when the ESP is engaged.


in the speedometer dial comes on when you switch on the ignition. It goes out when the engine is running.

Warning!

G

Never switch off the ESP when you see the

ESP warning lamp v

flashing in the speedometer dial. In this case, proceed as follows:

앫

While driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.

앫

While driving, ease up on the accelerator.

앫

Adapt your speed and driving style to the prevailing road conditions.

Failure to observe these guidelines could cause the vehicle to skid.

The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.

82



Warning!

G

The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded. The ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

i

The ESP will only function properly if you use wheels of the recommended tire size (

컄 page 413).

!

Because of the ESP’s automatic operation, the engine must be turned off

(SmartKey in starter switch position

0

or

1

) when

앫 the parking brake is being tested on a brake test dynamometer

앫 the vehicle is being towed with the front axle raised

Active braking action through the ESP may otherwise seriously damage the brake system.


( 컄 page 345).

Switching off the ESP

Warning!

G

The ESP should not be switched off during normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.

To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off the ESP in driving situations where it would be advantageous to have the drive wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip such as:

앫 starting out on slippery surfaces and in deep snow in conjunction with snow chains

앫 in sand or gravel

!

Turn on the ESP immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply anymore.

83



When you switch off the ESP

앫

앫 the ESP does not stabilize the vehicle the engine output is not limited, which allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut into surfaces for a better grip

앫 the traction control will still brake a spinning wheel

앫 the ESP continues to operate when you are braking i

When the ESP is switched off and one or more drive wheels are spinning, the

ESP warning lamp v

in the speedometer dial flashes. However, the ESP will then not stabilize the vehicle.

The switch is located on the upper part of the center console.

1 ESP switch (off/on)

왘

Press ESP switch 1 .


in the speedometer dial comes on.

The ESP is deactivated.

Warning!

G

When the ESP warning lamp v

is illuminated continuously, the ESP is switched off.

Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating status of the ESP.

!

Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period with the ESP switched off. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Switching on the ESP

왘

Press ESP switch 1 .


in the speedometer dial goes out.

You are now again in normal driving mode with the ESP switched on.

84

왔


Immobilizer Anti-theft alarm system

The immobilizer prevents unauthorized persons from starting your vehicle.

Activating

왘

Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

Deactivating

왘


컄 page 35).

i

Starting the engine will also deactivate the immobilizer.

In case the engine cannot be started

(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the

USA), or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Once the alarm system has been armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered when someone opens a door the trunk lid the hood the glove box the storage compartment in the center console

앫

앫

The alarm system will also be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle opening the vehicle with the mechanical key



i

The alarm will stay on, even if the activating element (e.g. a door) is immediately closed.

i

If the alarm stays on for more than

30 seconds, a call to the Response

Center is initiated automatically by the

Tele Aid system (

컄 page 257), provided

Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available (

컄 page 257).

85



Arming the alarm system

왘

Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey.

The turn signal lamps flash three times to indicate that the alarm system is activated.

After approximately 15 seconds the indicator lamp in the central locking switch starts flashing (

컄 page 98).

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫 i

If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed: a door the trunk lid the fuel filler flap the glove box the storage compartment under the armrest

Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again.

Disarming the alarm system

왘

Unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey.

The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate that the alarm system is deactivated.

Canceling the alarm

To cancel the alarm:

왘

Press the

Œ

or

‹ button on the

SmartKey.

or

왘


Tow-away alarm

Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual and audible alarm will be triggered when someone attempts to raise the vehicle.

i

The tow-away protection alarm is triggered, for example, if the vehicle is lifted on one side.

If the alarm stays on for more than

30 seconds, a call to the Response

Center is initiated automatically by the

Tele Aid system (

컄 page 257), provided

Tele Aid service was subscribed to and properly activated, and that necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are available (

컄 page 257).

86



Arming tow-away alarm

왘

Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey.

The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after about 30 seconds.

i

When you unlock your vehicle, the tow-away protection disarms automatically. The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock the vehicle again.

The switch is located on the lower part of the center console.

왘

Press tow-away alarm deactivation switch 2 .

Indicator lamp 1 in the tow-away alarm deactivation switch comes on briefly.

왘

왘

Exit your vehicle.

Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey.

The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock your vehicle again.

Disarming tow-away alarm

To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm, switch off the tow-away alarm feature before towing the vehicle, or when parking on a surface subject to movement, such as a ferry or auto train.

1 Indicator lamp

2 Tow-away alarm deactivation switch

왘

Switch off the ignition (

컄 page 35).

왘


i

You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm while the ignition is switched on.

Canceling tow-away alarm

To cancel the alarm:

왘

Press the

Œ

or

‹ button on the

SmartKey.

or

왘


87

88


Locking and unlocking

Seats

Memory function*

Lighting


Control system



Good visibility

Climate control


Audio system

Power windows

Retractable hardtop

Driving systems

Useful features

89



In the “Controls in detail” section you will find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed in your vehicle.

If you are already familiar with the basic functions of your vehicle, this section will be of particular interest to you.

To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the

“Getting started” section of this manual.

The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment.

For more information on unlocking and locking, see (

컄 page 34) and (

컄 page 56).

SmartKey

Your vehicle comes supplied with two

SmartKeys, each with remote control and a removable mechanical key.

The locking tabs for the mechanical key portion of the two SmartKeys are a different color to help distinguish each Smart-

Key unit.

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is advisable to only unlock the vehicle when you are in close proximity to it.

The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks: the doors the trunk lid the fuel filler flap the glove box the storage compartment under the armrest

SmartKey with remote control

1

‹

Lock button

2

Š

Unlock button for the trunk lid

3 Mechanical key locking tab

4

Œ

Unlock button

5 Battery check lamp

6

Â

Panic button (

컄 page 78) i



90

Warning!

G


SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.

!

To prevent possible malfunction, avoid exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electromagnetic radiation.

i

USA only:







i

Canada only:






i

You can also open and close the retractable hardtop using the

SmartKey* (

컄 page 242).

91



Factory setting

앫

앫

Global unlocking

왘

Press button

Œ

.

All turn signal lamps flash once.

The lock buttons on the doors move up.

The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed (

컄 page 85).

The vehicle will lock again automatically and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if: neither door nor trunk is opened the SmartKey is not inserted in the starter switch

앫 the central locking switch is not activated

Global locking

왘

Press button

‹

.



컄 page 85).

i

If the turn signal lamps do not flash three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed:

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫 a door the trunk lid the fuel filler flap the glove box the storage compartment under the armrest

Close the respective element and lock the vehicle again.

Selective setting

If you frequently travel alone, you may wish to reprogram the SmartKey so that pressing button

Œ

only unlocks the driver’s door, the storage compartment under the armrest, the glove box, and the fuel filler flap.

왘

Press and hold buttons

Œ and

‹ simultaneously for about six seconds.

Battery check lamp 5 flashes twice.

The SmartKey will then function as follows:

Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler flap

왘

Press button

Œ

once.


The lock button on the driver’s door move up. The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed (

컄 page 85).

92

Global unlocking

왘

Press button

Œ

twice.


The lock buttons on the doors move up.

The anti-theft alarm system is disarmed (

컄 page 85).

Global locking

왘

Press button

‹

.



컄 page 85).

Restoring to factory setting

왘

Press and hold buttons

Œ and

‹ simultaneously for about six seconds.

Battery check lamp 5 flashes twice.

The SmartKey is set to the factory setting again.



!

If you can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey, then the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is drained.

앫

앫

앫

앫

Check the batteries in the

SmartKey and replace them if necessary ( 컄 page 378).

Use the mechanical key to lock/unlock the driver’s door (

컄 page 374).

Use the mechanical key to lock/unlock the trunk lid as required

( 컄 page 375).

Have the vehicle battery and the battery connections checked

(

컄 page 396).

If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

Unlocking the trunk lid

You can unlock and open the trunk lid separately.

왘

Press and hold button

Š

on the

SmartKey until the trunk lid unlocks.

For opening the trunk, see “Opening the trunk” (

컄 page 95).

Checking the batteries

왘

Press button

‹ or

Œ

.

Battery check lamp 5 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order.

i

If battery check lamp 5 does not come on briefly during check, then the

SmartKey batteries are discharged.

앫

Replace the batteries (

컄 page 378).

You can obtain the required batteries at any authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

93



i

If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing button

‹ or

Œ

will lock or unlock the vehicle accordingly.

Opening the doors from the inside

You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.

Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key

If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key, you should do the following:

왘

Have the SmartKey deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

왘

Report the loss of the SmartKey or the mechanical key to your car insurance company immediately.

왘

If necessary have the mechanical lock replaced.

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to supply you with a replacement.

1 Inside door handle

2 Locking knob

왘

Pull on door handle door.

1 of the desired

If the door was locked, locking knob 2 will move up.

i

If the vehicle has previously been centrally locked from the outside with the

SmartKey, opening a door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.

To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:

앫

Press button

Œ or

‹

on the

SmartKey.

앫


i



94



Opening the trunk

왘

왘

A minimum height clearance of 5.78 ft

(1.76 m) is required to open the trunk lid.

The handle is located above the rear license plate recess.

Pull on the handle.

Lift the trunk lid.

i

The vehicle or trunk lid must be unlocked before the trunk lid can be opened.

Closing the trunk

!

When the trunk lid is lifted slightly, it swings open upwards automatically.

Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.

The trunk lid can also be opened from its inside in an emergency, see “Trunk lid emergency release” (

컄 page 96).

1 Handle

왘

Lower the trunk lid using handle 1 .

왘

Close the trunk lid with hands placed flat on the trunk lid.

Warning!

G

To prevent possible personal injury, always keep hands and fingers away from the trunk lid opening when closing the trunk lid. Be especially careful when small children are around.

Warning!

G


SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to open a locked door from the inside, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.

Warning!

G

Only drive with the trunk lid closed as, among other dangers such as visibility blockage, exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle interior.

95



i

Do not place the SmartKey in the open trunk. You may lock yourself out.

Trunk lid emergency release

The emergency release button is located on the inside of the trunk lid.

i

If the vehicle was previously centrally locked, the trunk lid will lock automatically when closed. The turn signal lamps will flash three times to confirm locking.

1 Emergency release button

왘

Briefly press emergency release button 1 .

The trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly.

왘

Push up the trunk lid to fully open.

i

The emergency release button unlocks the trunk while the vehicle is standing still or in motion.

Illumination of the emergency release button:

앫

The button flashes for 30 minutes after opening the trunk.

앫

The button flashes for 60 minutes after closing the trunk.

i

The emergency release button does not unlock the trunk if the vehicle battery is discharged or disconnected.

96



i

If the vehicle has previously been centrally locked from the outside with the

SmartKey, opening the trunk from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.


앫

Press button

Œ or

‹ on the

SmartKey.

앫


Automatic central locking

The doors and the trunk automatically lock when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).


i

The doors unlock automatically after an accident if the force of the impact exceeds a preset threshold.

앫

앫

To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking when the vehicle is pushed or towed is on a test stand

Locking and unlocking from the inside

You can lock or unlock the doors and the trunk from inside using the central locking switch. This can be useful, for example, if you want to lock the vehicle before starting to drive.

The fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked with the central locking or unlocking switch, respectively.

Warning!

G



You can deactivate the automatic locking using the control system, see “Setting automatic locking” (

컄 page 141).

97



The switches are located on the upper part of the center console.

1 Central locking switch

2 Central unlocking switch i


If the vehicle was previously centrally locked using the SmartKey, it will not unlock using the central unlocking switch 2 .

If the vehicle was previously locked with the central locking switch 1

앫 while in the selective remote control mode, only the door opened from inside is unlocked.

앫 while in the global remote control mode, the vehicle is unlocked completely when a door is opened from the inside.

Locking

왘

Press central locking switch 1 .

If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.

Unlocking

왘

Press central unlocking switch

The vehicle unlocks.

2 .

98


Seats

왔

Seats

For information on seat adjustment, see

“Adjusting” (

컄 page 37).

Easy-entry/exit feature*

This feature allows for easier entry into and exit from the vehicle.

The easy-entry/exit feature can be switched on or off, see “Setting easy-entry/exit feature*” (

컄 page 142).

Warning!

G

You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.

To cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following:

앫

앫

Press seat adjustment switch*

(

컄 page 39).

Move steering column stalk*

(

컄 page 41).

앫

Press memory position switch*

(

컄 page 104).

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Children could open the driver’s door an unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

When exiting the vehicle with the easy-entry/exit feature activated and depending on your selection, the steering wheel tilts upwards and/or the driver’s seat moves a few inches to the rear when you:

앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter switch,

앫 or open the driver’s door with the

SmartKey in starter switch position

0

or

1

.

99


Seats

i

If the current position for the steering wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering wheel will no longer be able to move upward when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.

If the current seat position falls into a factory-set position range and the system recognizes the current seat position to be rearward enough for easy entry and exit, the driver’s seat will not move to the rear when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.

When entering the vehicle, with the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel or, depending on your selection, the steering wheel and driver’s seat will return to their last set position or a factory-set maximum forward position when you

앫 close the driver’s door with the ignition switched on.

앫 insert the SmartKey into the starter switch with the driver’s door closed.

i

For safety reasons, the driver’s seat will not return to its last set position with the easy-entry/exit feature activated if the system recognizes the last set position as an extreme forward position.

Instead, the driver’s seat will remain at or move to a factory-set maximum forward position. To again fully return the driver’s seat to your last set or to a memory position, adjust the driver’s seat to the desired position or press and hold the respective memory position switch* (

컄 page 104).

100


Seats

Seat heating*


The red indicator lamps 2 on the seat heating switch show the heating level selected:

1

2

Seat heating switch (driver’s side)

Indicator lamps

Level

3

Three indicator lamps on.

2

1 off

After approximately five minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to level 2.

Two indicator lamps on.

After approximately ten minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to level 1.

One indicator lamp on.

After approximately 20 minutes, seat heating is automatically switched to off.

No indicator lamp on.

왘


컄 page 35).

Switching on seat heating

왘

Press the desired seat heating switch.

왘

Three red indicator lamps 2 on the respective seat heating switch come on.

Press the seat heating switch repeatedly until the desired seat heating level is reached.

Switching off seat heating

왘

Press the desired seat heating switch repeatedly until all indicator lamps 2 on the seat heating switch go out.

i

If one or all of the indicator lamps 2 on the seat heating switch are flashing, there is insufficient voltage due to too many electrical consumers being turned on. The seat heating switches off automatically.

The seat heating will switch back on again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.

101


Seats

AIRSCARF neck-level heating*

The AIRSCARF neck-level heating provides the area surrounding the occupants’ necks with a heated air stream flowing from openings in the head restraints.


Warning!

G

When switching on the AIRSCARF neck-level heating, the air streaming from the openings may be very hot. When in close proximity to the openings, you could be seriously burned. To avoid serious personal injuries, switch the AIRSCARF to a lower heating level.

1 AIRSCARF switch (driver’s side)

2 Indicator lamps

The red indicator lamps 2 on the

AIRSCARF switches show which heating level you have selected:

2

1

Level

3 off

Three indicator lamps on

(highest heating level)

Two indicator lamps on

One indicator lamp on

(lowest heating level)

No indicator lamp on

왘


컄 page 35).

Switching on

왘

Press the respective AIRSCARF switch for the desired side.

왘

All three indicator lamps on the respective AIRSCARF switch come on. After a preheating time of approximately seven seconds, the blower starts.

Press the respective AIRSCARF switch repeatedly until the desired AIRSCARF heating level for the corresponding seat is reached.

Switching off

왘

Press the respective AIRSCARF switch repeatedly until all indicator lamps on the AIRSCARF switch go out.

i

After switching off the AIRSCARF neck-level heating, the AIRSCARF fan continues to operate for approximately

10 seconds to cool down the heater elements.

102


Memory function*

왔

Memory function*

!

Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust the seat height, seat position fore and aft, and seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be adjusted for proper height. See also the section on air bags for proper seat positioning (

컄 page 63).

In addition, adjust the steering wheel to ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the interior and exterior rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision.

Fasten seat belts. Infants and small children should be seated in a properly secured restraint system that complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards 213 and 255 and Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.

You can store up to three different settings for each SmartKey.

The following settings are stored when using the buttons on the outer side of the driver’s seat:

앫

앫

앫

Driver’s seat and backrest position

Steering wheel position

Exterior rear view mirror positions

These key-dependent memory settings can be deactivated if desired. For information on key-dependent memory settings, see “Setting key-dependency”

(

컄 page 143).

The following settings are not key-dependent. They are stored when using the buttons on the outer side of the passenger seat:

앫

Passenger seat and backrest position.

Warning!

G

Do not activate the memory function while driving. Activating the memory function while driving could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

103


Memory function*

The memory button and memory position switch are located on the outer side of each seat.

Storing positions into memory

왘

왘

왘

Adjust the seat, on the driver’s side also the steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors, to the desired positions (

컄 page 37).

Press memory button

M

1 .

Release memory button

M

1 and press a memory position switch 2 within three seconds.

All settings are stored to the selected position.

1 Memory button

M

2 Memory position switch

왘


컄 page 35).

or

왘

Open the respective door.

Recalling positions from memory

!

Do not operate the power seats using the memory position switches if the seat backrest is in an excessively reclined position. Doing so could cause damage to the seats.

왘

Press and hold desired memory position switch 2 until the seat, on the driver’s side also the steering wheel and exterior rear view mirrors, have completely moved to the stored positions.

i

Releasing the memory position switches immediately stops movement to the stored positions.

104


Memory function*

Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position (parking aid)

For easier parking, you can adjust the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so that you can see the right rear wheel as soon as you engage reverse gear

R

.

You can switch the parking position feature on and off via the control system

(

컄 page 144).

For information on activating the parking position feature, see “Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position (parking aid)” (

컄 page 169).

i

You can store one parking position for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror for each SmartKey.


1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror switch

2 Adjustment switch

3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror switch

왘

왘


컄 page 35).

Press switch 3 to select the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror.

왘

왘

왘

Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror with adjustment switch 2 so that you see the rear wheel and the road curb.

Press memory button

M

(

컄 page 104).

Within three seconds, press adjustment switch 2 forward, backward, left, or right.

The parking position is stored if the mirror does not move.

i

If the mirror does move, repeat the above steps. After the setting is stored, you can move the mirror again.

105


Lighting

For information on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals, see

“Switching on headlamps” (

컄 page 52) and “Turn signals” (

컄 page 52).

i

If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country in which the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams.

Relevant information can be obtained at your authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.


The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.


M

Off

Daytime running lamp mode

(

컄 page 108)

U

Automatic headlamp mode

Daytime running lamp mode

(

컄 page 108)

C

Parking lamps (also tail lamps, license plate lamps, side marker lamps, instrument panel lamps)

B

Low beam headlamps (or high beam headlamps when the combination switch is pushed forward) and parking lamps

ˆ

Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop)

‚

Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops)

C

Indicator lamp for parking lamps

‡

Indicator lamp for front fog lamps

†

Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp

106


Lighting

i

With the SmartKey removed from the starter switch and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the parking lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on.

The message

Turn off lights


Manual headlamp mode

The low beam headlamps and the parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch.

앫

앫

앫

앫

Automatic headlamp mode

The following lamps switch on and off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light:

Low beam headlamps

Tail and parking lamps

License plate lamps

Side marker lamps

Warning!

G

If the exterior lamp switch is set to

U

앫 the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from oncoming traffic.

앫 the headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions.

To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to

B

when driving or when traffic and/or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so.

In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch from position

U to

B

with the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from

U to

B

will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for the operation of the vehicle's lights at all times.

왘

Turn the exterior lamp switch to position

U

.

With the SmartKey in starter switch position

1

only the parking lamps will switch on and off automatically.

When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps, the tail and parking lamps, the license plate lamps, and the side marker lamps will switch on and off automatically.

107


Lighting

Daytime running lamp mode

왘

Turn exterior lamp switch to position

M or

U

.

When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps are switched on.

In low ambient light conditions, the following lamps will switch on additionally:

앫

앫

앫

Tail and parking lamps

License plate lamps

Side marker lamps

For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lamp switch to position

B

to permit activation of the high beam headlamps.

i

With the daytime running lamp mode and the exterior lamp switch in position

M

you cannot switch on the high beam headlamps.

The high beam flasher is available at all times.

Canada only:

The daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.


When the engine is running, and you shift from a driving position to position

N

or

P

, the low beam headlamps will switch off with a three-minute delay.

When the engine is running, and you

앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to position

C

, the parking lamps switch on additionally.

앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to position

B

, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode.

The corresponding exterior lamps switch on (

컄 page 106).

USA only:

By default, the daytime running lamp mode is deactivated. Activate the daytime running lamp mode using the control system, see “Setting daytime running lamp mode”

(

컄 page 137).

When the engine is running, and you turn the exterior lamp switch to position

C or

B

, the manual headlamp mode has priority over the daytime running lamp mode.

The corresponding exterior lamps switch on (

컄 page 106).

108


Lighting

Locator lighting and night security illumination

The locator lighting and the night security illumination are described in the “Control system” section, see (

컄 page 138) and

(

컄 page 139).

Fog lamps

Warning!

G

In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions, only switch from position

U to

B with the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from

U to

B

will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident.

i

Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or low beam headlamps on.

Fog lamps should only be used in conjunction with low beam headlamps.

Consult your State or Province Motor

Vehicle Regulations regarding allowable lamp operation.

i

Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the exterior lamp switch in position

U

. To switch on the fog lamps, turn the exterior lamp switch to position

B

first.

Front fog lamps

왘

Switch on the low beam headlamps

(

컄 page 106).

왘

Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first stop.

왘

The front fog lamps switch on.

The green indicator lamp

‡

in the exterior lamp switch comes on

(

컄 page 106).

Push in the exterior lamp switch.

The front fog lamps switch off.

The green indicator lamp

‡

in the exterior lamp switch goes out.

109


Lighting

Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)

왘

Switch on the front fog lamps

(

컄 page 109).

왘

Pull out the exterior lamp switch to second stop.

왘

The rear fog lamp switches on.

The yellow indicator lamp

†

in the exterior lamp switch comes on

(

컄 page 106).

Push in the exterior lamp switch to first stop.

The rear fog lamp switches off.

The yellow indicator lamp

†

in the exterior lamp switch goes out.

The front fog lamps remain lit.



1 High beam

2 High beam flasher

High beam

왘


B or

U

(

컄 page 106).

왘

Push the combination switch in direction of arrow 1 to switch on the high beam.

왘


A

in the instrument cluster comes on (

컄 page 24).

Pull the combination switch in direction of arrow 2 to its original position to switch off the high beam.


A

in the instrument cluster goes out.

High beam flasher

왘

Pull the combination switch briefly in direction of arrow 2 .

110


Lighting

Cornering fog lamps* (SLK 350 with

Bi-Xenon* headlamps and without

Sport Package*)

Driving forward

The cornering fog lamps improve illumination of the road into which you are turning.

Cornering fog lamps will operate with the engine running and with

앫 the exterior lamp switch in position

B

(

컄 page 106) or

앫 the exterior lamp switch in position

U

(

컄 page 106) or

앫 the daytime running lamp mode activated (

컄 page 108) i

Cornering fog lamps will only come on in low ambient lighting conditions.

The cornering fog lamps function is not available at a vehicle speed above

25 mph (40 km/h).

Switching on cornering fog lamps

왘

Depending on whether you are turning left or right, switch on the left or right turn signal (

컄 page 52).

The respective front fog lamp comes on and illuminates the road into which you are turning.

i

The cornering fog lamps will come on automatically depending on the steering angle, even if you did not switch on either turn signal.

If the cornering fog lamps came on automatically, they will also go out automatically depending on the steering angle.

Switching off cornering fog lamps

The combination switch for the turn signal resets automatically after major steering wheel movements. This will switch off the cornering fog lamps if they where activated by switching on the left or right turn signal.

If the turn signal should stay on after making the turn, the turn signal and cornering fog lamp can be switched off by returning the combination switch to its original position.

Driving rearward

Switching on cornering fog lamps

왘

Place the gearshift lever (gear selector lever*) in position

R

.

The inverse front fog lamp comes on automatically depending on the steering direction and steering angle.

Switching off cornering fog lamps

왘

Place the gearshift lever (gear selector lever*) out of position

R

.

The respective front fog lamp goes out.

111


Lighting

Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher can be switched on at all times, even with the

SmartKey removed from the starter switch.

The hazard warning flasher switches on automatically when an air bag deploys.

The hazard warning flasher switch is located on the upper part of the center console.

Switching on hazard warning flasher

왘

Press hazard warning flasher switch 1 .

All turn signal lamps are flashing.

i

With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set for either left or right turn, only the respective turn signals will operate when the SmartKey is in the starter switch position

1

or

2

.

Switching off hazard warning flasher

왘

Press hazard warning flasher switch again.

1 i

If the hazard warning flasher has been activated automatically, press hazard warning flasher switch 1 once to switch it off.

1 Hazard warning flasher switch

112


Lighting

Interior lighting

The controls are located in the overhead control panel.

1 Interior lighting on/off

2 Automatic control on/off

3 Right reading lamp on/off

4 Left reading lamp on/off i

Leaving an interior light switch in the

ON position for extended periods of time with the engine turned off could result in a discharged battery.

Automatic control

Activating

왘

Press automatic control switch it is flush to the other switches.

2 until

앫

앫

The interior lighting switches on in darkness, when you unlock the vehicle remove the SmartKey from the starter switch

앫 open a door

The interior lighting switches off automatically following an adjustable time delay.

For more information, see “Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off” (

컄 page 140).

i

If the door remains open, the interior lighting switches off automatically after approximately five minutes, when the

SmartKey is in starter switch position

0

or removed.

Deactivating

왘

Press automatic control switch it engages at a deeper position than the other switches.

2 until

앫

앫

The interior lighting remains switched off in darkness, even when you unlock the vehicle remove the SmartKey from the starter switch

앫 open a door i

When you open the trunk, the trunk lighting switches on automatically.

If the trunk lid remains open, the trunk lighting switches off automatically after approximately ten minutes.

113


Lighting

Manual control

Interior lighting

왘

Press interior lighting switch 1 .

The interior lighting switches on.

왘

Press interior lighting switch 1 again.

The interior lighting switches off.

i

The footwell lighting* is switched on and off simultaneously with the manual control.

Reading lamps

The standard reading lamps are located to the left and right of the overhead control panel. Reading lamps as part of the interior lighting package* are located on the lower edge of the interior rear view mirror.

왘

Press reading lamp switch 3 or 4 to switch on the respective reading lamp.

왘

Press reading lamp switch 3 or 4 again to switch off the respective reading lamp.

Door entry lamps

For better orientation in the dark, the corresponding door entry lamps will switch on in darkness when you open a door and the automatic control is activated.

The door entry lamps switch off when the corresponding door is closed.

i

If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position

0

and switch off the exterior headlamps, the door entry lamps will remain lit for approximately five minutes.

114



앫

앫

앫

앫

왔


A full view illustration of the instrument cluster can be found in the “At a glance” section (

컄 page 24).

The multifunction display in the instrument cluster is activated when you open a door switch on exterior lighting switch on ignition (

컄 page 35) press reset button

J or one of the knobs for the instrument cluster illumination (

컄 page 24) i

Opening a door or pressing the reset button

J without switching on the ignition or the exterior lighting activates the multifunction display illumination only for 30 seconds.

For information on changing the instrument cluster settings, e.g. the language, see “Instrument cluster submenu”

(

컄 page 131).

Instrument cluster illumination

Adjusting

The knobs for adjusting the instrument cluster illumination are on the left side of the instrument cluster (

컄 page 24).

i

With the exterior lighting switched on, the brightness of the switches in the center console will be adjusted simultaneously.

Brightening illumination

왘

Press knob

+

briefly.

The instrument cluster illumination brightens.

Dimming illumination

왘

Press knob

-

briefly.

The instrument cluster illumination dims.

Tachometer

The red marking on the tachometer

(

컄 page 24) denotes excessive engine speed.

!

Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is interrupted if the engine is operated within the red marking.

115



Outside temperature indicator

Warning!

G

The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.

Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

The outside temperature is displayed in the multifunction display (

컄 page 123).

For information on selecting the temperature display unit, i.e. degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F), see “Selecting temperature display mode” (

컄 page 131).

The temperature sensor is located in the front bumper area. Due to its location, the sensor can be affected by road or engine heat during idling or slow driving. Therefore, the accuracy of the displayed temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next the sensor, not by comparison to external displays, e.g. bank signs, etc.

When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your garage), you will notice a delay before the lower temperature is displayed.

A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature displays caused by heat radiated from the engine during idling or slow driving.

Trip odometer

왘

왘

Make sure you are viewing the standard display menu (

컄 page 122).

Press and hold reset button

J until the trip odometer is reset.

Clock

Vehicles with COMAND*:

The clock in the instrument cluster can be synchronized with the time set in

COMAND using the time synchronization with head unit feature (

컄 page 133), or set independently from COMAND using the control system (

컄 page 134) with the time synchronization with head unit feature set to

Off

.

For setting the time in COMAND, see separate COMAND operating instructions.

For setting the time with audio system,

(

컄 page 134).

116


Control system

왔

Control system

The control system is activated as soon as the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position

1

. The control system enables you to

앫

앫 call up information about your vehicle change vehicle settings

For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next due for service, to set the language for messages in the instrument cluster display, and much more.

i

The displays for the audio systems

(radio, CD player) will appear in English, regardless of the language selected.

Warning!

G

A driver’s attention to the road and traffic conditions must always be his/her primary focus when driving.

For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction steering wheel should only be done by the driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

The control system relays information to the multifunction display.

Multifunction display

1 Main odometer

2 Trip odometer

3 Current program mode

(automatic transmission* only)

4 Status indicator (outside temperature/digital speedometer)

5 Current gear selector lever position/gear range

117


Control system


The displays in the multifunction display and the settings in the control system are controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

1 Multifunction display

Operating the control system

2 Selecting the submenu or setting the volume:

Press button

æ up/to increase

ç down/to decrease

3 Telephone*:

Press button s to take a call, or to dial a call t to end a call, or to reject an incoming call

4 Moving within a menu:

Press button j for next display k for previous display

5 Menu systems:

Press button

è for next menu

ÿ for previous menu

118

Pressing any of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is shown in the multifunction display.

The information available in the multifunction display are arranged in menus, each containing a number of functions or submenus.

The individual functions are then found within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under Audio , for example). These functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your vehicle.

It is helpful to think of the menus, and the functions within each menu, as being arranged in a circular pattern.

앫

앫

If you press button

è or

ÿ

repeatedly, you will pass through each menu one after the other.

If you press button j or k

repeatedly, you will pass through each function display, one after the other, in the current menu.

In the Settings...

menu, you will find a number of submenus instead of functions for calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see

“Settings menu” (

컄 page 127).

The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment is installed in your vehicle.

i

The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the control system displays.

The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in.


Control system

i

SLK 55 AMG:

The steering wheel in this vehicle will vary from steering wheel shown. However, multifunction steering wheel symbols and feature description apply to

AMG vehicles as well.

119


Control system

Menus

This is what you will see when you scroll through the menus.

The table below provides an overview of the individual menus.

120


Control system

Menus, submenus and functions

(

Menu

1

Standard display

컄 page 122)

Run Flat

Indicator*

Check coolant temperature

Menu

AUDIO

2

Select satellite radio station*

(USA only)

Menu

NAV*

3

(

컄 page 123)

Select radio station

(

컄 page 126)

Activate route guidance

Menu

4

Vehicle status message memory

(

컄 page 126)

Menu

5

Settings

(

컄 page 127)

Call up vehicle malfunction, warning and system status messages stored in memory

Reset to factory settings

Instrument cluster submenu

(

Menu

6

Menu

7

Trip computer TEL*

컄 page 144)

Fuel consumption statistics after start

Fuel consumption statistics since last reset

(

컄 page 146)

Load phone book

Search for name in phone book

Digital speedometer/outside temperature

Operate the CD player

Call up maintenance service indicator

Check engine oil level

(SLK 55 AMG only)

Time/Date submenu

Lighting submenu

Vehicle submenu

Convenience submenu

Call up range Redialing

121


Control system

Standard display menu

The multifunction display shows the main odometer and trip odometer. This default setting is referred to as the standard display.

The following functions are available:

Function

Run Flat Indicator*

Page

308

Checking coolant temperature 122

Display digital speedometer or outside temperature

123

329 Calling up maintenance service indicator

Checking engine oil level

(SLK 55 AMG only)

289

1 Main odometer

2 Trip odometer

If another display is shown instead of the standard display:

왘

Press button

è or

ÿ

repeatedly until you see the standard display.

You can select the functions in the standard display menu with button j or k

.

Checking coolant temperature

왘

When in the standard display menu, press button j or k

until you see the coolant temperature in the multifunction display.

During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).

The engine should not be operated with a coolant temperature above 248°F

(120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the


i

Excessive coolant temperature triggers a warning message in the multifunction display (

컄 page 357).

122


Control system

Warning!

G

앫

앫

Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.

Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Turn off the engine, get out of the car and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

Displaying digital speedometer or outside temperature

왘

Press button j or k

repeatedly until you see the digital speedometer.

The current vehicle speed is shown in the multifunction display.

i

You can select either the display of the digital speedometer or the outside temperature indicator ( 컄 page 132).

AUDIO menu

The functions in the have turned on.

AUDIO menu operate the audio equipment which you currently

If no audio equipment is currently switched on, the message

AUDIO off

is shown in the multifunction display.


Function

Selecting radio station

Selecting satellite radio station* (USA only)

Operating the CD player

Page

124

124

125

123


Control system

Selecting radio station

왘

Switch on the radio (

컄 page 197).

왘


Refer to the separate operating instructions.

Press button

è or

ÿ

repeatedly until you see the currently tuned station in the multifunction display.

i

You can only store new stations using the corresponding feature on the radio

(

컄 page 200).



You can also operate the radio in the usual manner.

Selecting satellite radio station*

(USA only)

The Sirius-Satellite-Radio is treated as a radio application.

왘

Select satellite radio with the corresponding soft key (SAT) in the radio menu.

1 Waveband setting

2 Tuned station

왘

Press button j or k

repeatedly until the desired station is found.

1 SAT mode and preset number

2 Channel name or number

왘 Press button j or k

repeatedly until the desired channel is found.

124


Control system

i

Feature description is based on preliminary information available at time of printing.

For more information on satellite radio operation, see “Introduction to satellite radio* (USA only)” (

컄 page 202).


Refer to separate operating instructions.

Operating the CD player

왘

Switch on the radio and select the

CD player (

컄 page 208).

왘



Press button

è or

ÿ

repeatedly until the settings for the CD currently being played are shown in the multifunction display.

왘

Press button j or k

repeatedly until the desired track is selected.

i

To select a CD from the magazine, press a number on the audio system or the COMAND* system key pad located in the center dashboard.

1 Current CD

(

CD0

for single CD drive in head unit,

CD1

through

CD6

for CD in

CD changer*)

2 Current track

125


Control system

NAV* menu

The NAV menu contains the functions needed to operate your navigation system.

왘

Press button

è or

ÿ

repeatedly until you see the message

NAV

in the multifunction display.

앫

앫

If the navigation system is switched off, the message NAV off is shown in the multifunction display.

If the navigation system is on, different messages, depending on the current state of the navigation system, appear in the multifunction display.

Please refer to the COMAND* manual for instructions on how to activate the route guidance system.

Vehicle status message memory menu

Use the vehicle status message memory menu to scan malfunction and warning messages that may be stored in the system. Such messages appear in the multifunction display and are based on conditions or system status the vehicle’s system has recorded.

Warning!

G

Malfunction and warning messages are only indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain systems and do not replace the owner’s and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s operating safety by having all required maintenance and safety checks performed on the vehicle and by bringing the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center to address the malfunction and warning messages (

컄 page 348).

왘

Press button

è or

ÿ

repeatedly until the vehicle status message memory appears in the multifunction display.

No vehicle status messages

If no conditions are recorded in memory, the message in the multifunction display is:

No Malfunction

.

Vehicle status messages have been recorded

If conditions have occurred causing status messages to be recorded, the number of messages appears in the multifunction display:

1 Number of messages

126


Control system

왘

Press button j or k

.

The stored messages will now be displayed in the order in which they have occurred. For malfunction and warning messages, see “Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display”

(

컄 page 348).

Should the vehicle’s system record any conditions while driving, the number of messages will reappear in the multifunction display when the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position

0

or removed from the starter switch:

왘

Press button

J repeatedly until you have seen all occurred messages.

i

The vehicle status message memory will be cleared when you turn the

SmartKey in the starter switch to position

1

or

2

.

You will then only see high-priority messages in the multifunction display

(

컄 page 348).

Settings menu

In the Settings...

menu are two functions:

앫

The function

To reset: Press reset button for 3 seconds

for resetting all settings to factory standard.

앫

왘

A collection of submenus for performing individual settings for your vehicle.

Press button

è or

ÿ

repeatedly until the

Settings...

menu appears in the multifunction display.

The following settings and submenus are available in the Settings...

menu:

Function

Resetting all settings

Page

128

Submenus in the Settings menu 129

Resetting the functions of a submenu

129

Instrument cluster submenu

Time/date submenu

Lighting submenu

Vehicle submenu

Convenience submenu

131

131

137

141

142

127


Control system

Resetting all settings

You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings.

왘

Press the reset button

J on the instrument cluster (

컄 page 24) for approximately three seconds.

The request to press the reset button

J once more to confirm appears in the multifunction display.

i

For safety reasons, the following functions cannot be reset while driving:

앫 the function

Lamp circuit headlamp mode

in the

Lighting

submenu

앫 the function Key-dependent in the

Convenience submenu

The following message appears in the multifunction display:

Lighting (or Convenience ) Cannot be completely reset to factory settings while driving .

i

Your individual settings will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button

J again.

After five seconds the Settings...

menu reappears in the multifunction display.

왘


J again.

The functions of all submenus will be reset to the factory settings.

The message Reset to factory settings appears in the multifunction display.

128

Submenus in the Settings menu

왘

Press button j or k

.

In the multifunction display you will see the collection of submenus.

왘

왘

Resetting the functions of a submenu

For each submenu you can reset the functions to factory settings.

Move to a function in the submenu.


J

(

컄 page 24) for approximately three seconds.

The request to press the reset button

J once more to confirm appears in the multifunction display.

왘 Press button

ç

.

The selection marker moves to the next submenu.

The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.

Scroll up with button

æ

, and scroll down with button

ç

.

Move within the submenus with button j or k

to the individual functions.

The settings themselves are made with button

æ or

ç

.

왘 Press the reset button

J again.

All functions of the submenu will be reset to the factory settings.

The message

Reset to factory settings



Control system

i

Your individual settings will not be reset unless you confirm the action by pressing the reset button

J again.

After five seconds the Settings...

menu reappears in the multifunction display.

129


Control system

The table below shows what settings can be changed within the various submenus.

Detailed instructions on making individual settings can be found on the following pages.

(


컄 page 131)

Selecting temperature display mode

Selecting speedometer display mode

Selecting language

Time/Date

(

컄 page 133)

Time synchronization with head unit*

Lighting

(

컄 page 137)

Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)

Setting the time (hours) Setting locator lighting

(Function surround lighting)

Setting the time

(minutes)

Setting night security illumination

Vehicle

(

컄 page 141) (

Convenience

컄 page 142)

Setting automatic locking Activating easy-entry/exit feature*

Setting key-dependency

Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror*

Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature) for status indicator

Setting the date (month) Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off

Setting the date (day)

Setting the date (year)

130


Control system

Instrument cluster submenu

Access the

Instr. cluster

submenu via the

Settings...

menu. Use the

Instr. cluster

submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings. The following functions are available:

Function

Selecting temperature display mode

Page

131

Selecting speedometer display mode

Selecting language

131

132

Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature) for status indicator

132

Selecting temperature display mode

왘

왘

Move the selection marker with button

æ or

ç

to the

Instr. cluster

submenu.

Press button j or k

repeatedly until you see Temp. display in the multifunction display.

The selection marker is on the current setting.

Selecting speedometer display mode

왘

왘


æ or

ç

to the

Instr. cluster

submenu.

Press button j or k

repeatedly until you see Display unit

Speed-/odometer in the multifunction display.


왘

Press button

æ or

ç

to set the temperature display unit to degrees

Celsius ( °C ) or degrees Fahrenheit ( °F ).

왘

Press button

æ or

ç

to set the speedometer unit to km or miles .

131


Control system

Selecting language

왘

왘


æ or

ç

to the

Instr. cluster

submenu.

Press button j or k

repeatedly until you see Language in the multifunction display.


Available languages:

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

German

English

Italian

French

Spanish

왘

Press button

æ or

ç

to select the desired language to be used for the multifunction display messages.

Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature) for status indicator

왘

왘


æ or

ç

to the

Instr. cluster

submenu.

Press button j or k

repeatedly until you see Select display in the multifunction display.


132


Control system

왘

Press button

æ or

ç

to select the desired setting.

The selected display is then shown continuously in the lower display.

The other display now appears in the menu of the standard display:

앫

Digital speedometer

앫 or

Outside temperature

Time/Date submenu

Access the

Time/Date

submenu via the

Settings...

menu. Use the

Time/Date submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings.


Function

Time synchronization with head unit*

Setting the time (hours)

Setting the time (minutes)

Setting the date (month)

Setting the date (day)

Setting the date (year)

Page

133

134

134

135

136

136

Time and date synchronization with head unit*

This function can only be seen on vehicles with COMAND* and navigation module*.

왘

왘


æ or

ç

to the Time/Date submenu.

Press button j or k

repeatedly until you see

Synchronization with main unit



왘 Press button

æ or

ç

to select the desired setting.

133


Control system

Setting the time (hours)

This function can be seen in vehicles with audio system, or in vehicles with

COMAND* and navigation module*, if the time and date synchronization with head unit* feature was set to

Off

(

컄 page 133).

i


For information on setting the time in

COMAND, refer to the separate

COMAND operating instructions.

왘

왘


æ or

ç


Press button j or k


Clock, hours


The selection marker is on the hours.

Setting the time (minutes)



Off

(

컄 page 133).

i





왘

왘

Press button

æ or

ç

to set the correct hours displayed in the multifunction display.

Press reset button

J to confirm the set hours.

134


Control system

왘

왘


æ or

ç


Press button j or k


Clock, minutes


The selection marker is on the minutes.

Setting the date (month)



Off

(

컄 page 133).

i





왘

왘


æ or

ç


Press button j or k


Set date month


The selection marker is on the month.

왘

왘

Press button

æ or

ç

to set the correct minutes displayed in the multifunction display.

Press reset button

J to confirm the set minutes.

왘 Press button

æ or

ç

to set the month.

135


Control system

Setting the date (day)



Off

(

컄 page 133).

i





왘

왘


æ or

ç


Press button j or k


Set date day


The selection marker is on the day.

Setting the date (year)



Off

(

컄 page 133).

i





왘 Press button

æ or

ç

to set the day.

136


Control system

왘

왘


æ or

ç


Press button j or k


Set date year


The selection marker is on the year.

Lighting submenu

Access the

Lighting

submenu via the

Settings...

menu. Use the

Lighting

submenu to change the lamp and lighting settings on your vehicle.


왘 Press button

æ or

ç

to set the year.

Function

Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)

Setting locator lighting

Page

137

Setting night security illumination

138

139

Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off

140

Setting daytime running lamp mode

(USA only)

i

This function is not available in countries where the daytime running lamp mode is mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.

왘

왘


æ or

ç

to the

Lighting submenu.

Press button j or k

repeatedly until you see Lamp circuit headlamp mode in the multifunction display.


137


Control system

왘

Press button

æ or

ç

to select manual operation ( manual ) or daytime running lamp mode ( constant ) activated.

With daytime running lamp mode activated and the exterior lamp switch in position

M or

U

, the low beam headlamps are switched on when the engine is running.

앫

앫

앫

앫

In low ambient light conditions the following lamps will switch on additionally:

Parking lamps

Tail lamps

License plate lamps

Side marker lamps

For more information on the daytime running lamp mode, see “Lighting”

(

컄 page 106).

i

For safety reasons, resetting the

Lighting submenu to factory settings while driving (

컄 page 129) will not deactivate the daytime running lamp mode.


Lighting Cannot be completely reset to factory settings while driving

.

Setting locator lighting

With the locator lighting feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position

U

, the following lamps will switch on when the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey during darkness:

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Parking lamps

Tail lamps

License plate lamps

Side marker lamps

Front fog lamps

The locator lighting switches off when the driver’s door is opened.

If you do not open a door after unlocking with the SmartKey, the lamps will switch off automatically after approximately

40 seconds.

138


Control system

왘

왘


æ or

ç

to the Lighting submenu.

Press button j or k


Function Surround lighting



왘 Press button

æ or

ç

to switch the locator lighting function

On

.

왘


U

when exiting the vehicle

(

컄 page 52).

The locator lighting feature is activated.

Setting night security illumination

(Headlamps delayed shut-off)

Use this function to set whether and how long you would like the exterior lamps to illuminate during darkness after exiting the vehicle and all doors closed.

With the delayed shut-off feature activated and the exterior lamp switch in position

U

before the engine is turned off, the following lamps will switch on after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch:

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Parking lamps

Tail lamps

License plate lamps

Side marker lamps

Front fog lamps

If you do not open a door after removing the SmartKey from the starter switch, the lamps will switch off automatically after approximately 60 seconds.

i

You can reactivate this function within ten minutes by opening a door.

왘

왘


æ or

ç


Press button j or k


Headlamps delayed shut-off



왘 Press button

æ or

ç

to select the desired lamp-on period.

컄컄

139


Control system

컄컄

You can select:

앫

0 s

, the delayed shut-off feature is deactivated.

앫

15 s , 30 s , 45 s or 60 s , select the desired lamp-on period.

왘


U

before turning off the engine (

컄 page 52).

The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is activated.

You can temporarily deactivate the delayed shut-off feature:

왘

Before exiting the vehicle, turn the

SmartKey in the starter switch to position

0

.

왘

Then turn it to position

2

and back to position

0

.

The delayed shut-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in the starter switch.

Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off

Use this function to set whether and how long you would like the interior lighting to remain lit during darkness after you have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch.

왘

왘


æ or

ç


Press button j or k


Interior lighting delayed shut-off



140


Control system

왘

Press button

æ or

ç

to select the desired exterior lamp-on period.

You can select:

앫

0 s , the delayed shut-off feature is deactivated.

앫

5 s

,

10 s

,

15 s

or

20 s

, the interior lighting delayed shut-off feature is activated with the desired lamp-on period.

Vehicle submenu

Access the

Vehicle

submenu via the

Settings...

menu. Use the

Vehicle

submenu to make general vehicle settings.

The following function is available:

Function

Setting automatic locking

Page

141

For additional information on central locking, see “Automatic central locking”

(

컄 page 97).

Setting automatic locking

Use this function to activate or deactivate the automatic locking system. With the automatic locking system activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph

(15 km/h).

왘

왘


æ or

ç

to the Vehicle submenu.

Press button j or k


Automatic door lock



왘 Press button

æ or

ç

to switch the automatic central locking

On

or

Off

.

141


Control system

Convenience submenu

Access the

Convenience

submenu via the

Settings...

menu. Use the

Convenience submenu to change the settings for a number of convenience features.


Function

Activating easy-entry/exit feature*

Setting key-dependency

Setting parking position for exterior rear view mirror*

Page

142

143

144

Activating easy-entry/exit feature*

Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature.

For additional information, see “Memory function*” (

컄 page 99)

Warning!

G

You must make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.

To cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following:

앫

앫

Press seat adjustment switch*

(

컄 page 39).

Move steering column stalk*

(

컄 page 41).

앫

Press memory position switch*

(

컄 page 104).

Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Children could open the driver’s door an unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit feature, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

왘

왘


æ or

ç

to the Convenience submenu.

Press button j or k


Function Easy-entry feature in the multifunction display.


왘 Press button

æ or

ç

to select the desired easy-entry/exit setting.

142

The following settings are available for the easy-entry/exit feature:

Off

Steering col.

The easy-entry/exit feature is deactivated.

Only the steering column is moved.

Steer.col.

The steering column and the

+ seat seat are moved.

Setting key-dependency

Use this function to set whether the memory* settings for the seats, the steering wheel and the mirrors should be stored separately for each SmartKey

(

컄 page 103).

왘

왘


æ or

ç

to the Convenience submenu.

Press button j or k


Key-dependent




Control system

i

For safety reasons, the key-dependency function cannot be reset to factory settings while driving.


Convenience Cannot be completely reset to factory settings while driving .

왘 Press button

æ or

ç

to set key-dependency to

On

or

Off

.

143


Control system

Setting parking position* for exterior rear view mirror

Use this function to select whether the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror should be turned downward during parking maneuvers when reverse gear

R

is engaged.

For additional information, see “Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position

(parking aid)” (

컄 page 105).

왘


æ or

ç

to the

Convenience

submenu.

왘

Press button j or k

repeatedly until you see Mirror adjustment

Parking aid in the multifunction display.


Trip computer menu

Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle.

The following information is available:

왘

Press button

æ or

ç

to switch the parking position function On or Off .

Function Page

Fuel consumption statistics after start

145

145 Fuel consumption statistics since last reset

Calling up range (distance to empty)

146 i

When you enter the trip computer menu, you will always see the fuel consumption statistics after start first.

144

Fuel consumption statistics after start

왘

Press button

è or

ÿ

repeatedly until you see the first function of the trip computer menu.

왘

Press button j or k

repeatedly until you see After start in the multifunction display.


Control system

i

All statistics stored since the last engine start will be reset approximately four hours after the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to position

0

or removed from the starter switch.

Resetting will not occur if you turn the

SmartKey back to position

1

or

2

within this time period.

Fuel consumption since last reset

왘

Press button

è or

ÿ


왘

Press button j or k

repeatedly until you see After reset in the multifunction display.

1 Statistics called up: since start

2 Time elapsed since start

3 Average fuel consumption since start

4 Average speed since start

5 Distance driven since start

1 Statistics called up: since last reset

2 Time elapsed since last reset

3 Average fuel consumption since last reset

4 Average speed since last reset

5 Distance driven since last reset

145


Control system

Resetting fuel consumption statistics manually

왘


J until the values of the statistics are reset to

0

.

Resetting fuel consumption statistics automatically

앫

앫

The values of the statistics will be automatically reset to 0 when one of the following values exceeds: distance: 100000 miles (100000 km) elapsed time: 10000 hours

Calling up range (distance to empty)

왘

Press button

è or

ÿ


왘

Press button j or k

repeatedly until you see Range: in the multifunction display.

In the multifunction display you will see the calculated range based on the current fuel tank level.

TEL menu*

Warning!

G

A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road, and traffic conditions permit.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.


(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet

(approximately 14 m) every second.

146


Control system

Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.

You can use the functions in the

TEL

menu to operate your telephone, provided it is connected to a hands-free system and switched on.

왘

Switch on the telephone and Audio or

COMAND*.

왘

See separate operating instructions.

Press button

è or

ÿ

repeatedly until you see the TEL menu in the multifunction display.

Which messages will appear in the multifunction display depends on whether your telephone is switched on or off:

앫

If the telephone is switched off, the message in the multifunction display is:

PHONE off

.

앫

If the telephone is switched on:

The telephone will then search for a network. During this time the multifunction display is empty.

As soon as the telephone has found a network, READY is indicated in the multifunction display.

Answering a call

When your telephone is ready to receive calls, you can answer a call at any time. In the multifunction display you will see the message:

Audio system

This standby message indicates that your telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system.

COMAND*

왘

Press button s

.

You have answered the call.

The duration of the call appears in the multifunction display.

147


Control system

Rejecting a call

If you do not wish to receive the call, you can choose to reject it.

왘

Press button t

.

You have rejected the call.

The caller receives a busy signal.

Ending a call

왘

Press button t

.

You have ended the call.

The standby message appears in the multifunction display.

Dialing a number from the phone book

If your telephone is ready to receive calls, you may select and dial a number from the phone book at any time.

왘

왘

Press button

è or

ÿ

repeatedly until you see the TEL menu and the standby message in the multifunction display.

Press button j or k

.

왘

The control system reads the phone book which is stored in the telephone.

This may take up to 30 seconds. In the multifunction display you will see the message Please wait .

When the message

Please wait

disappears, the phone book has been loaded.

Press button j or k

repeatedly until the desired name appears in the multifunction display.

The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order.

1 Selected name from phone book i

If you press and hold button j or k

for longer than one second, the system scrolls rapidly through the list of names until you release the button again.

Cancel the quick search mode by pressing button t

.

왘

Press button s

.

The control system dials the selected phone number.

148


Control system

앫

If the connection is successful, the name of the party you called and the duration of the call will appear in the display.

앫 If no connection is made, the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory.

or

왘 Cancel the call you have intended to make by pressing button t

.

Redialing

The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the need to search through your entire phone book.

왘

왘

Press button

è or

ÿ

repeatedly until you see the TEL menu and the standby message in the multifunction display.

Press button s

.

In the multifunction display you will see the first number in the redial memory.

왘

왘

Press button j or k

repeatedly until the desired number or name appears in the multifunction display.

Press button s

.

The control system dials the selected phone number.

If the connection is successful, the duration of the call will appear in the multifunction display, and

앫 the name of the party if stored in the phone book or

앫 instead of it the dialed number or

왘

Cancel the call you have intended to make by pressing button t

.

149



Manual transmission is standard equipment on select models and not available on all models.

For information on driving with a manual transmission, see “Manual transmission”

(

컄 page 48).

Warning!

G

For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, getting out of your vehicle with the gearshift lever not engaged in first or reverse gear and parking brake engaged is dangerous.

Also, when parked on an incline, an engaged first or reverse gear alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.

Always set the parking brake in addition to engaging first or reverse gear (

컄 page 56).



Warning!

G


SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gearshift lever, which could result in an accident and/or serious injury.

Warning!

G

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action.

This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.

150

Gearshift pattern for manual transmission



!

When you are shifting into the

5th

or

6th

gear, make sure that you press the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise, you could accidentally shift into the

3rd

or

4th

gear and damage the transmission.

Downshifting gears leading to overrevving the engine can result in engine damage that is not covered by the


Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by using the clutch pedal. The clutch may be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.

Do not exceed the engine speed limits.

Refer to tachometer ( 컄 page 115) for engine speeds.

Shifting into reverse

!

Only shift into reverse gear

R

when the vehicle is stationary, as the transmission could otherwise be damaged.

왘

왘

왘

Stop the vehicle completely.


왘

Move the gearshift lever to the neutral position (no gear selected).

Move the gearshift lever to the left until you feel a certain resistance.

왘

Push the gearshift lever past this resistance.

왘 Then move the gearshift lever forward into position

R

.

151



For more information on driving with an automatic transmission, see “Automatic transmission*” (

컄 page 48).

Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear shifting process to your individual driving style by continually adjusting the shift points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions.

If the operating conditions change, the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting its shift program.

i

During the brief warm-up, transmission upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic converter to heat up more quickly to operating temperature.

The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, depending on:

앫 the gear selector lever position

D

(

컄 page 156) with gear ranges (

컄 page 155)

앫 the selected program mode:

(

C

/

S

) (

컄 page 158)

앫

앫 or

(

M

/

C

/

S

) (SLK 55 AMG only)

(

컄 page 164) the position of the accelerator pedal

(

컄 page 159) the vehicle speed

Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission

152



1 Current gear range/gear selector lever position

2 Current program mode

The current gear range/gear selector lever position and program mode (

C

/

S

) or

(

M

/

C

/

S

) appear in the multifunction display.

Warning!

G

It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of

P

or

N

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

!

Allow engine to warm up under low load use. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.

Shift into reverse gear

R

or parking position

P

only when the vehicle is stopped.

Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended period when driving off on slippery road surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz

Limited Warranty.

앫

앫

When the gear selector lever is in position

D

, you can influence transmission shifting by: limiting the gear range changing gears manually

153



One-touch gearshifting

Even with an automatic transmission you can change the gears manually when the gear selector lever is in position

D

.

i

To avoid overrevving the engine when the gear selector lever is moved to the

D-

direction, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s max. speed would be exceeded.

Downshifting

왘

Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the

D-

direction.

The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission (

컄 page 155).

Upshifting

왘

Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the

D+

direction.

The transmission will shift from the current gear to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission.

Warning!

G


Canceling gear range limit

왘

Press and hold the gear selector lever in the

D+

direction until

D

reappears in the multifunction display.

The transmission will shift from the current gear range directly to gear range

D

.

Shifting into optimal gear range

왘

Press and hold the gear selector lever in the

D-

direction.

The transmission will automatically select the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This will involve shifting down one or more gears.

154



Gear ranges

With the gear selector lever in position

D

, you can limit the transmission’s gear range by pressing the gear selector lever to the left (

D-

), and reverse the gear range limit by pressing the gear selector lever to the right (

D+

).

The selected gear range appears in the multifunction display (

컄 page 153). If you press on the accelerator when the engine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.

Effect

ï

The transmission shifts through sixth gear only).

î

The transmission shifts through fifth gear only.

é

The transmission shifts through fourth gear only.

è

The transmission shifts through third gear only.

With this selection you can use the braking effect of the engine.

Effect

ç

The transmission shifts through second gear only.

Allows the use of engine’s braking power when driving:

앫

앫 on steep downgrades in mountainous regions

앫 under extreme operating conditions

æ

The transmission operates in first gear only.

For maximum use of engine’s braking effect on very steep or lengthy downgrades.

155



Gear selector lever position

Effect

ì

Park position

Gear selector lever position when the vehicle is parked. Place gear selector lever in position

P

only when vehicle is stopped.

The park position is not intended to serve as a brake when the vehicle is parked. Rather, the driver should always set the parking brake in addition to placing the gear selector lever in position

P

to secure the vehicle.

Effect


P

. With the SmartKey removed, the gear selector lever is locked in position

P

.

If the vehicle’s electrical system is malfunctioning, the gear selector lever could remain locked in position

P

(

컄 page 376).

í

Reverse gear

Place gear selector lever in position

R

only when vehicle is stopped.

Effect

ë

Neutral

No power is transmitted from the engine to the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle can be moved freely

(pushed or towed).

To avoid damage to the transmission, never engage

N

while driving.

If the ESP is deactivated or malfunctioning:

Move gear selector lever to

N

only if the vehicle is in danger of skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

ê

Drive

The transmission shifts automatically. All forward gears are available.

156



!

Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other reason with gear selector lever in

N

can result in transmission damage that is not covered by the


Warning!

G

Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position

P

is dangerous. Also, position

P

alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or objects.

Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position

P

(

컄 page 49).

When parked on an incline, turn the front wheels towards the road curb.


Warning!

G


SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the gear selector lever from position

P

, which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

157



Automatic shift program

The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the center console.

1 Program mode selector switch

C

Comfort For comfort driving

S

Sport For standard driving

The current gear selector lever position and the selected program mode (

C

/

S

) are indicated in the multifunction display

(

컄 page 153).

!

Never change the program mode when the gear selector lever is out of position

P

. This could result in a change of driving characteristics for which you may not be prepared.

i

The last selected program mode (

C

or

S

) is switched on when the engine is restarted.

왘

Press program mode selector switch 1 repeatedly until the letter of the desired program mode appears in the multifunction display.

Select

C

for comfort driving:

앫

The vehicle starts out in second gear (both forward and reverse) for gentler starts. This does not apply if full throttle is applied or gear range

1

is selected.

앫

Traction and driving stability are improved on icy roads.

앫

Upshifts occur earlier even when you give more gas. The engine then operates at lower rpms and the wheels are less likely to spin.

158

Driving tips

Accelerator position

Your driving style influences the transmission’s shifting behavior:

Less throttle Earlier upshifting

More throttle Later upshifting



Kickdown

Use kickdown when you want maximum acceleration.

왘

Press the accelerator past the point of resistance.

The transmission shifts into a lower gear.

왘

Ease on the accelerator when you have reached the desired speed.

The transmission shifts up again.

Stopping

When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:

왘

왘

Leave the transmission in gear.

Hold the vehicle with the brake.

When you stop longer with the engine idling or on an uphill gradient:

왘

Move the gear selector lever to position

P

.

왘

Set the parking brake.

159



왘

왘

Maneuvering

When you maneuver in tight areas, e.g. when pulling into a parking space:

왘

Control the vehicle speed by gradually releasing the brakes.

Accelerate gently.

Never abruptly step on the accelerator.

Working on the vehicle

Warning!

G

When working on the vehicle, set the parking brake and move gear selector lever to position

P

. Otherwise the vehicle could roll away.

Steering wheel gearshift control

When driving in the automatic program modes

C

or

S

, or in the manual program mode

M

(SLK 55 AMG only), you can change the gears manually on the steering wheel or by using the gear selector lever

(

컄 page 154).

i

To avoid overrevving the engine when downshifting with steering wheel gearshift buttons, the transmission will not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s max. speed would be exceeded.

160

!



R

or parking position

P



Limited Warranty.

Steering wheel gearshift control*

SLK 350

The steering wheel gearshift buttons are located to the left and right of the steering wheel.

1 Button, inside: downshift

2 Button, outside: upshift



i

You cannot shift with the steering wheel gearshift buttons when the gear selector lever is in position

P

,

N

or

R

.


C

or

S

) is switched on when the engine is restarted.

161



Downshifting

Warning!

G


Upshifting

왘

Press the outside 2 of one of the buttons on the steering wheel.

The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission.

왘

Press the inside 1 of one of the buttons on the steering wheel.

The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission

(

컄 page 155).

Steering wheel gearshift control

(Speedshift) SLK 55 AMG

The steering wheel gearshift buttons are located to the left and right of the steering wheel.

1 Left button: downshift

2 Right button: upshift

162



i

You cannot shift with the steering wheel gearshift buttons when the gear selector lever is in position

P

,

N

or

R

.

The manual program mode

M

will not be stored. When the engine is turned off with the manual program mode

M

selected, the transmission will go to the automatic program mode (

C

or

S

) when the engine is restarted.


C

or

S

) is switched on when the engine is restarted in the automatic program mode.

Downshifting

Warning!

G


왘

Press button 1 on the left side of the steering wheel.

The transmission will shift to the next lower gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the transmission

(

컄 page 155) when you are driving in the automatic program mode (

C

or

S

).

Upshifting

왘

Press button 2 steering wheel.

on the right side of the

The transmission will shift to the next higher gear as permitted by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the transmission when you are driving in the automatic program mode (

C

or

S

).

163



Manual shift program SLK 55 AMG

In the manual program mode

M

you can change the gears manually on the steering wheel (

컄 page 162) or by using the gear selector lever (

컄 page 154).

!



R

or parking position

P



Limited Warranty.

The program mode selector switch is located on the lower part of the center console.

1 Program mode selector switch

M

Manual For manual gear shifting

C

Comfort

S

Sport

For comfort driving

For standard driving

The current gear selector lever position and the selected program mode ( M / C / S ) are indicated in the multifunction display

(

컄 page 153).

Activating manual shift program

왘

Press program mode selector switch 1 repeatedly until the

M

for manual program mode

M


The transmission switches to the manual program mode

M

. Automatic shifting is switched off. The gear range is not limited.

You can change the gears manually when the gear selector lever is in position

D

. You can upshift or downshift through the gears in succession.

164



Downshifting

Warning!

G


왘

Briefly press the gear selector lever to the left in the

D-

direction

(

컄 page 154).

or

왘

Press button 1 on the left side of the steering wheel (

컄 page 162).

The transmission shifts to the next lower gear.

i

When you brake or stop, the transmission shifts down to a gear from which you can easily accelerate or take off.

Upshifting

!

In the manual program mode

M

, the transmission will not upshift, even if the engine has reached its overrevving range. Shift up to the next gear before the engine has reached its overrevving range. Make absolutely certain that the engine speed does not reach the red marking on the tachometer

( 컄 page 24). Otherwise the engine could be damaged which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.

왘

Briefly press the gear selector lever to the right in the

D+

direction

(

컄 page 154).

or

왘

Press button 2 on the right side of the steering wheel (

컄 page 162).

The transmission shifts to the next higher gear.

If, instead of the manual program mode symbol M , the p

symbol appears in the multifunction display (

컄 page 153), shift to the next higher gear. The fuel supply will otherwise be interrupted to prevent the engine from overrevving.

165



Kickdown

Using the kickdown when driving in the manual program mode

M

is not possible.

Deactivating manual shift program

왘

Press the program mode selector switch (

컄 page 164) repeatedly until C or S appears in the multifunction display.

or

왘

Restart the engine.

The transmission will go to the automatic program mode (

C

or

S

).

The manual program mode

M

is not stored.

Emergency operation (Limp Home

Mode)

If vehicle acceleration worsens or the transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp home (emergency operation) mode. In this mode only second gear and reverse gear can be activated.

왘

왘

왘

왘

Stop the vehicle.

Move gear selector lever to

P

.

Turn off the engine.

Wait at least ten seconds before restarting.

왘

왘

Restart the engine.

Move gear selector lever to position

D

(for second gear) or

R

.

왘

Have the transmission checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

166


Good visibility

왔

Good visibility

For information on the windshield wipers, see (

컄 page 53).

Headlamp cleaning system*

The switch is located on the left side of the dashboard.

1 Headlamp cleaning switch

왘


컄 page 35).

왘

Briefly press headlamp cleaning switch 1 .

The headlamps are cleaned with a high-pressure water jet.

i

The headlamps will automatically be cleaned when you have

앫 switched on the headlamps

앫 and operated the windshield wipers with windshield washer fluid

15 times

When you switch off ignition, the counter resets.

Rear view mirrors

For more information on setting the rear view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (

컄 page 42).

Interior rear view mirror, antiglare position

For information on filling up the washer reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*”

(

컄 page 295).

왘

Tilt the mirror to the antiglare night position by moving the lever towards the windshield.

The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.

167


Good visibility

앫

앫

Auto-dimming mirror*

The reflection brightness of the exterior rear view mirrors and the interior rear view mirror will respond automatically to glare when

앫 ignition is switched on and

앫 incoming light from headlamps falls on the sensor in the interior rear view mirror

The rear view mirrors will not react if reverse gear

R

is engaged interior lighting is switched on

Warning!

G

The auto-dimming function does not react if incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors in the interior rear view mirror.

The interior rear view mirror and the exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not react, for example, if the wind screen is installed.

Glare can endanger you and others.

Warning!

G

In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may escape from the mirror housing if the mirror glass breaks.

Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing, or the respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary.

!

Electrolyte drops coming into contact with the vehicle paint finish can only be completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water.

168


Good visibility

Warning!

G

Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface is convex (outwardly curved surface for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your shoulder before changing lanes.

Activating exterior rear view mirror parking position (parking aid)

Follow these steps to activate the mirror parking position so that the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be turned downward during parking maneuvers to the stored position.


왘

왘


컄 page 35).

Store a parking position for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror

(

컄 page 105).

왘

왘

Switch the Mirror adjustment Parking aid function in the Convenience submenu of the control system to ON

(

컄 page 144).

Press switch 3 for the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror.

왘


R

.

The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror turns downwards to the stored position.

1 Driver-side exterior rear view mirror

2 Adjustment switch

3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror

169


Good visibility

The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror returns to its previously stored driving position:

앫 ten seconds after you shifted out of reverse gear

R

앫

앫 immediately once you exceed a vehicle speed of approximately 6 mph

(10 km/h) immediately when you press adjustment switch 2

Sun visors

The sun visors protect you from sun glare while driving.

1 Mirror lamp*

2 Mounting*

3 Mirror cover

4 Sun visor

Warning!

G

Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.

Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare can endanger you and others.

왘

Swing sun visors down when you experience glare.

왘

To use mirror and switch on mirror lamp*, lift up mirror cover 3 .

i

If sunlight enters through a side window, disengage sun visor from mounting* 2 and pivot it to the side.

The sun visors are extendable* if necessary.

The mirror lamp 1 will switch off as soon as sun visor is disengaged from mounting.

170


Good visibility

Rear window defroster

The rear window defroster uses a large amount of power. To keep the battery drain to a minimum, switch off the defroster as soon as the rear window is clear.

The defroster is automatically deactivated after approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation depending on the outside temperature.

Warning!

G

Any accumulation of snow and ice should be removed from the rear window before driving. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, endangering you and others.

Switching on

왘

Press the rear window defroster switch

F

in the control panel of the climate control (

컄 page 175) or the automatic climate control* (

컄 page 185).

The indicator lamp on the rear window defroster switch

F

comes on.

!

The rear window defroster cannot be switched on when the retractable hardtop is open. The indicator lamp starts flashing if the hardtop is open.

앫

Close the retractable hardtop first.

The rear window defroster can be switched on again.

Switching off

왘

Press the rear window defroster switch

F

again in the control panel of the climate control or the automatic climate control*.

The indicator lamp on the rear window defroster switch

F

goes out.

!

If the rear window defroster switches off too soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, this means that too many electrical consumers are operating simultaneously and there is insufficient voltage in the battery. The system responds automatically by deactivating the rear window defroster.

As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the rear window defroster automatically turns itself back on.

171


Climate control

172


Climate control

Item

1 Thumbwheel for air volume control for adjustable left-side air vent

2 Left side air vent, adjustable

3 Left center air vent, fixed

4 Thumbwheel for air volume control for fixed/adjustable left center air vents

5 Left center air vent, adjustable

6 Right center air vent, adjustable

7 Thumbwheel for air volume control for fixed/adjustable right center air vents

8 Right center air vent, fixed

9 Right side air vent, adjustable a Thumbwheel for air volume control for adjustable right-side air vent b Climate control panel

The climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. The system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature.

Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the interior through the air distribution system.

The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the

± mode is selected

(

컄 page 175).

Warning

G

When operating the climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burn or frostbite to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell air vents. If necessary change the air flow using the air distribution controls to direct the air away from the footwell air vents (

컄 page 175).

Warning!

G

Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

173


Climate control

i

When you turn the thumbwheels 4 and 7 upwards to the first stop, the fixed center air vents 3 and 8 and the adjustable center air vents 5 and 6 are open.

When you turn the thumbwheels completely upwards, only the adjustable center air vents 5 and 6 are open.

For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for the center air vents 5 and 6 to the middle position.

i

Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior.

If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off.

When the retractable hardtop is closed, do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window.

Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris.

174


Climate control

Item

1 Temperature control, left side

2 Air volume control, climate control on/off

3 Air distribution control

4 Temperature control, right side

5

F

Rear window defroster

6

P

Defrosting

7

°

Air condition on/off,

Residual engine heat utilization

8

,

Air recirculation

Switching climate control on/off Setting the temperature

Switching on

왘

Turn air volume control position

0

.

2 out of

Switching off

왘

Turn air volume control position

0

.

2 to

!

With the climate control system switched off, the air flow and the air circulation are deactivated.

Only choose this setting temporarily to prevent the windows from fogging up.

Use temperature controls 1 and 4 to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment.

You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).

Increasing

왘

Turn temperature control slightly clockwise.

1 or 4

The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.

Decreasing

왘

Turn temperature control slightly counterclockwise.

1 or 4

The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.

175


Climate control

Adjusting air distribution Adjusting air volume Air recirculation mode

Use air distribution control 3

(

컄 page 175) to adjust the air distribution.

The following symbols are found on the control:

Symbol

Z b

Y a

Function

Directs air to the windows

Directs air into the entire vehicle interior

Directs air to the footwells

Directs air through the center and side air vents

Use air volume control 2 to adjust the air volume.


Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside. This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the interior.

Symbol

0

between and

5

1

Function

No ventilation, climate control switched off

Ventilation with increasing blower speed

Warning!

G

When the outside temperature is below

41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation mode for short periods to prevent window fogging.

176


Climate control

Activating

왘

Press air recirculation switch

,

(

컄 page 175).

The indicator lamp on the air recirculation switch

,

comes on.

i

The air recirculation mode activates automatically at high outside temperatures.

A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes.

i

If you press the air recirculation switch

,

and keep it pressed, the side windows will close.

Warning

G

Never operate the side windows if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

In the event that the closing procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the

,

button or by pressing the respective power window switch.

The closing of the rear side windows can be immediately halted by releasing the

, button.

Deactivating

왘


, again (

컄 page 175).


,

goes out.

i

The air recirculation mode deactivates automatically:

앫

앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately

41°F (5°C) after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F (5°C)

앫 after five minutes if the air conditioning is turned off (

컄 page 178)

177


Climate control

i


, and keep it pressed and no side window was operated manually, the side windows will reopen to their previous position.

Air conditioning

The air conditioning is operational while the engine is running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator.

The air conditioning uses the refrigerant

R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer.

i

Condensation may drip from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction.

Deactivating

It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.

왘

Press air condition on/off switch

°

(

컄 page 175).

The indicator lamp on the air condition on/off switch

°

comes on.

Warning!

G

If you turn off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when the weather conditions are warm. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endanger you and others.

178


Climate control

Activating

Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.

왘


° again (

컄 page 175).


°

goes out.

!

If the indicator lamp on the air condition on/off switch

°

comes on while driving and you cannot switch on the air conditioning again by pressing the air condition on/off switch

°

, the air conditioning is losing refrigerant.

Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

Maximum cooling

왘

Turn thumbwheels 4 and 7 to the first stop (

컄 page 173).

upwards

왘

왘

The fixed center air vents 3 and 8 and the adjustable air vents 5 and 6 are open.

For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for the center air vents 5 and 6 to the middle position

(

컄 page 173).

Turn thumbwheels 1 and a for the adjustable side air 2 and 9 vents to the fully open position (

컄 page 172).

왘

Set air distribution control 3 to position a

(

컄 page 176).

The air distribution directs the air through the center and side air vents.

왘

Set air volume control 2 to position

5

(

컄 page 176).

The ventilation operates with maximum blower speed.

왘

Turn temperature controls 1 and 4 completely counterclockwise to their end stops (

컄 page 175).

The lowest temperature for both sides is set.

컄컄

179


Climate control

컄컄 i

When the vehicle’s interior has cooled down enough, reduce the air volume and increase the air temperature to comfortable settings if desired.

Residual engine heat utilization

With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes, depending on the temperature setting of the climate control.

Air volume and distribution are controlled automatically. This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine.

Activating

왘

왘


1

or

0

, or remove it from the starter switch.


°

(

컄 page 175).


°

comes on.

Set the left and right temperature to your personal requirements.

180


Climate control

앫

앫

Deactivating

왘


° again (

컄 page 175).


°

goes out.

The residual heat switches off automatically

앫 when you switch on ignition

(

컄 page 35) after about 30 minutes if the battery voltage drops

Defrosting

Windows fogged up on the inside

왘

Press defrosting switch

P

(

컄 page 175).

왘

The indicator lamp on defrosting switch

P

comes on.

The temperature rises and the ventilation operates with maximum blower speed.


P

again.


P

goes out.

The previous climate control settings will be activated again.

Windshield fogged up on the outside

왘

Switch on the windshield wipers

(

컄 page 53).

왘

Turn air distribution control 3 to position a or

Y

(

컄 page 176).

181



182



Item

1 Thumbwheel for air volume control for adjustable left-side air vent

2 Left side air vent, adjustable

3 Left center air vent, fixed

4 Thumbwheel for air volume control for fixed/adjustable left center air vents

5 Left center air vent, adjustable

6 Cockpit air vent

7 Thumbwheel for air volume control for cockpit air vent

8 Right center air vent, adjustable

9 Thumbwheel for air volume control for fixed/adjustable right center air vents a Right center air vent, fixed b Right side air vent, adjustable c Thumbwheel for air volume control for adjustable right-side air vent d Automatic climate control panel

The automatic climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can operate the automatic climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The system cools or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature.

Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors are filtered out before outside air enters the interior through the air distribution system.

The air conditioning will not engage (no cooling) if the

± mode is selected

(

컄 page 185).

Warning!

G

Warning!

G

When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell air vents. If necessary change the air flow using the air distribution controls to direct the air away from the footwell air vents

(

컄 page 185).

Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up, impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

183



i

When you turn the thumbwheels 4 and 9 upwards to the first stop, the fixed center air vents 3 and a and the adjustable center air vents 5 and 8 are open.

When you turn the thumbwheels completely upwards, only the adjustable center air vents 5 and 8 are open.

For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for the center air vents 5 and 8 to the middle position.

i

Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) may require replacement of the filter before its scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to the interior.

If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior before driving off.

When the retractable hardtop is closed, do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air flow-through exhaust slots below the rear window.

Keep the air intake grille in front of the windshield free of snow and debris.

184



Item

1 Air volume control, manual

2

U

Automatic mode

3

P

Defrosting

4

‚

To increase temperature on the left side

5

´

Automatic climate control on/off

6

‚

To increase temperature on the right side

7

F

Rear window defroster

8 Air distribution control, manual

9

T

Residual heat/ventilation a

±

Air condition on/off b

ƒ

To lower temperature on the right side c

ƒ

To lower temperature on the left side d

,

Air recirculation e Display

Automatic mode (basic setting)

왘

왘

Press automatic mode switch

U

.

The indicator lamp on the automatic mode switch

U

comes on.

The temperature, air volume and air distribution will be adjusted automatically.


U again.


U

goes out.

The temperature, air volume, and air distribution are no longer adjusted automatically.

!



i

When operating the automatic climate control system in automatic mode

U

, you will only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.

Setting the temperature

Use the temperature control switches

‚ and

ƒ to separately adjust the air temperature on each side of the passenger compartment. You should raise or lower the temperature setting in small increments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).

Increasing

왘

Press red temperature control switch

‚

4 or 6 .

The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.

The selected temperature will be indicated in display e .

185



Decreasing

왘

Press blue temperature control switch

ƒ b or c .

The automatic climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.

The selected temperature will be indicated in display e .

Adjusting air volume

Adjusting air distribution

왘

Turn air distribution control 8

(

컄 page 185) to the desired position.


U

(

컄 page 185) goes out. The air distribution is no longer adjusted automatically.


왘

Turn air volume control 1

(

컄 page 185) to the desired position.


U

(

컄 page 185) goes out. The air volume is no longer adjusted automatically.


Symbol

Z b

Y a

Function

Directs air to the windows

Directs air into the entire vehicle interior

Directs air to the footwells

Directs air through the center, side and cockpit air vents

Air recirculation mode

Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle from the outside. This setting cuts off the intake of outside air and recirculates the air in the interior.

Warning!

G

When the outside temperature is below

41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation mode for short periods to prevent window fogging.

Activating

왘


,

(

컄 page 185).


,

comes on.

Symbol

between

1

and

6

Function

Ventilation with increasing blower speed

186

i

The air recirculation mode activates automatically at high outside temperatures.

A quantity of outside air is added after approximately 30 minutes.

i


, and keep it pressed, the side windows will close.

Warning

G

Never operate the side windows if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

In the event that the procedure causes potential danger, the closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the

,

button or by pressing the respective power window switch.

The closing of the rear side windows can be immediately halted by releasing the

, button.

Deactivating

왘


, again (

컄 page 185).


,

goes out.



i

The air recirculation mode deactivates automatically:

앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above approximately

41°F (5°C)

앫

앫 after five minutes if the outside temperature is below approximately 41°F (5°C) after five minutes if the air conditioning is turned off (

컄 page 188) i


, and keep it pressed and no side window was operated manually, the side windows will reopen to their previous position.

187



Air conditioning

The air conditioning is operational while the engine is running and cools the interior air to the temperature set by the operator.

The air conditioning uses the refrigerant

R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which are harmful to the ozone layer.

Warning!

G

While driving, deactivate the air conditioning only temporarily to prevent window fogging.

i

Condensation may drip from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication of a malfunction.

Deactivating

It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the automatic climate control system. The air in the vehicle will then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.

왘


±

(

컄 page 185).

The indicator lamp on air condition on/off switch

±

comes on.

Activating

Moist air can fog up the windows. You can dehumidify the air with the air conditioning.

왘


±

(

컄 page 185).


±

goes out.

!

If the indicator lamp on the air condition on/off switch

±

comes on while driving and you cannot switch on the air conditioning again by pressing the air condition on/off switch

±

, the air conditioning is losing refrigerant.

Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

188



Residual heat and ventilation

With the engine switched off, it is possible to continue to heat or ventilate the interior for up to 30 minutes, depending on the temperature setting of the climate control.

This feature makes use of the residual heat produced by the engine.

Activating

왘


1

or

0

, or remove it from the starter switch.

왘

Press residual heat/ventilation switch

T

(

컄 page 185).

The indicator lamp on the residual heat/ventilation switch

T

comes on.

앫

앫

Deactivating

왘

Press residual heat/ventilation switch

T

again (

컄 page 185).

The indicator lamp on the residual heat/ventilation switch

T

goes out.

The residual heat switches off automatically

앫 when you switch on ignition

(

컄 page 35) after about 30 minutes if the battery voltage drops i

How long the system will provide heating depends on the coolant temperature and the temperature set by the operator. The blower will run at speed setting

1

regardless of the air distribution control setting.

Defrosting

Windows fogged up on the inside

왘


P

(

컄 page 185).

왘


P

comes on.

The temperature rises and the ventilation operates with maximum blower speed.


P

again.

The previous automatic climate control settings will be activated again.

189



Windshield fogged up on the outside

왘


U

.

왘


U

comes on.

Close cockpit air vent 4

(

컄 page 182).

왘

Switch on the windshield wipers

(

컄 page 53).

i

With automatic mode selected, the automatic climate control system prevents windows from fogging up.

Switching off the automatic climate control system

Switching off

왘

Press automatic climate control on/off switch

´

.

The indicator lamp on the automatic climate control on/off switch

´ comes on.


U

goes out.

Display e goes out.

i

This setting is only recommended when the retractable hardtop is open.

!



Switching on

왘


U

.


U

comes on.

Display e comes on.

190


Audio system

왔

Audio system

Audio and telephone, operation

These instructions are intended to help you become familiar with your

Mercedes-Benz audio system. They contain useful tips and a detailed description of the user functions.

Warning!

G

In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident, the driver should enter system settings with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the system only when road and traffic conditions permit. Always pay full attention to traffic conditions first before operating system controls while driving.


(approximately 50 km/h), your car is covering a distance of 44 feet


Operating safety

Warning!

G

Any alterations made to electronic components can cause malfunctions.

The radio, amplifier, CD changer*, satellite radio* and telephone* are interconnected.

When one of the components is not operational or has not been removed/replaced properly, the function of other components may be impaired.

This condition might seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle.

We recommend that you have any service work on electronic components carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

191


Audio system

Operating and display elements

192


Audio system

Item

1 CD changer mode selector

2 Single CD mode selector

3 Radio mode selector

4 Mute function (radio)

Pause (CD)

5 Volume distribution

6 Sound settings

7 Display

8 Alphanumeric keypad

Page

207

208

200

215

196

195

Item

9 Speed dialing memory

(telephone) in descending order a Accepting a call

(telephone) b Telephone mode selector c Speed dialing memory

(telephone) in ascending order d Terminating a call

(telephone) e CD slot f CD ejection

Page

221

216

218

221

209

Item

g Soft keys h Volume j Switching on/off k Manual tuning / seek tuning (radio)

Track search, reverse (CD) l Manual tuning / seek tuning (radio)

Track search, fast forward (CD)

Page

194

195

194

199

214

199

214

193


Audio system

Button and soft key operation Operation

In these instructions, the alphanumeric keypad (right side of radio panel) and the function buttons (left side of radio panel) are referred to as “buttons”. The four keys below the display panel are referred to as

“soft keys”.

!

Do not press directly in the display face. Otherwise, the display will be damaged.

Switching the unit on/off

Switching on

왘

왘


1

or

2

(

컄 page 35).

If the audio system was on as you removed the SmartKey from the starter switch, the audio system will automatically come back on as you turn the SmartKey to position

1

or

2

.

or

왘

Press

D button.

i

If the radio is switched on without the

SmartKey in the starter switch, it will automatically switch off again after approx. 30 minutes.

If your vehicle is equipped with a telephone, the display may prompt you to enter your PIN (GSM network) or code (TDMA or CDMA network).

194


Audio system

Switching off

왘


or

왘

Press

D button.

i

Should excessively high temperatures occur while the audio system is being operated, the display will dim. If temperatures continue to rise, HIGH TEMP will appear in the display, after which the audio system will be switched off for a cooling-down period.

i

If your vehicle equipment includes a

Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone*, you can adjust its volume separately from the volume of the audio system while the telephone is being used.

Adjusting sound functions

The bass and treble functions are called up by pressing the

O

button.

Settings for bass and treble are stored separately for the AM and FM wavebands, weather band, CD mode and telephone mode.

Adjusting the volume

왘

Turn rotary control of

E button.

The volume will increase or decrease depending on the direction turned.

Bass

왘

Press

O

button repeatedly until

BASS

appears in the display.

왘

Press + or – soft key to increase or decrease tone level accordingly.

or

왘

Press RES soft key briefly to reset bass tones to their center level.

The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after the last soft key is pressed.

195


Audio system

Adjusting treble

왘

Press

O

button repeatedly until

TREBLE


Returning sound functions to factory settings

왘

Press

O

button to call up settings menu in the display.

Adjusting balance

왘

Press

P

button.

BALANCE appears in the display.

왘

Press

+ or

–

soft key to increase or decrease tone level accordingly.

or

왘

Press

RES

soft key briefly to reset treble tones to their center level.

The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after the last soft key is pressed.

왘

Press

RES

soft key briefly; the respective sound function is reset to its center level.

or

왘

Press and hold

RES

soft key until

RESET appears in the display.

The sound settings for bass and treble are returned to their center level and the volume is set to a predefined level.

The radio switches back to the standard radio menu four seconds after the last soft key is pressed.

왘

Press

X

or

Y soft key.

The volume is distributed between the left and right sides of the vehicle.

or

왘

Press

RES

soft key briefly.

The balance is reset to its center level.

The radio switches back to the standard radio menu eight seconds after the last button is pressed.

196


Audio system

Returning volume distribution to factory settings

왘

Press

P

button to call up settings menu in the display.

왘

Press

RES

soft key briefly; the respective volume distribution is reset to its center (flat) level.

or

왘

Press and hold

RES

soft key until

RESET appears in the display.

The volume distribution settings for the balance is set to the center level.

The radio switches back to the standard radio menu four seconds after the last soft key is pressed.

Telephone* muting

If your vehicle equipment includes a

Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone*, you can adjust its volume separately from the volume of the audio system while the telephone is being used.

Radio operation

Selecting radio mode

왘

Press b

button.

Calling up wavebands

You can choose from among the FM, AM and WB wavebands.

Weather band (

컄 page 201).

i

FM waveband:

AM waveband:

87.7......107.9 MHz

530......1710 KHz

197


Audio system

Calling up wavebands for radios without SAT

왘

Press

FM

or

AM

soft key to switch between FM and AM.

The FM and AM wavebands are called up one after another.

or

왘

Press WB soft key.

The weather band menu is called up.

The waveband currently selected appears in the upper left-hand corner of the display.

Calling up wavebands for radios with SAT

왘

Press

FM

,

AM

or

WB

soft key repeatedly until desired waveband has been selected.

The FM, AM and WB wavebands are called up one after another.

The waveband currently selected appears in the upper left-hand corner of the display.

Selecting a station

The following options are available for selecting a station:

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Direct frequency input (

컄 page 199)

Manual tuning (

컄 page 199)

Automatic seek tuning (

컄 page 199)

Scan search (

컄 page 199)

Station memory (

컄 page 200)

Automatic station memory (Autostore)

(

컄 page 200)

앫

앫

The station search proceeds in the following frequency increments:

200 kHz in FM range

10 kHz in AM range

198


Audio system

Direct frequency input

왘

Select desired waveband.

왘

왘

Press

*

button.

Enter desired frequency with buttons

1 to

R

.

i

You can only enter frequencies within the respective waveband.

If a button is not pressed within four seconds, the radio will return to the last station tuned.

Manual tuning

왘

왘


Press

G or

H button for approx. three seconds.

왘

Press button repeatedly until desired frequency has been reached.

Step-by-step station tuning takes place in ascending or descending order. Each time the button is pressed, the radio tunes further by 0.2 MHz. During manual tuning, the radio is muted.

Scan search

앫

Starting scan search

왘


Automatic seek tuning

왘

왘


Press

G or

H button briefly.

The radio will tune to the next highest or next lowest receivable frequency.

i

If no station is received after two consecutive scans of the complete frequency range, then the scan stops at the frequency from which it began.

앫

왘

Press SC soft key.

SC

will appear in the display. The radio briefly (approximately eight seconds) tunes in all receivable stations on the waveband selected.

Ending scan search

왘

Press

SC

soft key or

G or

H

.

The station last played will be selected and SC disappears from the display.

199


Audio system

Station memory

You can store ten AM and ten FM stations in the memory.

앫

Storing stations

왘

왘

Tune in desired station.

Press and hold desired station button

1

to

R

until a brief signal tone is heard.

The frequency is stored on the selected station button.

앫

Calling up stations

왘

Press desired station button

1 to

R

briefly.

Autostore – automatic station memory

The Autostore memory function provides an additional memory level. The station memory for manually stored stations is not overwritten.

앫

Calling up Autostore memory level and storing stations

왘

Press AS soft key briefly.

The radio switches to the Autostore memory level.

AS

and

SEARCH appear in the display and the radio finds the ten stations with the strongest signals. These stations are stored on the station buttons

1

to

R

in order of signal strength.

앫

앫

Calling up stations

왘

Press desired station button

1 to

R

.

Leaving the Autostore memory level

왘

Press

FM

or

AM soft key briefly.

Interrupting radio mode

The radio mode is interrupted by an incoming call on the telephone*

(

컄 page 221).

앫

Mute on

왘

Press

F button.

The radio mode is interrupted and

MUTED


앫

Mute off

왘

Press

F button.

The radio mode is again active.

200


Audio system

Weather band

왘

Press WB soft key.

The weather band station last received is tuned in.

Selecting a weather band station directly

왘

Select desired weather band station with buttons

1

to

7

.

If a station cannot be tuned in, a search is automatically started.

Search

왘

Press

G or

H button to tune in the next receivable weather band station.

i

If no weather band station is received after three consecutive scans of the complete frequency range, then the scan stops at the channel with which it began and NO WB FOUND appears in the display.

If this happens, switch back to standard radio mode.

Scan search

앫

Starting scan search

왘

Press SC soft key.

SC

will appear in the display. The radio briefly (approximately eight seconds) tunes in all receivable weather band stations.

앫

Ending scan search

왘

Press

SC

soft key or

G or

H

.

The weather band station last played will be selected and SC disappears from the display.

201


Audio system

Introduction to satellite radio*

(USA only)

SIRIUS satellite radio provides 100 channels of digital-quality radio, among others music, sports, news, and entertainment, free of commercials. SIRIUS satellite radio uses a fleet of high-power satellites to broadcast 24 hours per day, coast to coast, in contiguous U.S.

This diverse, satellite-delivered programming is available for a monthly subscription fee.

For more information and service availability, call the SIRIUS Service Center

(

컄 page 206), or contact www.siriusradio.com

i

Additional satellite radio equipment and a subscription to a satellite radio service provider are required for the satellite radio operation described here.


Center for details and availability for your vehicle.

Note that categories and channels shown in illustrations are dependent on programming content delivered by the service provider. Programming content is subject to change. Therefore, channels and categories shown in illustrations and descriptions contained in this manual may differ from the channels and categories delivered by the service provider.

i

Satellite radio service may be unavailable or interrupted from time to time for a variety of reasons, such as environmental or topographic conditions and other things beyond the service provider’s or our control. Service might also not be available in certain places

(e.g., in tunnels, parking garages, or within or next to buildings) or near other technologies.

Program categories

The channels are categorized. Categories allow you to tune to stations broadcasting a certain type of program (category mode)

(

컄 page 204).

202


Audio system

Calling up the SAT main menu

왘

Press

SAT

soft key.

SAT is displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the display.

Prior to activation of the satellite radio service (

컄 page 203).

After activation of satellite radio service (

컄 page 203).

Prior to activation of the satellite radio service

왘

Press ESN soft key.

The twelve-digit electronic serial number (ESN) of the SAT tuner* installed in your vehicle is displayed.

This information is required to call the

SIRIUS Service Center for an activation request.

i

Credit card information may also be required for your application.

The activation process takes approximately five to ten minutes after calling the SIRIUS Service Center.

The telephone number of the SIRIUS

Service Center (888-539-7474) is displayed.

After activation of the satellite radio service

The satellite radio main menu appears.

The radio station selected last is audible, provided it can be received.

i

The system will tune to a default station if no station had been selected previously.

The first channel 001 is called up and the

PTY system changes to All categories.

If no station can be received,

ACQUIRING appears in the display.

If the Satellite radio service is not activated, ACQUIRING will also appear in the radio display and NO SAT will appear in the multifunction display.

203


Audio system

앫

앫

Selecting a station

The following options are available:

앫

앫

앫

Selecting a station using the selected category (

컄 page 205),

Tuning via station presets

(

컄 page 204),

Tuning via scan search (

컄 page 205).

Tuning via manual channel input

(

컄 page 204).

Tuning via the program category list

(

컄 page 204).

Tuning via station presets

Ten satellite radio station presets are available.

You can access the presets via number keys.

Accessing via number keys

왘

Enter number of preset you wish to select, e.g.

1

.

The radio plays the station stored under this number and the PTY function changes to the category corresponding to the station.

Tuning via manual channel input

Example: tuning in channel 16

왘

Press

*

.

Input line appears in the main radio menu.

왘

Use number keys to enter desired channel within eight seconds, e.g.

1 6

.

The system tunes to channel 16.

The station you have selected begins to play.

i

You can only enter available channel numbers.

Tuning via the program category list

The category list contains all currently receivable categories of programs. It is arranged alphabetically.

204


Audio system

앫

Selecting a category

왘

Press

PTY

soft key.

The current PTY category of the station is displayed.

왘

Press <<< or >>> soft key.

This switches between the individual categories.

When changing the category, the channel selected last in the new category becomes audible.

앫

The system will automatically switch to a station of the selected category if the currently selected station is not of the selected category. Otherwise, the currently selected station remains tuned.

Tuning a station within the selected category

The channels identified for the currently selected category are arranged numerically. Only one entry is visible at a time.

왘

Press

G or

H button briefly.

The next station within the category is started.

or

왘

Press and hold

G or

H button for approx. three seconds until desired station has been reached.

Tuning via scan search

Scan search is characterized as follows:

앫

앫

Scan search plays a channel for approx. eight seconds and then skips to the next channel within the current category.

Scan search can be terminated manually.

왘

Press SC soft key.

The search starts.

SC


왘

Press SC soft key again.

The search stops.

205


Audio system

Obtaining additional text information

Additional text information (artist, title) related to the current channel can be displayed.

왘

Press INF soft key.

The title being played is displayed.

왘

Press INF soft key again.

The name of the artist performing the title being played is displayed.

i

If a button is not pressed within four seconds, the radio will return to the standard display.

Storing stations

왘

왘

Tune in desired station.

Press and hold desired station button

1

to

R

until a brief signal tone is heard.

The frequency is stored on the selected station button.

The radio saves the current station at the memory preset selected. The memory preset selected appears in the status line, e.g. S3.

i

There are ten presets available.

An existing entry is overwritten in the memory list when a new entry is given.

Calling up the ESN information menu

왘

왘

Press

Press

INF

ESN

soft key.

soft key.

The twelve-digit electronic serial number (ESN) of the SAT tuner* installed in your vehicle is displayed.

왘

Press RET soft key to exit the menu.

206

CD mode

Safety precautions

Warning!

G

The single CD player and the CD changer* are Class 1 laser products. There is a danger of invisible laser radiation if the housing is opened or damaged.

Do not open the housing. The single CD player and the CD changer* do not contain any parts that can be serviced by the user.

For safety reasons, have any service work which may be necessary performed only by qualified personnel.

Warning!

G

In order to avoid distraction which could lead to an accident, the driver should insert

CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and operate the audio system only if permitted by road, weather and traffic conditions.


(approximately 50 km/h), your car covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

General notes

The system may not be able to play audio

CDs with copy protection.

Playing copied CDs may cause malfunctions during playback.

i

The audio system plays both CD-Rs and

CD-RWs with audio data.


Audio system

!

If you affix stickers to the CDs, they can become warped due to the heat that develops in the CD drive or

CD changer.

In certain situations, the CDs can then no longer be ejected and cause damage to the drive. Such damage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz

Limited Warranty.

!

Your CD drive or CD changer has been designed to play CDs which correspond to the EN 60908 standard.

You can therefore only use CDs with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.

If you insert thicker data carriers, e.g. ones that have data on both sides (one side with DVD data, the other side with audio data), they cannot be ejected and will damage the drive.

207


Audio system

Do not use CDs with an eight cm diameter, not even with a CD adapter. Attempting to play CDs with an eight cm diameter or playing such CDs with an adapter may cause damage to the CD drive. Such damage is not covered by the


Should excessively high or low temperatures occur while in CD changer mode*,

CD TEMP

will appear in the display, and the

CD will be muted until the temperature has reached an acceptable level for the system to continue operation.

The single CD player and the CD changer* play audio CDs.

앫

앫

Tips on handling CDs

앫

Handle CDs carefully to prevent interference during playback.

앫

앫

Avoid scratches, fingerprints and dust on the CDs.

Do not write on CDs or apply any labels or other material to them.

앫

Clean CDs from time to time with a commercially available cleaning cloth.

Never wipe the CD in a circular motion; instead, wipe it in a straight line starting in the center and moving outward.

Do not use solvents, anti-static sprays, etc. for cleaning.

Replace the CD in its case after use.

Protect CDs from heat and direct sunlight.

Operating the single CD player in the audio system unit

Loading a CD

The single CD player in the audio system unit has capacity for one CD. The CD slot for loading the drive is located underneath the soft keys.

왘

왘

Make sure the system is switched on.

Insert CD into CD slot. The label side of the CD must face upwards.

The system automatically pulls the CD into the CD slot. The audio CD begins to play.

!

If a CD is already loaded, it must be ejected before inserting a new CD.

Inserting a second CD in the slot with another CD still loaded will cause damage to the CD drive not covered by the


208


Audio system

i

If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or cannot be read, WRONG CD0 will appear in the display.

Ejecting a CD

왘

왘

Make sure the system is switched on.

Press g button.

The system ejects the CD.

Remove CD0 will appear in the display.

왘

Remove CD from slot.

With the CD removed,

NO CD

will appear in the display.

i

If you do not take the CD out of the CD slot within approx. 15 seconds, the system automatically pulls the CD back in and plays it.

If a CD is pulled back in, press g button, the CD will then be ejected.

Operational readiness of CD changer*

If a CD changer has been installed in the vehicle, it can be operated from the front control panel of the audio system.

The CD changer is located in the glove box.

1 CD loading slot

2 Magazine slot button

A magazine is integrated into the CD changer as a fixed element. It holds a maximum of six CDs.

The CD changer features six magazine slot buttons 2 for controlling the loading procedure.

A light-emitting diode in the buttons shows the status of the corresponding magazine slot.

CD loading slot 1 is above buttons 2 and is used to load CDs.

LEDs

no LED is lit Magazine slot is empty.

green LED flashes CD can be loaded.

red LED is lit Magazine slot is in use.

red LED flashes CD is being ejected.

Loading the CD magazine

i

If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or cannot be read,

WRONG CD0


Loading one or more CDs interrupts the

CD playback.

209


Audio system

Loading single CDs

왘

Open the glove box.

왘

왘

Insert an audio CD into CD loading slot 1 within five seconds, label side up.

The CD is pulled in and played.

Close the glove box.

1 CD loading slot

2 Magazine slot button

왘

Briefly press button 2 for the empty magazine slot that you would like to use.

The light-emitting diode in the magazine slot button flashes in green.

INSERT CD

appears in the display along with the slot number.

The flashing light indicates that the CD changer is ready to receive a CD.

Loading several CDs

왘

왘

Open the glove box.

Press button 2 of an empty magazine slot for more than two seconds.

The light-emitting diodes in all the magazine slot buttons light up several times in green, and

ALL LOAD


왘

Wait until the light-emitting diode for the first magazine slot flashes in green.

The flashing light indicates that the CD changer is ready to receive a CD.

왘

Insert an audio CD into CD loading slot 1 within five seconds, label side up.

The CD is pulled in and the light-emitting diode in the magazine slot button lights up in red. The magazine slot is loaded.

The light-emitting diode in the next available magazine slot button flashes in green. The CD changer is ready to receive the next CD.

210


Audio system

왘

Repeat the previous step until all six magazine slots are loaded.

Once all magazine slots are loaded, the

CD in the sixth magazine slot is played.

i

If, for example, you only want to load magazine slots 1 - 4 instead of all six, simply do not insert a fifth CD into the

CD loading slot. The CD changer will first try to load a CD but will then cancel the procedure, after which the radio will play the fourth CD.

왘


Ejecting CDs

i

The CD playback is interrupted while one or more CDs are being ejected.

Ejecting single CDs

왘

왘

Open the glove box.

Briefly press desired magazine slot button.

왘

The light-emitting diode in the magazine slot button flashes in red. The corresponding CD is ejected. EJECTING CD appears in the display along with the magazine slot number.

Remove CD from CD loading slot within

15 seconds.

If after removing a single CD no other

CDs remain loaded in the magazine,

MAG. EMPTY appears in the display.

i

If you do not take the CD from the CD loading slot within 15 seconds, the CD changer will automatically pull the CD back in. The system will then play the

CD.

If you are listening to a CD while ejecting another CD from the changer:

The Audio system stops playing the CD while another CD is being ejected.

Once the CD has been ejected, the

Audio system will continue playing where it left off.

왘


211


Audio system

Ejecting all loaded CDs

왘

왘

Open the glove box.

Press the button of a loaded magazine slot for more than two seconds.

The light-emitting diodes in all magazine slot buttons light up several times in red, and

ALL EJECT


The CD changer ejects the CDs one after another.

The light-emitting diode for the magazine slot being emptied flashes in red.

왘

Take corresponding CD from CD loading slot within 15 seconds.

The ejection procedure is finished once you have removed all CDs from the CD loading slot or if the CD changer cancels the procedure.

With all CDs removed from the magazine, MAG. EMPTY appears in the display.

i

If you do not take the CD from the CD loading slot within 15 seconds, the CD changer will automatically pull the CD back in. The system will then play the

CD.

With all CDs ejected, press the b button to switch back to the radio mode.

왘


Playing CDs

Single CD player in the audio unit

왘

Press i

button.

CD 0 will appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display.

The CD will resume playback at the point where it was switched off.

CD changer*

왘

Press

Q

button.

CD

and the selected magazine slot number appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display.

If you have not removed a CD since the last time the CD audio source was activated, the last CD listened to will begin to play at the point where it was switched off.

After the last track on a CD has finished, the next CD is automatically played.

212


Audio system

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Playing tracks

You have the following options:

앫

Audio system with CD changer*: selecting CDs

Direct track entry

Track skip forward/reverse

Fast forward/reverse

Scan

Random tracks

Repeat track

Selecting CDs in the audio unit with CD changer*

왘

You can select from among the inserted CDs with buttons

R to

6

.

R

= CD player in the audio unit

1 to

6

= CDs in the

CD changer*

The magazine slot number of the selected CD appears next to CD in the display, and the number of the currently played track appears next to TRACK .

i

If there is no CD in the selected magazine slot,

NO CD

appears in the display with the corresponding slot number.

Direct track entry

You can make a direct selection from among the tracks on a CD.

왘

왘

Press

*

button.

Enter track number using buttons

1 to

R

.

The number of the track being played appears next to

TRACK

in the display.

You can only enter available track numbers.

213


Audio system

Skipping tracks forward/backward

앫

Skipping tracks forward

왘

Press

H button briefly.

The next track will be played.

앫

Skipping tracks backward

왘

Press

G button briefly.

If the track has been playing for more than ten seconds, the unit skips back to the beginning of the track currently playing. If less than ten seconds have been played, the unit skips back to the beginning of the previous track.

Pressing the

G or

H button repeatedly will result in multiple tracks being skipped.

Fast forward/reverse

앫

Fast forward

왘

Press and hold

H button until desired point has been reached.

앫

Reverse

왘

Press and hold

G button until desired point has been reached.

i

The track number and the relative time of the track is shown in the display during the search.

Random play

The random function (RDM) plays the tracks of the current CD in random order.

i

When you start the RDM function, the

RPT function is automatically switched off.

Scan

앫

Starting scan

왘

Press

SC

soft key.

SC will appear in the display.

Each track on the current CD will be played for approx. eight seconds in ascending order.

앫

Ending scan

왘

Press

SC

soft key or

G or

H

.

앫

앫

Switching on random

왘

Press

RDM

soft key.

RDM appears in the display.

A randomly selected track is played.

Switching off random

왘

Press RDM soft key again.

214


Audio system

Repeat

The track being played is repeated until the repeat function is switched off.

i

When you start the RPT function, the

RDM function is automatically switched off.

Pause function

The CD changer mode is interrupted by an incoming call on the telephone*

(

컄 page 221).

앫

Switching on pause function

Track and time display

앫

앫

Switching on repeat

왘

Press

RPT

soft key.

RPT appears in the display.

Switching off repeat

왘

Press RPT soft key again.

앫

왘

Press

F button.

The CD changer mode is interrupted and

PAUSE


Switching off pause function

왘

Press

F button.

The CD changer mode is active again.

왘

Press T soft key.

The number of the track being played and the elapsed playing time appear in the display.

왘

Press T soft key again.

The total number of tracks and the total playing time of the CD appear in the display.

왘

Press T soft key.

The standard CD playback menu appears in the display.

215


Audio system

GSM network phones

Warning!

G

Using your Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone*, a number of functions and operating steps can be performed and displayed in the audio system display.

A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone

1

while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road, and traffic conditions permit.





1

Observe all legal requirements.

Further operating instructions not covered here can be found in the operating instructions for the multifunction steering wheel and the cellular telephone*.

If your audio system is set up for telephone operation, the t symbol will appear in the display.

When you insert your Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone* into the telephone cradle, you will be prompted to enter your PIN for 30 seconds

(

컄 page 217). This display disappears when you press any button.

When your mobile telephone is inserted into the telephone cradle, you will see the reception strength in the upper right-hand corner of the display.

216


Audio system

Switching on the telephone

Switching on the telephone

왘

Press h

button.

If the telephone was previously switched off, PROCESSING appears in the display and you will then be prompted to enter your PIN.

Switching off the telephone

왘

Press h

button for approx. three seconds.

PROCESSING appears in the display until the telephone is off. Afterward,

PHONE OFF appears in the display.

PIN entry

왘

왘

Enter PIN number using buttons

1 to

R

.

If necessary, correct number entered with the

CLR

soft key. Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered; press soft key and hold to delete the complete number.

왘

왘

Press OK soft key after entering correct

PIN.

READY

or

ROAMING


i

If the PIN is entered incorrectly three times, NEED PUK will appear in the display. Enter PUK via your telephone.

Please refer to the separate telephone operating instructions for more information.

Adjusting the volume

왘


E button during a telephone call.


i

The volume can be adjusted separately for telephone mode and audio mode.

Adjusting sound

왘

Adjust sound during a telephone call.

Sound adjustment (

컄 page 195).

217


Audio system

Placing a call

Entering a telephone number and starting the dialing process

왘

If necessary, correct number entered with the CLR soft key. Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered; press soft key and hold to delete the complete number.

왘

After correct telephone number has been entered, press s

button.

i

If the telephone number has been saved together with a name in the telephone book, the name will appear in the display.

왘

Enter desired telephone number using buttons

1

to

R

.

The number can have up to 32 digits, but only twelve of these are visible in the display.

Phone book

The numbers stored in the phone book of the telephone can be called up either by name or number.

In addition, incoming calls are stored in the phone book.

i

This is only possible, however, when the call information transmitted includes the number of the person calling. If the telephone number is not transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored in the phone book.

앫

Searching and calling up telephone book entries by name

You can access your mobile telephone’s phone book using the audio system. You can access both the main entries and the sub-entries of your phone book.

218

or

왘

왘


‚ or

ƒ

.

The system jumps from one initial letter to the next in ascending or descending order.


‚ or

ƒ

until desired initial letter has been reached.

or

왘

왘

Press MEM soft key or press button

‚

or

ƒ

.

Press desired numerical key

2 to

9

.

The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letters (e.g. for

S -Schneider, press button

7 four times).


Audio system

왘

Press button

‚

or

ƒ repeatedly until desired entry has been reached.

The stored entries are selected in alphabetical order with the sub-entries.

i

Several sub-entries can be stored for each main entry (name). These entries are marked by a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the upper left-hand corner of the display. The following abbreviations for sub-entries are possible:

CEL = Mobile phone

HOM = Home

WOR = Work

FAX = Fax

PAG = Pager

TEL = Main

앫

앫

왘

When you have selected a number, press s

button.

The call will be made.

Viewing the telephone number of a telephone book entry

왘

왘

Search for desired entry.

Press NUM soft key.

The telephone number of the phone book entry appears in the display.

Returning calls received

219


Audio system

왘

왘


‚

or

ƒ

.

Press

RCV

soft key (received calls).

The number of received calls and then the call last received appear briefly in the display.

왘

Select desired telephone number with button

‚

or

ƒ

.

The letter R and the number of the memory position appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display. The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received.

왘


button.


앫

앫

Speed dial

If you have stored telephone numbers as speed dial numbers in your telephone, you can also enter these with buttons

1

to

R

on the radio head unit.

왘

왘

Press desired button

1

to

R briefly.

Press s

button.


Turbo dial

If you have stored telephone numbers as turbo dial numbers in your telephone, you can also enter these with buttons

1

to

R

on the radio head unit.

왘


1

to

R until the call is made.

Redial

If the number you have dialed is busy, you can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the redial function.

i

If you have activated the automatic redial function on your telephone, the number of the person being called is automatically redialed after a short waiting period if there is a busy signal.

Refer to the separate operating instructions for the mobile telephone.

앫

Manual redial

220


Audio system

왘

Press s

button.

The telephone number last dialed will appear in the display.

왘


‚

or

ƒ

.

The letter

L

and the number of the memory position appears in the left-hand corner of the display. The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received.

왘


button.


Accepting an incoming call

If the telephone is active in the background

(reception symbol is visible in the display), the audio source is muted when an incoming call is received. A ringing tone can be heard and the caller’s telephone number, or the name under which the telephone number has been saved in the phone book, appears in the display. If the caller’s number is not transmitted with the call,

CALL


왘

Press s

button.

The call is accepted.

Muting a call

It is possible to mute a call; the caller is then no longer able to hear you.

앫

앫

Mute on

왘

왘

Press

MUT

MIC MUTE

Mute off

soft key.


왘

Press MUT soft key again.

Terminating a call

왘

Press t

button.

The current call is terminated and the muted audio source becomes active again.

221


Audio system

Talking with two callers at the same time

If you wish to receive or place another call during an already active call, you can accept or place the second call and switch between the callers or combine them into one call. Note that the features described here are depending on availability from your mobile phone service provider.

앫

Placing/accepting a second call

왘

왘

Place new call by entering telephone number manually.

Press s

button.

You are connected to the second caller; the first caller is kept on hold.

or

왘

Press s

button to accept a second call.

i

You will be notified of the second call acoustically, but you will not see this in the display.

앫

앫

You are connected with the second caller; the first caller is kept on hold.

Switching between calls

왘

Press

2

and s

buttons.

This switches between the calls.

The non-active call is kept on hold.

Terminating a call

왘

Press t

button.

The current call is terminated. You are again connected with the caller previously placed on hold.

앫

앫

Combining two calls

왘

Press

3

and s

buttons.

The calls are combined into one call.

Terminating a combined call

왘

Press t

button.

The connection to both callers is terminated.

222


Audio system

TDMA or CDMA network phones

Warning!

G

A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop before placing or taking a telephone call. If you choose to use the telephone

1

while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when weather, road, and traffic conditions permit.





1


Using your Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone*, a number of functions and operating steps can be performed and displayed in the audio system display.

Further operating instructions not covered here can be found in the operating instructions for the multifunction steering wheel and the mobile telephone*.

If your audio system is set up for telephone operation, the t

symbol will appear in the display.

When you insert your Mercedes-Benz specified mobile telephone* into the telephone cradle, you will be prompted to enter your PIN for 30 seconds

(

컄 page 223). This display disappears when you press any button.

When your mobile telephone* is inserted into the telephone cradle, you will see the reception strength in the upper right-hand corner of the display.

Switching on the telephone

Switching on the telephone

왘

Press h

button.

If you have programmed an unlock code for the telephone, you must now enter the code.

왘

왘

Enter code using buttons

1 to

R

.

If necessary, correct number entered with the

CLR

soft key. Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered; press soft key and hold to delete the complete number.

컄컄

223


Audio system

컄컄 왘

Press OK soft key after entering correct code.

The telephone is unlocked. If you have entered an incorrect code, you must enter the correct code.

Adjusting sound

왘

Adjust sound during a telephone call.

Sound adjustment (

컄 page 195).

Placing a call

Switching off the telephone

왘

Press h

button for approx. three seconds.

PROCESSING

appears in the display until the telephone is off. Afterward,

PHONE OFF


Entering a telephone number and starting the dialing process

왘

If necessary, correct number entered with the CLR soft key. Press soft key briefly to delete the last digit entered; press soft key and hold to delete the complete number.

왘

After correct telephone number has been entered, press s

button.

i

If the telephone number has been saved together with a name in the phone book, the name will appear in the display.

Adjusting the volume

왘


E button during a telephone call.


i

The volume can be adjusted separately for telephone mode and audio mode.

왘

Enter desired telephone number using buttons

1

to

R

.

The number can have up to 32 digits, but only twelve of these are visible in the display.

Phone book

The numbers stored in the phone book of the mobile telephone can be called up either by name or number.

In addition, incoming calls are stored in the phone book.

224

i

This is only possible, however, when the call information transmitted includes the number of the person calling. If the telephone number is not transmitted, NO NUMBER will be stored in the phone book.

앫

Searching and calling up phone book entries by name

You can access your mobile telephone’s phone book with the audio system. You can access both the main entries and the sub-entries of your phone book.

or

왘

왘


‚

or

ƒ

.

Press desired numerical key

2 to

9

.

The stored entries are selected according to the alphabetical order of the initial letters (e.g. for

S -Schneider, press button

7 four times).

왘

왘


‚ or

ƒ

.

The system jumps from one initial letter to the next in ascending or descending order.


‚ or

ƒ

until desired initial letter has been reached.

or


Audio system

왘

Press button

‚

or

ƒ repeatedly until desired entry has been reached.

The stored entries are selected in alphabetical order with the sub-entries.

i

Several sub-entries can be stored for each main entry (name). These entries are marked by a corresponding abbreviation that appears in the upper left-hand corner of the display. The following abbreviations for sub-entries are possible:

CEL = Mobile phone

HOM = Home

WOR = Work

FAX = Fax

PAG = Pager

TEL = Main

컄컄

225


Audio system

컄컄

앫

앫

왘


button.


Viewing the telephone number of a phone book entry

왘

왘

Search for desired entry.

Press NUM soft key.

The telephone number of the phone book entry appears in the display.

Returning calls received

왘

왘


‚

or

ƒ

.

Press

RCV

soft key (received calls).

The number of received calls and then the call last received appear briefly in the display.

왘


‚

or

ƒ

.

The letter R and the number of the memory position appear in the upper left-hand corner of the display. The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received.

왘


button.


앫

앫

Speed dial

If you have stored telephone numbers as speed dial numbers in your telephone, you can also enter these with buttons

1

to

R

on the radio unit.

왘

왘


1

to

R briefly.

Press s

button.


Turbo dial

If you have stored telephone numbers as turbo dial numbers in your telephone, you can also enter these with buttons

1

to

R

on the radio unit.

왘


1

to

R until the call is made.

226

Redial

If the number you have dialed is busy, you can again place calls to the last ten telephone numbers dialed using the redial function.

i

If you have activated the automatic redial function on your mobile telephone, the number of the person being called is automatically redialed after a short waiting period if there is a busy signal.

Refer to the separate operating instructions for the mobile telephone.

앫

Manual redial


Audio system

왘

Press s

button.

The telephone number last dialed will appear in the display.

왘


‚

or

ƒ

.

The letter

L

and the number of the memory position appears in the left-hand corner of the display. The numbers are stored in the order of the calls received.

왘


button.


Accepting an incoming call

If the telephone is active in the background

(reception symbol is visible in the display), the audio source is muted when an incoming call is received. A ringing tone can be heard and the caller’s telephone number, or the name under which the telephone number has been saved in the telephone book, appears in the display. If the caller’s number is not relayed,

CALL


왘

Press s

button.

The call is accepted.

227


Audio system

Muting a call

It is possible to mute a call; the caller is then no longer able to hear you.

앫

앫

Mute on

왘

왘

Press

MUT

MIC MUTE

Mute off

soft key.


왘

Press MUT soft key again.

Accepting a second incoming call

If you receive another call during an already active call, you can accept the second call and switch between the two.

앫

Accepting a second call

왘

Place new call by entering telephone number manually.

i

You will be notified of the second call acoustically, but you will not see this in the display.

앫

앫

Switching between calls

왘

Press s

button.

This switches between the calls.

The non-active call is kept on hold.

Terminating a call

왘

Press t

button.

The current call is terminated. The connection to the caller previously kept on hold is also interrupted; however, reconnection is indicated by an acoustic signal.

Terminating a call

왘

Press t

button.

The current call is terminated and the muted audio source becomes active again.


228


Audio system

Placing a second call

If you wish to place another call during an already active call, you can place the second call and switch between the callers or combine them into one call. Note that this feature is depending on availability from your mobile phone service provider.

앫

Placing a second call

왘

왘

Place a new call by entering telephone number manually.

Press s

button.


앫

앫

앫

Terminating a call

왘

Press t

button.

The current call is terminated. The connection to the caller previously kept on hold is also interrupted; however, reconnection is indicated by an acoustic signal.

Combining two calls

왘

Press s

button.

The calls are combined into one call.

Terminating a combined call

왘

Press t

button.

The connection to both callers is terminated.

Emergency calls “911”

The following describes how to dial a “911” emergency call using the audio system head unit when a Mercedes-Benz specified mobile phone* is inserted in the phone cradle*. Unless otherwise specified, the descriptions refer to the audio system head unit.

Consult the separate telephone operating instructions that came with your mobile phone* for information on how to place a

“911” emergency call on the mobile phone*.

Warning!

G

The “911” emergency call system is a public service. Using it without due cause is a criminal offense.

229


Audio system

앫

앫

The following conditions must be met for a

“911” emergency call:

Telephone must be switched on.

The corresponding mobile communications network must be available. i

Emergency calls may not be possible with all telephone networks or if certain network services and/or telephone functions are active. Check with your local service providers.

If you cannot make an emergency call, you will have to initiate rescue measures yourself.

GSM network phones

Placing a “911” emergency call using audio head unit with the phone locked

왘

Press h button to switch to telephone operation.

왘

왘

PIN?

appears in the audio display.

Enter 911 using the number keypad on the audio head unit.

Press OK soft key or s button for dialing to begin.

DIALING

appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection.

왘

Wait until the emergency call center answers, then describe the emergency.

Placing a “911” emergency call using audio head unit with the phone unlocked

왘


왘

왘


Press s button for dialing to begin.

DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection.

왘

Wait until the emergency call center answers, then describe the emergency. i

If no SIM card is in the mobile phone,

NO SERVICE appears in the audio display. In that case, you only can make an emergency call on the mobile phone itself, without the use of the head unit.

230

TDMA/CDMA network phones

Placing a “911” emergency call using audio head unit with the phone locked

왘


왘

왘

CODE?

appears in the audio display.


Press OK soft key or s button for dialing to begin.

DIALING

appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection.

왘


Placing a “911” emergency call using audio head unit with the phone unlocked

왘


왘

왘


Press s button for dialing to begin.

왘

DIALING appears in the audio display while the telephone establishes the connection.



Audio system

231


Power windows

Opening and closing the windows

The windows are opened and closed eletrically. Switches for operating the driver and passenger door windows are located on the driver's door. A switch for operating the passenger door window is located on the passenger door.

The door windows can also be operated using the retractable hardtop switch

(

컄 page 234). The rear side windows can only be operated using the retractable hardtop switch (

컄 page 234) or the

SmartKey* (

컄 page 235).

Warning!

G

When closing the windows, make sure there is no danger of anyone being harmed by the closing procedure.

The closing of the door windows can be immediately halted by releasing the switch or, if the switch was pressed past the resistance point and released, by pressing the respective switch.

The door windows are equipped with the express-close and automatic reversal function. If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you pressed the switch past the resistance point and released it to close the window, the automatic reversal function will stop the window and open it slightly.

If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the window by pressing and holding the switch, by pressing and holding button

‹

on the SmartKey*, by pushing and holding the retractable hardtop switch, or by pressing and holding the

, button on the climate control panel or automatic climate control panel*, the automatic reversal function will not operate.


SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

1 Left window

2 Right window

232


Power windows

i

You can also open or close the windows using the SmartKey* (summer opening/convenience closing feature)

(

컄 page 235) or the retractable hardtop switch (

컄 page 234).

You can close and reopen the windows using the air recirculation switch

, in the control panel of the climate control (

컄 page 176) or the automatic climate control* (

컄 page 186).

왘


컄 page 35).

Opening the door windows

왘

Press and hold switch 1 or 2 at the symbol k

to the resistance point.

The corresponding window will move downwards until you release the switch.

Closing the door windows

왘

Press and hold switch 1 or 2 at the symbol j

to the resistance point.

The corresponding window will move upwards until you release the switch.

Warning

G

If you press and hold the switch when closing the window, and upward movement of the window is blocked by some obstruction including but not limited to arms, hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal will not operate.

Fully opening the door windows

(Express-open)

왘

Press switch 1 or 2 at the symbol k

past the resistance point and release.

The corresponding window opens completely.

Fully closing the door windows

(Express-close)

왘

Press switch 1 or 2 at the symbol j

past the resistance point and release.

The corresponding window closes completely.

Warning!

G

Driver’s door only:

If the switch is pressed again past the resistance point and released within five seconds, the automatic reversal will not operate.

컄컄

233


Power windows

컄컄

!

If the upward movement of the window is blocked during the closing procedure, the window will stop and open slightly.

Remove the obstruction, press the respective switch at the symbol j again past the resistance point and release.

If the window still does not close when there is no obstruction, press and hold the respective switch at the symbol j

. The window will then close without the obstruction sensor function.

Opening and closing the windows with the retractable hardtop switch

All windows can be opened or closed with the retractable hardtop switch.

The retractable hardtop switch is located on the lower part of the center console.

Stopping windows during

Express-operation

왘 Briefly press the respective switch at the symbol k or j

again.

Retractable hardtop switch

1 Opening all side windows

2 Closing all side windows

Warning!

G

Never operate the windows if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure.

In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the retractable hardtop switch.

If a door window encounters an obstruction that blocks its path in a circumstance where you are closing the windows using the retractable hardtop switch, the automatic reversal function will not operate.

왘


컄 page 35).

234


Power windows

Opening

왘

Push the retractable hardtop switch in quick succession twice in direction of arrow 1 .

All side windows open.

i

You can operate the rear side windows only by using the retractable hardtop switch.

Closing

왘

왘

Push the retractable hardtop switch in quick succession twice in direction of arrow 2 .

Keep the retractable hardtop switch pushed the second time until all windows are closed.

The windows in the driver’s and passenger door will close first, followed by the rear side windows.

i

If the retractable hardtop is open, only the windows in the driver’s and passenger door will close. The rear side windows remain open.

Opening and closing the windows with the SmartKey*

The retractable hardtop (

컄 page 237) will also be opened or closed when the power windows are operated with the SmartKey.

Warning!

G

Never operate the windows or retractable hardtop if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure.

In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the button on the SmartKey.

To reverse direction of movement, press

Œ for opening or

‹

for closing.

235


Power windows

왘

Aim transmitter eye at the outside driver’s or passenger door handle.

Opening (Summer opening feature)

왘


Œ

after unlocking the vehicle.

왘

The windows and retractable hardtop begin to open after approximately one second.

In the multifunction display you will see the message

Retractable roof open

.

Release button

Œ

on the SmartKey to interrupt procedure.

Closing (Convenience closing feature)

왘

Press and hold lock button

‹

after locking the vehicle.

왘

The windows and retractable hardtop begin to close after approximately one second.

In the multifunction display you will see the message Retractable roof closed .

Release button

‹


Warning!

G

If the retractable hardtop does not completely open or close, a warning sounds. In the multifunction display you will see

K and the message

Retractable roof being lowered

. After about 15 seconds the roof hydraulics lose pressure.

Properly lock the retractable hardtop

(

컄 page 240) before continuing to drive.

Synchronizing power windows

The power windows must be synchronized

앫

앫 after the battery has been disconnected.

if the power windows cannot be fully opened (Express-open) or closed

(Express-close).

Each power window must be synchronized.

왘

왘

왘

Close all doors.


컄 page 35).

Press and hold both switches 1 and 2 at the symbol j

until the windows are completely closed.

왘

Hold on to switches 1 and 2 for approximately one second.

The power windows are synchronized.

236

왔


Opening and closing the retractable hardtop

For safety reasons, the retractable hardtop can only be opened and closed when the vehicle is standing still.

Warning!

G

Before operating the switch for the retractable hardtop, make sure no persons are injured by the moving parts (retractable hardtop, roof frame, and trunk lid).

Hands must never be placed near the roof frame, upper windshield area, retractable hardtop, shelf behind roll bars, or trunk lid while the retractable hardtop is being raised or lowered. Serious personal injury may occur.

If potential danger exists, release the retractable hardtop switch. This immediately interrupts the raising or lowering procedure.

You can then operate the retractable hardtop switch to raise or lower the retractable hardtop away from the danger zone.

Warning!

G



!

Never sit or place heavy objects on the rear shelf. Doing so could cause damage to the retractable hardtop and the rear shelf.



앫

앫

앫

!

When opening and closing the retractable hardtop, make sure

앫 there is sufficient clearance for the retractable hardtop to move up and the trunk lid to move back

앫

앫 the luggage cover is extended and closed the trunk is only loaded to the height of the luggage cover

앫 the luggage/cargo does not push the closed luggage cover up the trunk lid is closed no roof luggage carrier is installed the outside temperature is above

+5°F (-15°C)

Otherwise the roof and other parts of the vehicle could be damaged.

237



Luggage cover

The luggage cover is located in the trunk.

Luggage cover

Closing

왘

Pull the luggage cover at the handle in direction of the arrow until it engages on both sides at the trunk sill.

Opening

왘

Press the release handle on the luggage cover.

왘

Guide the luggage cover forward to its end stop.

!

To prevent damage to the retractable hardtop or luggage/cargo when lowering the roof:

앫

앫

Load trunk only to the height of the luggage cover.

Do not permit luggage/cargo to push up the closed luggage cover.

앫

앫

Do not place anything on top or in front of the luggage cover.

Do not place anything on the shelf behind the roll bar.


Warning!

G

To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle only with the retractable hardtop either completely closed and locked, or fully lowered into its storage compartment.

i

For safety reasons, the retractable hardtop cannot be opened or closed while driving.

Make sure the retractable hardtop and the rear window are dry before you open it. Otherwise water may enter the interior and/or trunk.

238



앫

앫

앫 i

Before operating the retractable hardtop via the retractable hardtop switch, do the following first:

앫

Engage the parking brake

(

컄 page 56).

Close the luggage cover.

Close the trunk lid.

Switch on ignition (

컄 page 35).

The switch for opening/closing the retractable hardtop is on the lower part of the center console.

Opening

왘

Push and hold the retractable hardtop switch in direction of arrow 1 until the retractable hardtop is completely lowered into the trunk.

The message Retractable roof open briefly appears in the multifunction display.

Retractable hardtop switch

1 Opening

2 Closing

For operating the power windows with the retractable hardtop switch (

컄 page 234).

Closing

왘

Push and hold the retractable hardtop switch in direction of arrow 2 until the retractable hardtop is completely closed and locked.

The message Retractable roof closed briefly appears in the multifunction display.

239



Locking the retractable hardtop after raising/lowering

Warning!

G

If the retractable hardtop is not fully opened or closed, a warning will sound after

15 seconds, pressure in the hardtop’s hydraulic system will drop, and the hardtop will lower.

Be sure to keep the hardtop switch pushed until the hardtop is fully opened or closed.

The hydraulic pump will then shut off.

To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle only with the hardtop either completely closed and locked, or fully lowered into its storage compartment.

Warning!

G

If the retractable hardtop does not completely open or close, the roof hydraulics will lose pressure and the retractable hardtop is lowered

앫 after approximately seven minutes when the ignition is switched on

앫 after approximately 15 seconds when the ignition is switched off

Shortly before the hardtop is lowered, a warning will sound. In the multifunction display you will see

K

and the message


.

앫

Properly lock the retractable hardtop before continuing to drive (

컄 page 241).

Warning!

G

The hardtop is not fully closed and locked or not fully opened and locked if:

앫

앫 the message

Retractable roof in operation is shown in the multifunction display a warning sounds for ten seconds when starting to drive or while driving

If the retractable hardtop is not properly locked, lock it as described below.

240



왘

왘

Unlocked status noticed when stopped


컄 page 35).

To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully closed position, push the retractable hardtop switch forward until the retractable hardtop is fully closed.

The message

Retractable roof closed

briefly appears in the multifunction display.

왘 or:

To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully opened position, push the retractable hardtop switch rearward until the retractable hardtop is fully open.


Unlocked status noticed while driving

Warning!

G

Stop the vehicle and lock the retractable hardtop before continuing to drive. You could otherwise endanger yourself and others.

왘

Stop the vehicle and leave the ignition switched on.

왘

To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully closed position, push the retractable hardtop switch forward until the retractable hardtop is fully closed.

The message

Retractable roof closed

briefly appears in the multifunction display.

왘 or:

To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully opened position, push the retractable hardtop switch rearward until the retractable hardtop is fully open.


241



Opening and closing the retractable hardtop with the SmartKey*

The power windows (

컄 page 232) will also be opened or closed when you operate the retractable hardtop with the SmartKey.

Warning!

G

Before operating the retractable hardtop, make sure no persons can be injured by the moving parts (retractable roof, roof frame, and trunk lid) due to negligence.

Hands must never be placed near the roof frame, upper windshield area, hardtop, shelf behind roll bars, or trunk lid while the retractable hardtop is being raised or lowered.

Serious personal injury may occur.

If potential danger exists, release the respective button on the SmartKey. This immediately interrupts the raising or lowering procedure. You can then operate or

Œ

‹ to raise or lower the hardtop away from the danger zone.

Warning!

G

Never operate the windows or retractable hardtop if there is the possibility of anyone being harmed by the opening or closing procedure.

In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the button on the SmartKey.

To reverse direction of movement, press

Œ for opening or

‹

for closing.

왘

Aim transmitter eye at the outside driver’s or passenger door handle.

Opening (Summer opening feature)

왘

Press and hold unlock button

Œ

until the retractable hardtop is completely open.

왘

The retractable hardtop and windows begin to open after approximately one second.

In the multifunction display you will see the message Retractable roof open .

Release button

Œ


242



Closing (Convenience closing feature)

왘

Press and hold lock button

‹

until the retractable hardtop is fully closed.

왘

The retractable hardtop and windows begin to close after approximately one second.

In the multifunction display you will see the message Retractable roof closed .

Release button

‹


Wind screen

Warning!

G

The wind screen can restrict the driver’s vision to the rear of the vehicle. To prevent a possible accident when visibility is limited

(e.g. in darkness), the upper part of the wind screen should be folded back.

Warning!

G

If the retractable hardtop does not completely open or close, a warning sounds. In the multifunction display you will see

K and the message


. After about 15 seconds the roof hydraulics lose pressure.

Properly lock the retractable hardtop

(

컄 page 240) before continuing to drive.

1 Wind screen

2 Snap fastener

3 Supporting strap

4 Fastening pin

Installing

왘

Remove wind screen age bag and unfold.

1 from its stor-

왘

왘

왘

The storage bag is located on the wall behind the seat backrests.

Attach supporting straps 3 to fastening pins 4 .

Close snap fasteners 2 .

Pull wind screen 1 on molding over roll bars.

Removing

왘

왘

Pull off wind screen 1 from roll bars.

Open snap fasteners 2 .

i

Pull on snap fastener’s head to open the snap fastener.

왘

왘

Loosen supporting straps 3 from fastening pins 4 .

Fold wind screen 1 and put it back into storage bag.

243


Driving systems

The driving system of your vehicle is described on the following pages:

앫

Cruise control, with which the vehicle can maintain a preset speed.

The BAS, ABS and ESP driving systems are described in the “Safety and Security” section (

컄 page 80).

Cruise control

The cruise control automatically maintains the speed you set for your vehicle.

Use of cruise control is recommended for driving at a constant speed for extended periods of time.

You can set or resume cruise control at any speed over 25 mph (40 km/h).

The cruise control function is operated by means of the cruise control lever.

The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left-hand side of the steering column (

컄 page 22).

Warning!

G

The cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must remain at all times responsible for the vehicle speed and for safe brake operation.

Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic, and weather conditions make it advisable to travel at a steady speed.

앫

The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic because conditions do not allow safe driving at a steady speed.

앫

The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction can result in wheel spin and loss of control.

앫

Deactivate the cruise control when driving in fog.

The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this particular preset speed.

244

1 Set current or higher speed

2 Set current or lower speed

3 Cancel cruise control

4 Resume to last set speed


Driving systems

Warning!

G

Cruise control brakes automatically so that the set speed is not exceeded. The brake pedal is depressed automatically to do this.

Keep in mind that cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must always remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed and for safe braking operation.

Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, including the area under the brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement which could interfere with the braking ability of the cruise control system.

Do not place your foot under the brake pedal

- your foot could become caught.

Setting current speed

왘

Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed.

왘

Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise control lever (

컄 page 245).

The current speed is set.

왘

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

The cruise control is activated.

The selected speed appears in the multifunction display.

245


Driving systems

i

On uphill or downhill grades, the cruise control may not be able to maintain the set speed. Once the grade eases, the set speed will be resumed.

On downhill grades, the cruise control will hold the set speed with active braking action.

In addition, on longer downhill grades the automatic transmission* will automatically downshift.

i

Vehicles with manual transmission:

앫

앫

앫

If you depress the clutch pedal when shifting into another gear, the engine speed may increase.

Drive with sufficient engine speed.

Shift gears in a timely manner.

If possible, do not shift down more than one gear.

Canceling cruise control

There are several ways to cancel the cruise control:

왘

Step on the brake pedal.

The cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use.

or

왘

Briefly push the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 3 (

컄 page 245).

The cruise control is canceled. The last speed set is stored for later use.

i

The last stored speed is canceled when you turn off the engine.

246

앫

앫 i

The cruise control switches off automatically, if you step on the brake pedal.

you pull up the parking brake lever firmly.

앫 the vehicle speed is below 25 mph

(40 km/h).

앫

앫

ESP is in operation or switched off with the ESP switch (

컄 page 82).

Vehicles with manual transmission: you depress the clutch pedal for longer than six seconds during shifting into another gear.

앫

Vehicles with automatic transmission*: you move the gear selector lever to position

N

while driving.


Driving systems

!


Moving gear selector lever to position

N

while driving also cancels cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to position

N

while driving except to coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).

Setting a higher speed

왘

Lift the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 (

컄 page 245) and hold it up until the desired speed is reached.

왘

Release the cruise control lever.

The new speed is set.

i

Depressing the accelerator pedal does not deactivate the cruise control. After brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will resume the last speed set.

Setting a lower speed

왘

Depress the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 (

컄 page 245) and hold it down until the desired speed is reached.

왘

Release the cruise control lever.

The new speed is set.

i

When you use the cruise control lever to decelerate, the brake system will automatically brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.

247


Driving systems

Fine adjustment in 1 mph

(Canada: 1 km/h) increments

Faster

왘

Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 1 (

컄 page 245).

Slower

왘

Briefly tip the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 2 (

컄 page 245).

Setting to last stored speed

(“Resume” function)

Warning!

G

The speed stored in memory should only be set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration differences arising from returning to the preset speed could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

왘

Briefly pull the cruise control lever in direction of arrow 4 (

컄 page 245).

The cruise control resumes the last set speed.

왘

Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

The last set speed appears in the multifunction display.

248

왔

Loading

Roof rack

!

This vehicle is not designed to carry items on its roof. Roof rails and any roof-mounted devices, unless expressly approved by Mercedes-Benz for use on this vehicle model, must not be used as they will damage the vehicle and retractable hardtop.

At time of printing, Mercedes-Benz does not offer any roof racks or any other roof-mounted devices for use on this vehicle.

!

This vehicle is not designed to carry any items on its trunk lid or accommodate any type of trunk lid rack or device. Using such devices may damage the vehicle and retractable hardtop mechanism.


Loading

249


Useful features

Storage compartments Glove box Storage compartment and telephone* compartment under armrest

Warning!

G

To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not place anything on shelf behind the roll bars.

Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy objects.

Keep compartment lids closed. This will help to prevent stored objects from being thrown around and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident.

i

The glove box and the storage compartment under the armrest are centrally locked and unlocked.

1 Glove box lid release

2 Glove box

왘

Pull glove box lid release the glove box.

1 to open

왘

The glove box lid opens downward.

Push glove box lid 1 up until it engages to close the glove box.

i

The CD changer* is located in the glove box.

1 Armrest

2 Recess for opening telephone* compartment

Storage compartment

왘

Lift armrest 1 in direction of arrow to open the storage compartment.

왘

Lower armrest 1 until it engages to close storage compartment.

250


Useful features

Telephone* compartment

왘

Reach into recess 2 on the left or right side and fold up armrest to the right or left side to open it.

왘

The compartment for the telephone* is visible.

Fold armrest back until it engages to close the telephone* compartment.

Storage compartment between the seat backrests

1 Storage compartment lid release

2 Storage compartment

왘

Press storage compartment lid release 1 to open.

The storage compartment lid opens downward.

왘

Push storage compartment lid up until it engages to close it.

Parcel net in passenger footwell

A small convenience parcel net is located in the passenger footwell and behind the driver’s seat. It is for small and light items, such as road maps, mail, etc.

Warning!

G

Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects having sharp edges, in the parcel net.

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants.

251


Useful features

Shelf behind roll bars

Warning!

G

The shelf behind the roll bars should not be used to carry objects. This will prevent such objects from being thrown around and injuring vehicle occupants during an accident or sudden maneuver.

The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.

Cup holder

Warning!

G

In order to help prevent spilling liquids on vehicle occupants, only use containers that fit into the cup holder. Use lids on open containers and do not fill containers to a height where the contents, especially hot liquids, could spill during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.

When not in use, keep the cup holder closed. An open cup holder may cause injury to you or others when contacted during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.

Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup holder may come loose during hard braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects thrown around in the vehicle interior may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury.

1 Cover plate

왘

Press briefly on cover plate the cup holder.

1 to open

왘

The cup holder opens automatically.

Press cover plate 1 until the cup holder engages to close it.

252


Useful features

Ashtray

1 Cover plate

왘

Press cover plate 1 rection of the arrow.

briefly in the di-

The ashtray opens automatically.

왘

To close the ashtray again, press cover plate 1 until the ashtray engages.

Removing ashtray insert

Warning!

G

Remove front ashtray only with vehicle standing still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle from movement. Move gear selector lever to position

N

(manual transmission: into second gear). With gear selector lever in position

N

(manual transmission: into second gear), turn off the engine.

Installing ashtray insert

왘

Place the ashtray insert into the retainer.

왘

Push the ashtray insert down into the retainer until it engages.

왘

왘

Secure vehicle from movement by setting the parking brake.

Move the selector lever to position

N

(manual transmission: second gear).

Now you have more room to take out the ashtray insert.

Open the ashtray.

왘

왘

Reach into both recesses on the left and right side of the retainer and pull out the ashtray insert.

253


Useful features

Cigarette lighter Electrical outlet

Warning!

G

Never touch the heating element or sides of the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot.

Hold the knob only.



i

The lighter socket can be used to accommodate electrical accessories up to a maximum of 85 W.

1 Cigarette lighter

왘


컄 page 35).

왘

Push in cigarette lighter 1 .

Cigarette lighter 1 will pop out automatically when hot.

왘

Reinsert cigarette lighter 1 in its socket after use.

왘

왘

An electrical outlet 1 is located in the passenger footwell on the side panel of the center console.


컄 page 35).

Flip up cover of electrical outlet 1 and insert electrical plug (cigarette lighter type).

i

The electrical outlet can be used to accommodate electrical consumers

(e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum of 180 W.

254


Useful features

Floormat (driver’s side only)

Removing

Installing

왘

왘

Pull floormats off of retainer pins 2 in direction of arrow 1 .

Remove the floormats.

왘

왘

Lay down the floormat.

Press the floormat eyelets 4 onto retainer pins 5 in direction of arrow 3 .

Warning!

G

Whenever you are using floormats, make sure there is enough clearance and the floormats are securely fastened.

Floormats should always be securely fastened using eyelets

4

and retainer pins

5

.

Before driving off, check that the floormats are securely in place and adjust them if necessary. A loose floormat could slip and hinder proper functioning of the pedals.

i

For easier removing and installing the floormat, slide the driver’s seat fully backwards (

컄 page 37).

255


Useful features

Telephone*

Warning!

G

Warning!

G

Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle.

The external antenna must be approved by

Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on the installation of an approved external antenna. Refer to the radio transmitter operating instructions regarding use of an external antenna.

Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s attention to the road must always be his/her primary focus when driving. For your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location and stop the vehicle before placing or taking a telephone call.

If you choose to use the telephone

1

while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone when road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.

1


256

Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System)* or audio system if road, weather, and traffic conditions permit.




You can take and place telephone calls using the buttons s and t

on the multifunction steering wheel. Use the control system for performing other telephone functions (

컄 page 146).

See separate operating manual for instructions on how to use the telephone.


Useful features

Tele Aid*

!

The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call using the

¡ button. Failure to complete either of these steps will result in a system that is not activated.

If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response

Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).

The Tele Aid system

(

Tele

matic

A

larm

I

dentification on

D

emand)

앫

앫

앫

The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response:

Automatic and manual emergency

Roadside Assistance

Information

The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.

The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can be adjusted when using the volume control on the multifunction steering wheel. To raise, press button

æ

and to lower, press button

ç

or use the volume knob on your audio system or COMAND* head unit.

왘

To activate, press the SOS button, the

Roadside Assistance button

•

or the Information button

¡

, depending on the type of response required.

i

The SOS button is located in the overhead control panel.

The Roadside Assistance button

• and the Information button

¡

are located below the center armrest cover.

Shortly after the completion of your

Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID and password. By visiting www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”

(USA only), you will have access to account information, remote door unlock, profile, and more.

257


Useful features

!

The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular network for communication and the

GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of these signals are unavailable, the

Tele Aid system may not function and if this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.

System self-check

Initially, after switching on ignition, malfunctions are detected and indicated (the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the

Roadside Assistance button

•

, and the

Information button

¡

stay on longer than ten seconds or do not come on).

The message Tele Aid malfunction

Drive to workshop appears in the multifunction display.

Warning!

G

If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in the Roadside Assistance button, and/or in the Information button do not come on during the system self-check or if any of these indicators remain illuminated constantly in red and/or the message

Tele Aid malfunction Drive to workshop

is displayed in the multifunction display after the system self-check, a malfunction in the system has been detected.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

Emergency calls

An emergency call is initiated automatically following an accident in which the emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) or air bags deploy.

An emergency call can also be initiated manually by opening the cover next to the interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then briefly pressing the button located under the cover. See (

컄 page 259) for instructions on initiating an emergency call manually.

Once the emergency call is in progress, the indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to flash. The message

Connecting call appears in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted. When the connection is established, the message

Call connected

appears in the multifunction display. All information relevant to the emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS satellite location system), vehicle model, identification number and color are generated.

258


Useful features

A voice connection between the Response

Center and the occupants of the vehicle will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated.

The Response Center will attempt to determine more precisely the nature of the emergency provided they can speak to an occupant of the vehicle.

The Tele Aid system is available if:

앫 it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription for monitoring services, connection and cellular air time.

앫 the relevant cellular phone network and GPS signals are available and pass the information on to the Response

Center.

i

Location of the vehicle on a map is only possible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from the GPS satellite network and pass the information on to the

Response Center.

Warning!

G

If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).

The message

Call failed

appears in the multifunction display for approximately ten seconds.

Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.

Initiating an emergency call manually

1 Cover

2 SOS button

왘

Briefly press on cover 1 .

The cover opens.

컄컄

259


Useful features

컄컄 왘

Press SOS button 2 briefly.

The indicator lamp in the

SOS button 2 flashes until the emergency call is concluded.

왘

Wait for a voice connection to the

Response Center.

왘

Close cover 1 after the emergency call is concluded.

Warning!

G

If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please do not wait for voice contact after you have pressed the emergency button. Carefully leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically contact local emergency officials with the vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.

Roadside Assistance button

•

Located below the center armrest cover is the Roadside Assistance button

•

.

왘

Press and hold the button (for longer than two seconds).

A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside

Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.

The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message

Connecting call

will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted.

When the connection is established, the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).

A voice connection between the Roadside

Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of the vehicle will be established.

왘

Describe the nature of the need for assistance.

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified

Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow your vehicle to the nearest

Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for more information.

The following is only available in the USA:

앫

Sign and Drive services: Services such as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with the vehicle spare tire are obtainable.

260


Useful features

i

The indicator lamp in the Roadside

Assistance button

•

remains illuminated in red for approx. ten seconds during the system self-check after switching on ignition (together with the

SOS button and the Information button

¡

).

See “System self-check” (

컄 page 258) when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds.

If the indicator lamp in the Roadside

Assistance button

•

is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate a Roadside

Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network was not available).

The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display.

Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the button t

on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or COMAND* head unit.

Information button

¡

Located below the center armrest cover is the Information button

¡

.

왘

Press and hold the button (for longer than two seconds).

A call to the Customer Assistance

Center will be initiated. The button will flash while the call is in progress. The message

Connecting call

will appear in the multifunction display and the audio system is muted.

When the connection is established, the message Call connected appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).

A voice connection between the Customer

Assistance Center representative and the occupants of the vehicle will be established. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest

Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz

USA products and services is available to you.

For more details concerning the Tele Aid system, please visit www.mbusa.com and use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only).

261


Useful features

i

The indicator lamp in the Information button

¡

remains illuminated in red for approx. ten seconds during the system self-check after switching on ignition (together with the SOS button and the Roadside Assistance button

•

).

See “System self-check” (

컄 page 258) when the indicator lamp does not come on in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds.

If the indicator lamp in the Information button

¡

is flashing continuously and there was no voice connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system could not initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available). The message Call failed appears in the multifunction display.

Information calls can be terminated using the button t

on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or COMAND* head unit.

!

If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or remain illuminated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system has detected a malfunction or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call.

Visit your Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked or contact the Response Center at

1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or

1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as possible.

Upgrade scenario

An emergency call is possible even if other services are active.

!

If the indicator lamp continues to flash or the system does not reset, contact the Response Center at

1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or

1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in

Canada.

262

i

The indicator lamp in the respective button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a

Response Center or Customer

Assistance Center representative, except Roadside Assistance and Information calls, which can also be terminated by pressing the t button on the multifunction steering wheel or the respective button for ending a telephone call on the audio system or COMAND* head unit.


Useful features

i

When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the audio system or the COMAND* system audio is muted and the selected mode (radio, tape, or CD) pauses. The optional cellular phone* (if installed) switches off. If you must use this phone, the vehicle must be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place the call. The COMAND* navigation system

(if engaged) will continue to run. The display in the instrument cluster is available for use, and spoken commands are only available by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND* unit.

A pop-up window will appear in the

COMAND* display to indicate that a

Tele Aid call is in progress.

Remote door unlock

In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:

왘

Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response

Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).

You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you completed the subscriber agreement.

왘

Then return to your vehicle and pull the trunk recessed handle for a minimum of 20 seconds until the SOS button is flashing.

The message

Connecting call


As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password sent to you shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call.

263


Useful features

The Response Center will then unlock your vehicle with the remote door unlocking feature.

i

The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available.

The SOS button will flash and the message Connecting call will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of the door unlock command.

Once the vehicle is unlocked, a

Response Center specialist will attempt to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants.

If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the Response Center, you must wait

15 minutes before pulling the trunk handle again.

Stolen Vehicle Recovery services

In the event your vehicle was stolen:

왘

Report the incident to the police.

The police will issue a numbered incident report.

왘

Pass this number on to the

Mercedes-Benz Response Center along with your password issued to you when you subscribed to the service.

The Response Center will then attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s

Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you.

The vehicle’s location will only be provided to law enforcement.

Garage door opener*

The built-in remote control is capable of operating up to three separately controlled devices, for example garage door openers, gate openers, or other devices compatible with HomeLink

®

or some other systems.

You can program the signal transmitter buttons.

264

4

5

6

Remote control integrated into the overhead control panel

1 2 3 Signal transmitter button

Indicator lamp

Hand-held transmitter button

Hand-held remote control transmitter (not part of the vehicle equipment)

Warning!

G

Before programming the integrated remote control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. When programming a garage door opener, the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or closes.

Do not use the integrated remote control with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by

U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse - does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards.


Useful features

i

Certain types of garage door openers are incompatible with the integrated opener. If you should experience difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center, or call

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center (in the USA only) at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer

Service (in Canada) at

1-800-387-0100.

265


Useful features

i

USA only:





i

Canada only:






Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control

Step 1:

왘


컄 page 35).

Step 2:

왘

If you have previously programmed an integrated signal transmitter button and wish to retain its programming, proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 1 and 3 and release them only when indicator lamp 4 begins to flash after approximately

20 seconds (do not hold the button for longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for all three channels and initializes the memory. If you later wish to program a second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two signal transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step and begin directly with step 3.

266


Useful features

Step 3:

왘

Hold the end of hand-held remote control transmitter 6 of the device you wish to train approximately 2 to

5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the surface of the integrated remote control located on the interior rear view mirror, keeping indicator lamp 4 in view.

Step 4:

왘

Using both hands, simultaneously press hand-held transmitter button 5 and desired integrated signal transmitter button ( 1 , 2 or 3 ). Do not release the buttons until completing step 5.

Indicator lamp 4 on the integrated remote control will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

i

The indicator lamp 4 flashes the first time the signal transmitter button is programmed. If this button has already been programmed, the indicator lamp will only start flashing after

20 seconds.

Step 5:

왘

When indicator lamp 4 flashes rapidly, release both buttons.

Step 6:

왘

Press and hold the just-trained integrated signal transmitter button and observe indicator lamp 4 .

If indicator lamp 4 stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the integrated signal transmitter button is pressed and released.

i

If the indicator lamp 4 flashes rapidly for about two seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your garage door opener may be equipped with the “rolling code” feature.

Step 7:

왘

To program the remaining two buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3.

Rolling code programming

To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after completing the “Programming” portion

(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second person may make the following training procedures quicker and easier.)

267


Useful features

Step 8:

왘

Locate “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit.

Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand.

Depending on manufacturer, the “training” button may also be referred to as

“learn”or “smart” button. If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button, refer to the garage door opener operator’s manual.

Step 9:

왘

Press “training” button on the garage door opener motor head unit.

The “training light” is activated.

You have 30 seconds to initiate the following step.

Step 10:

왘

Firmly press, hold for two seconds and release programmed integrated signal transmitter button ( 1 , 2 or 3 ).

Step 11:

왘

Press, hold for two seconds and release same button a second time to complete the training process.

Some garage door openers (or other rolling code equipped devices) may require you to perform this procedure a third time to complete the training.

Step 12:

왘

Confirm the garage door operation by pressing programmed integrated signal transmitter button ( 1 , 2 or 3 ).

Step 13:

왘

To program the remaining two buttons, repeat the steps above starting with step 3.

Gate operator/Canadian programming

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of transmission which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to “time-out” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator (regardless of where you live) by using the programming procedures, replace step 4 with the following:

268


Useful features

Step 4:

왘

Continue to press and hold integrated signal transmitter button ( 1 , 2 or 3 ) while you press and re-press

(“cycle”) your hand-held remote control transmitter 6 every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. Upon successful training, the indicator lamp 4 will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds.

왘

Proceed with programming step 5 and step 6 to complete.

Operation of integrated remote control

왘

왘

Switch on the ignition.

Select and press appropriate integrated signal transmitter button ( 1 , 2 or 3 ) to activate the remote controlled device.

The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as long as the button is pressed – up to

20 seconds.

Erasing the integrated remote control memory

왘

왘

Switch on the ignition.

Simultaneously hold down signal transmitter buttons 1 and 3 , for approximately 20 seconds, until the indicator lamp 4 blinks rapidly. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds.

The codes of all three channels are erased.

i

If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all three channels.

269


Useful features

Reprogramming a single integrated signal transmitter button

To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow these steps:

왘

Press and hold desired signal transmitter button ( 1 , 2 or 3 ). Do not release the button.

왘

The indicator lamp will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the integrated signal transmitter button, proceed with programming starting with step 3.


(SLK 350, Canada only)

The steering wheel heating warms up the leather area of the steering wheel.

The lever is on the lower left-hand side of the steering wheel.

1 Switching on

2 Indicator lamp

3 Switching off

왘

왘

Switching on


컄 page 35).

Turn switch at tip of lever in direction of arrow 1 and release it.

Indicator lamp 2 comes on.

The steering wheel heating switches on.

Switching off

왘

Turn switch at tip of lever in direction of arrow 3 and release it.

The steering wheel heating switches off.

Indicator lamp 2 goes out.

i

The heating of the steering wheel depends on the current temperature.

The steering wheel heating switches off automatically when you remove the

SmartKey from the starter switch.

270

Operation

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

Driving instructions

At the gas station

Engine compartment

Tires and wheels

Winter driving

Maintenance

Vehicle care

271

Operation

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.

앫

앫

앫

The more cautiously you treat your vehicle during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later on.

앫

Drive your vehicle during the first

1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but moderate vehicle and engine speeds.

앫

앫

During this period, avoid heavy loads

(full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than

2

/

3

of maximum rpm in each gear).

Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down by shifting to a lower gear using the gear selector lever*.

Shift gears in a timely manner.

Avoid accelerating by kickdown.

앫

Select positions

3

,

2

, or

1

only when driving at moderate speeds (for hill driving).

Select

C

as the preferred shift program

(

컄 page 158) for the first 1000 miles

(1500 km).

After 1000 miles (1500 km), you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds to the permissible maximum.

!

Additional instructions for

SLK 55 AMG:

앫

앫

During the first 1000 miles

(1500 km), do not exceed a speed of 85 mph (140 km/h).

During this period, avoid engine speeds above 4500 rpm in each gear.

All of the above instructions, as may apply to your vehicle type, also apply when driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the engine or the rear differential has been replaced.

i

Always obey applicable speed limits.

272

Operation


왔


Drive sensibly – save fuel

Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions.

앫

앫

To save fuel you should:

앫

Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures.

Remove unnecessary loads.

Allow engine to warm up under low load use.

앫

Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.

앫

Have all maintenance work performed at the intervals specified in the

Maintenance Booklet and as required by the maintenance service indicator.


Center.

Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on short trips and in hilly area.

Drinking and driving

Warning!

G

Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgement.

The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive.

Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs.

Pedals

Warning!

G

Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal movement.

Power assistance

Warning!

G

With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.

273

Operation


Brakes

Warning!

G

After driving in heavy rain for some time without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components or salty road conditions, the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in front.

Resting your foot on the brake pedal will cause excessive and premature wear of the brake pads.

It can also result in the brakes overheating, thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.

To help prevent brake disk corrosion after driving on wet road surfaces (particularly salted roads), it is advisable to brake the vehicle with considerable force prior to parking. The heat generated serves to dry the brakes.

If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the brakes by applying above-normal braking pressure at higher speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the brake pads.

!

Be very careful not to endanger other road users when you apply the brakes.

Refer to the description of the Brake

Assist System (BAS) ( 컄 page 81).

If the parking brake is released and the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on, the brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low.

Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.

Have the brake system inspected immediately. Contact an authorized


All checks and service work on the brake system should be carried out by qualified technicians only. Contact an authorized


Install only brake pads and brake fluid recommended by Mercedes-Benz.

274

Operation


Warning!

G

If other than recommended brake pads are installed, or other than recommended brake fluid is used, the braking properties of the vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking is substantially impaired. This could result in an accident.

!

When driving down long and steep grades, relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a lower gear to use the engine’s braking power. This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and reduces brake pad wear.

After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on for some time, rather than immediately parking, so that the air stream will cool down the brakes faster.

High-performance brake system

(SLK 55 AMG only)

The high-performance brake system is designed to operate under the extremely high operating demands required to accommodate the performance capabilities of the vehicle. The brakes may produce a squeaking-type noise depending on the

앫

앫

앫 vehicle speed brake force applied ambient conditions, e.g. temperature and humidity

As with any brake system, the wear of individual brake system components such as brake pads or discs strongly depends on your driving style and the conditions under which you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving style calling for high demand braking will cause your vehicle’s brakes to wear more quickly.

Warning!

G

New vehicle brake pads and discs, and replacement brake pads and discs may take several hundred miles of driving until they provide optimum braking efficiency. Until that time, you may need to use increased brake pedal pressure while braking. Please be aware of this and adjust your driving and braking accordingly during this break-in period.

Excessive high demand braking will cause correspondingly high brake wear. Please be attentive to the brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster and brake condition messages in the multifunction display. Especially for high performance driving, it is important to maintain the brake system and have it checked regularly.

275

Operation


Driving off

Apply the brakes to test them briefly after driving off. Perform this procedure only when the road is clear of other traffic.

Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.

When starting off on a slippery surface, do not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off.

Doing so may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the


!

Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes premature brake and drivetrain wear.

Parking

Warning!

G


앫

앫

To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle always:

Keep right foot on brake pedal.

Pull the parking brake lever up as many notches as possible.

앫

Move the selector lever to position

P


앫

Slowly release brake pedal.

앫

앫

앫



0


Take the SmartKey and lock vehicle when leaving.

!

Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition, place gear selector lever* in position

P

(manual transmission: move gearshift lever to first or reverse gear).

In addition, when parking on hills, turn front wheel towards the road curb.

276

Operation


Tires

The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.

Warning!

G

If you feel a sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from the road.

Inspect the tires and the vehicle undercarriage for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealer for repairs.

Warning!

G

Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately

1

/

16 in

(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches

1

/

8 in (3.0 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.

Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely.

Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately

1

/

16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced.

Specified tire inflation pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires are subject to high loads (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temperatures).

Warning!

G

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

Hydroplaning

Depending on the depth of the water layer on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the road and apply brakes cautiously in the rain.

277

Operation


Tire traction

The safe speed on a wet, snow-covered or icy road is always lower than on a dry road.

You should pay particular attention to the condition of the road whenever the outside temperatures are close to the freezing point.

Warning!

G

If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will be substantially reduced. Under such weather conditions, drive, steer and brake with extreme caution.

Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately

1

/

6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the winter season to ensure normal balanced handling characteristics.

On packed snow, they can reduce your stopping distance as compared with summer tires.

Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.

!

Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is not covered by the


Tire speed rating

Regardless of the tire speed rating, local speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.

Warning!

G

Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.

Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others.

278

Operation


SLK 350

SLK 350 with Sport Package*

Your vehicle is factory equipped with

“W”-rated tires, which have a tire speed rating of 168 mph (270 km/h).

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of

155 mph (250 km/h).

SLK 55 AMG

Your vehicle is factory equipped with

“Y”-rated tires, which have a tire speed rating of 186 mph (300 km/h).

An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of

155 mph (250 km/h).

i

For information on speed rating for winter tires, see “Winter tires”

(

컄 page 327).

For additional general information on tire speed markings on tire sidewall, see “Tire speed rating” (

컄 page 313).

Winter driving instructions

The most important rule for slippery or icy roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt acceleration, braking and steering maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control system under such conditions.

When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, move gear selector lever* to position

N

or declutch in case of manual transmission.

Try to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.

i

For information on driving with snow chains, see “Snow chains”

(

컄 page 328).

Warning!

G

On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in order to obtain braking action. This could result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss.

279

Operation


Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal force may become necessary to produce the normal brake effect.

Depressing the brake pedal periodically when traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency back to normal.

If the vehicle is parked after being driven on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed.

Warning

G

Make sure not to endanger any other road users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.

Warning!

G

If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe and from around the vehicle with the engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter the vehicle interior, resulting in unconsciousness and death.

To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind.

Warning!

G

The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice.

Standing water

!

Do not drive through flooded areas or water of unknown depth. Before driving through water, determine its depth.

Never accelerate before driving into water. The bow wave could force water into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them.

If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from entering the passenger compartment or the engine compartment. Water in these areas could cause damage to electrical components or wiring of the engine or transmission, or could result in water being ingested by the engine through the air intake, causing severe internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the


For more information, see “Winter driving”

(

컄 page 327).

280

Operation


Passenger compartment Control and operation of radio transmitter

Warning!

G

COMAND*, radio and telephone*

Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.

In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around inside the vehicle, and cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items are securely fastened in the vehicle.

The trunk is the preferred place to carry objects.

Driving abroad

Abroad, there is an extensive

Mercedes-Benz service network at your disposal. If you plan to drive into areas which are not listed in the index of your

Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you should request pertinent information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Warning!

G

Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.

Only operate the COMAND*, radio or telephone

1

if road, traffic and weather conditions permit.




1

Observe all legal requirements

Telephones and two-way radios

Warning!

G

Never operate radio transmitters equipped with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna) from inside the vehicle while the engine is running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury.

Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit should only be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the outside of the vehicle.

Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.

281

Operation


Catalytic converter

Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with monolithic-type catalytic converters, an important element in conjunction with the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.

!

To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded gasoline in this vehicle.

Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation should be repaired promptly.

Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic converter, causing it to overheat and potentially start a fire.

Warning!

G

As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves can come into contact with the hot exhaust system, as these materials could be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.

Emission control

Certain engine systems serve to keep the toxic components of the exhaust gases within permissible limits required by law.

These systems, of course, will function properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should therefore only be carried out by qualified

Mercedes-Benz Center authorized technicians.

Engine adjustments should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be carried out regularly according to Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements. For details refer to the

Maintenance Booklet.

282

Operation


Warning!

G

Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.

Do not run the engine in confined areas

(such as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, have the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open at all times.

Coolant temperature

During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise to approx. 248°F

(120°C).

The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature over 248°F

(120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the


i

Excessive coolant temperature triggers a warning message in the multifunction display (

컄 page 357).

Warning!

G

앫

앫

Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids, which may have leaked into the engine compartment, to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.

Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.

Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

283

Operation


Refueling

Warning!

G

Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.

It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish all smoking materials. Never allow sparks, flame or smoking materials near gasoline!

Failure to remove the fuel cap slowly could result in personal injury.

The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand side of the vehicle towards the rear.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle with the remote control automatically locks and unlocks the fuel filler flap.

i

Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).

Information on gasoline quality can normally be found on the fuel pump.

For more information on gasoline, see

“Premium unleaded gasoline”

(

컄 page 425) or the Factory Approved

Service Products pamphlet.

1 To open fuel filler flap

2 To insert fuel filler cap

3 Supplemental tire inflation pressure information

284

Operation


왘

왘

왘


Open fuel filler flap by pushing at point indicated by arrow 1 .

The fuel filler flap springs open.

Turn fuel filler cap counterclockwise and hold on to it until possible pressure is released.

왘

Take off fuel filler cap and set it in direction of arrow 2 in the recess on the inside of fuel filler flap.

To prevent fuel vapors from escaping into open air, fully insert filler nozzle unit.

왘

Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit cuts out –

do not top up or overfill

.

Warning!

G

Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas discharge. This could cause the gas to spray back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury.

왘

Replace the fuel filler cap by turning it clockwise until it engages audibly.

왘

Close the fuel filler flap.

i

Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap open can cause the yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the

?

malfunction indicator lamp

(USA only) or the

± malfunction indicator lamp (Canada only) to illuminate.

For more information, see “Practical hints” (

컄 page 344).

Check regularly and before a long trip

Engine compartment (SLK 350, example)

1 Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system* reservoir

2 Brake fluid reservoir

3 Coolant expansion tank i

For opening the hood, see “Hood”

(

컄 page 287).

285

Operation


Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*

For information on refilling the reservoir, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” (

컄 page 295).

Brake fluid

!

If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the problem.

For more information, see “Practical hints” ( 컄 page 343).

Coolant

For normal replenishing, use water (potable water quality).

For more information on coolant, see

“Coolant” (

컄 page 293) and “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.” (

컄 page 422).

Vehicle lighting

Check function and cleanliness.

For more information on vehicle lighting, see “Replacing bulbs” (

컄 page 380).

For information on switching on the exterior lighting, see “Exterior lamp switch”

(

컄 page 106).

Engine oil level

For information on engine oil, see “Engine oil” (

컄 page 288).

Tire inflation pressure

For information on tire inflation pressure, see “Important notes on tire inflation pressure” (

컄 page 307).

For information on brake fluid, see “Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.” ( 컄 page 422).

286

Operation


왔


Hood

Warning!

G

Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be forced open by passing air flow.

Opening

The hood release is located on the driver side under the instrument panel.

왘

Pull hood lock release lever 1 in direction of arrow.

The hood is unlocked.

!

To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are folded forward away from the windshield.

왘

With the hood released, lift the hood by lifting it at the front edge.

The hood will be automatically held open at shoulder height by gas-filled struts.

Warning!

G

To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of moving parts when the hood is open and the engine is running. Make sure the hood is properly closed before driving. When closing the hood, use extreme caution not to catch hands or fingers.

The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay clear of fan blades.

컄컄

1 Hood lock release lever

2 Lever for opening the hood

왘

Push lever 2 release hood.

on the hood upward to

287

Operation


컄컄

Warning!

G

If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature display in the multifunction display indicates that the engine is overheated, do not open the hood. Move away from vehicle and do not open the hood until the engine has cooled down. If necessary, call the fire department.

Warning!

G

앫

앫

앫

The engine is equipped with a transistorized ignition system. Because of the high voltage it is dangerous to touch any components

(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic socket) of the ignition system with the engine running while starting the engine if ignition is “on” and the engine is turned manually

Closing Engine oil

Warning!

G

Be careful that you do not close the hood on anyone.

왘

Let the hood drop from a height of approximately 1 ft (30 cm).

The hood will lock audibly.

왘

Check to make sure the hood is fully closed.

If you can raise the hood at a point above the headlamps, then it is not properly closed. Open it again and let it drop with somewhat greater force.

앫

앫

The amount of oil your engine needs will depend on a number of factors, including driving style. Higher oil consumption can occur when the vehicle is new the vehicle is driven frequently at higher engine speeds

Engine oil consumption checks should only be made after the vehicle break-in period.

i

Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive assemblies. Using special additives not approved by Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered by the


More information on this subject is available at any authorized


288

Operation


Checking engine oil level with the control system, SLK 55 AMG

When checking the oil level

앫 the vehicle must be parked on level ground.

앫 with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least five minutes with the engine turned off.

앫 with the engine not at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 30 minutes with the engine turned off.

To check the engine oil level via the multifunction display, do the following:

왘


컄 page 35).

The standard display appears in the multifunction display (

컄 page 122).

왘

Press button k

or j

on the multifunction steering wheel repeatedly until the following message appears in the multifunction display (

컄 page 118):

One of the following messages will subsequently appear in the multifunction display:

앫

앫

Engine oil level ok

Add 1.0 qt.

(Canada:

1.0 liter

) to reach max. oil level

앫

앫

Add 1.5 qts.

(Canada:

1.5 liters ) to reach max. oil level

Add 2.0 qts.

(Canada:

2.0 liters

) to reach max. oil level i

If you want to interrupt the checking procedure, press button k

or j on the multifunction steering wheel

(

컄 page 118).

왘

If necessary, add engine oil.

For adding engine oil, see “Adding engine oil” (

컄 page 292).

For more information on engine oil, see

“Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.”

(

컄 page 422).

289

Operation


Other display messages

If the ignition is not switched on, the following message will appear:

Turn on ignition to see engine oil level

왘


컄 page 35).

If you see the message:

Observe waiting time

왘

If engine is at operating temperature, wait five minutes before repeating check procedure.

왘

If engine is not at operating temperature yet, you must wait 30 minutes before checking oil.

If you see the message:

Engine oil level

Not when engine on

왘

왘


If the engine is at operating temperature, wait five minutes before checking oil.

왘

If the engine is not at operating temperature yet, you must wait

30 minutes before checking oil.

i

If you want to interrupt the checking procedure, press button k

or j on the multifunction steering wheel

(

컄 page 118).

If there is excess engine oil with the engine at normal operating temperature, the following message will appear:

Engine oil level

Reduce oil level

왘

Have excess oil siphoned or drained off. Contact an authorized


!

Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.

For more information on messages in the display concerning engine oil, see the

“Practical hints” section ( 컄 page 348).

290

Operation


Checking engine oil level with the oil dipstick, SLK 350

When checking the oil level

앫 the vehicle must be parked on level ground.

앫 with the engine at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least five minutes with the engine turned off.

앫 with the engine not at operating temperature, the vehicle must have been stationary for at least 30 minutes with the engine turned off.

왘

왘

왘

왘

1 Oil dipstick

2 Upper (max) mark

3 Lower (min) mark

To check the engine oil level with the oil dipstick, do the following:

Open the hood (

컄 page 287).

Pull out oil dipstick 1 .

Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.

Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dipstick guide tube.

왘

Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after approximately three seconds to obtain accurate reading.

The oil level is correct when it is between the lower (min) mark 3 and upper (max) mark 2 of oil dipstick 1 .

i

The filling quantity between the upper and lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).

왘

If necessary, add engine oil.

For adding engine oil, see “Adding engine oil” (

컄 page 292).

For more information on engine oil, see

“Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.”

(

컄 page 422).

For more information on messages in the multifunction display concerning engine oil, see the “Practical hints” section

(

컄 page 348).

291

Operation


Adding engine oil

Only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS

(Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio, or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS

(Canada vehicles) will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz

Limited Warranty.

SLK 350

1 Filler cap

SLK 55 AMG

1 Filler cap

292

왘

왘

Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.

Add engine oil as required.

Be careful not to overfill with oil.

Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.

Avoid environmental damage caused by oil entering the ground or water.

!

Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off. It could cause damage to the engine and catalytic converter not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.

왘

Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.

For more information on engine oil, see the

“Technical data” section ( 컄 page 422) and

( 컄 page 424).

Operation


Transmission fluid level* Coolant level


The transmission fluid level does not need to be checked. If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the transmission.

The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check the coolant level, the vehicle must be parked on level ground and the engine must be cool.

Warning!

G

In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:

앫

Use extreme caution when opening the hood if there are any signs of steam or coolant leaking from the cooling system, or if the coolant temperature gauge indicates that the coolant is overheated.

앫

Do not remove pressure cap on coolant reservoir if coolant temperature is above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to cool down before removing cap. The coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and is under pressure.

앫

앫

Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately ½ turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.

Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.

293

Operation


The coolant expansion tank is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment.

SLK 350 (example)

1 Coolant expansion tank

2 Cap

3 Marking bar in the expansion tank

왘

Using a rag, turn cap 2 slowly approximately one half turn counterclockwise to release any excess pressure.

왘

Continue turning cap 2 counterclockwise and remove it.

The coolant level is correct if the level

앫

앫 for cold coolant: reaches marking bar 3 in expansion tank 1 for warm coolant: is approximately

0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher

왘

Add coolant as required.

왘

Replace and tighten cap 2 .

For more information on coolant, see

“Coolants” (

컄 page 426).

Battery

Your vehicle’s battery is located in the engine compartment.

The battery should always be sufficiently charged in order to achieve its rated service life. Refer to the Maintenance Booklet for battery maintenance intervals.

If you use your vehicle mostly for short-distance trips, you will need to have the battery charge checked more frequently.

When replacing the battery, always use batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.

If you do not intend to operate your vehicle for an extended period of time, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about steps you need to observe.

294

Operation


G

Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries.

A

D

Risk of explosion

Keep flames or sparks away from battery. Do not smoke.

B

Battery acid is caustic. Do not allow it to come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

In case it does, immediately flush affected area with clean water and seek medical help if necessary.

E

C

F

Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Follow the instructions in this

Operator's Manual.


The windshield washer reservoir is located on the passenger side of the engine compartment.

Batteries contain materials that can harm the environment if disposed of improperly.

Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.

SLK 350 (example)

1 Washer fluid reservoir cap

Fluid for the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied from the windshield washer reservoir. It has a capacity of approx. 7.4 US qt (7 l).

295

Operation


During all seasons, add MB Windshield

Washer Concentrate “S” to water. Premix the windshield washer fluid in a suitable container.

왘

Pull cap upward using latch until it opens.

왘

Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield

Washer Concentrate and water (or commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).

Always use washer solvent/antifreeze where temperatures may fall below freezing point. Failure to do so could result in damage to the washer system/reservoir.

왘

Push cap down until it engages.

Warning!

G

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned.

!

Only use washer fluid which is suitable for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.

For more information, see “Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system*” ( 컄 page 429).

296

Operation


왔


See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information on tested and recommended rims and tires for summer and winter operation. They can also offer advice concerning tire service and purchase.

Warning!

G

Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part. See an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are mounted:

앫

앫

The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged.

The operating clearance of the wheels and the tires may no longer be correct.

Warning!

G

Important guidelines

Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them.

When replacing rims, only use genuine

Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and may lead to an accident.

Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be recognized on retreads. Mercedes-Benz therefore cannot assure the operating safety of the vehicle when such tires are used.

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Only use sets of tires and rims of the same type and make.

Tires must be of the correct size for the rim.

Break in new tires for approximately

60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.

Regularly check the tires and rims for damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire inflation pressure loss or damage the tire beads.

If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire inflation pressure and correct as required.

Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under

1

/

8 in (3 mm).

When replacing individual tires, you should mount new tires on the front wheels first (on vehicles with same-sized wheels all around).

297

Operation


Tire care and maintenance

Warning!

G

Regularly check the tires for damage. Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose control of your vehicle.

Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have sustained damage, replace them.

Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month. For more information on checking tire inflation pressure, see “Recommended tire inflation pressure” (

컄 page 306).

Tire inspection

Every time you check your tire inflation pressure, you should also inspect your tires for the following:

앫

앫 excessive treadwear (

컄 page 299) cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber

앫 bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the tread or side of the tire

Replace the tire if you find any of the above conditions.

Make sure you also inspect the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation.

Spare tires will age and become worn over time even if never used, and thus should be inspected and replaced when necessary.

앫

앫

앫

Life of tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to:

Driving style

Tire inflation pressure

Distance driven

Warning!

G

Tires and spare tire should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining tread.

298

Operation


Tread depth

Do not allow your tires to wear down too far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply reduced at tread depths under

1 ⁄

8 in (3 mm).

Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law. These indicators are located in six places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately

1

/

16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is considered worn and should be replaced.

Recommended minimum tire tread depth:

앫

앫

Summer tires

1

/

8 in (3 mm)

Winter tires

1

/

6 in (4 mm)

Warning!

G

Although the applicable federal motor safety laws consider a tire to be worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately

1

/

16 in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As tread depth approaches

1

/

8 in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.

Depending upon the weather and/or road surface (conditions), the tire traction varies widely.

1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)

The treadwear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread.

Storing tires

!

Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and gasoline.

Cleaning tires

!

Never use a round nozzle to power wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.

Always replace a damaged tire.

299

Operation


Direction of rotation

Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must make sure the tires rotate in the direction specified.

An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation (spinning) of the tire.

i

Spare wheels may be mounted against the direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidirectional tire for temporary use only until the regular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced. Always observe and follow applicable temporary use restrictions and speed limitations indicated on the spare wheel.

Loading the vehicle

Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly carry.

앫

The Tire and Loading Information placard (Example A) or the Vehicle Tire

Information placard (Example B) can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar. This placard tells you important information about the number of people that can be in the vehicle and the total weight that can be carried in the vehicle. It also contains information on the proper size and recommended tire inflation pressures for the original equipment tires on your vehicle.

앫

The Certification label, also found on the driver’s door B-pillar tells you about the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. The Certification label also tells you about the front and rear axle weight capacity, called the Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is the total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear).

Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for either the front axle or rear axle.

300

Operation


Tire and Loading Information

Placard (Example A)

Warning!

G

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure.

1 Driver’s door B-pillar

Following is a discussion on how to work with the information contained on the two placards with regards to loading your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with either the

Tire and Loading Information placard

(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B). i

Data shown on placard examples is for illustration purposes only. Load limit data is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.

1 Load limit information on the Tire and

Loading Information placard

The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.

If your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and

Loading Information placard (Example A), locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.” on this placard. The combined weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced in that statement.

301

Operation


Placard (Example B)

1 Load limit information on the Vehicle

Tire Information placard

The placard showing the load limit information is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.

If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle

Tire Information placard (Example B), locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity

Weight” on this placard. The combined weight of all occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue (if applicable) should never exceed the weight listed next to vehicle capacity weight.

Seating capacity

The seating capacity gives you important information on the number of occupants that can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear seating capacity. Your vehicle is equipped with either placard Example A or placard Example B located on the driver’s door B-pillar (

컄 page 301).

i

Data shown on placard examples is for illustration purposes only. Seating data is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.

Placard (Example A)

1 Seating capacity

Placard (Example B)

1 Seating capacity

302

Operation


Steps for determining correct load limit

The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title

49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part

575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and

Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.

Step 1

(Vehicles equipped with placard

Example A)

왘

Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

Step 1

(Vehicles equipped with placard

Example B)

왘

Locate the heading “Vehicle Capacity

Weight” on your vehicle’s placard.

Step 2

왘

Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

Step 3

왘

Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.

Step 4

왘

The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400-750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs.)

Step 5

왘

Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.

Step 6

(if applicable)

왘

If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle (

컄 page 305).

The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants.

The following examples use a load limit of 1500 lbs.

This is for illustration purposes only

. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on the vehicle’s placard (

컄 page 301).

303

Operation


2

3

Example Combined weight limit of occupants and cargo from placard

Number of occupants

(driver and passengers)

Seating configuration

1

1500 lbs 2 2

Occupants weight Combined weight of all occupants

Available cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (total load limit or vehicle capacity weight from placard minus combined weight of all occupants)

1500 lbs - 330 lbs = 1170 lbs

1500 lbs

1500 lbs

1

1

1

1

Occupant 1: 150 lbs

Occupant 2: 180 lbs

330 lbs

Occupant 1: 200 lbs 200 lbs

Occupant 1: 150 lbs 150 lbs

1500 lbs - 200 lbs = 1300 lbs

1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs

The higher the weight of all occupants, the less cargo and luggage load capacity is available.

For more information, see “Trailer tongue load” (

컄 page 305).

304

Operation


Certification label

Even after careful determination of the combined weight of all occupants, cargo and the trailer tongue load (if applicable)

(

컄 page 305) as to not exceed the permissible load limit, you must make sure that your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle. You can obtain the

GVWR and GAWR from the Certification label. The Certification Label can be found on the driver’s door B-pillar (

컄 page 301).

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all cargo, and the trailer tongue load

(

컄 page 305) must never exceed the

GVWR.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear).

To assure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible weight limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle), have the loaded vehicle (including driver, passengers and all cargo and, if applicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable commercial scale.

Trailer tongue load

The tongue load of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is towed, the tongue load must be added to the weight of all occupants riding and any cargo you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue load typically is ten percent of the trailer weight and everything loaded in it.

Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed primarily to carry passengers and their cargo. Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer towing with your vehicle.

305

Operation


Recommended tire inflation pressure

Warning!

G

Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.

Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation

(blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.

Your vehicle is equipped with either the

Tire and Loading Information placard

(Example A) or the Vehicle Tire Information placard (Example B) located on the driver’s door B-pillar (

컄 page 301).

The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than one mile (1.6 km).

Follow recommended cold tire inflation pressures listed on placard.

Keeping the tires properly inflated provides the best handling, tread life and riding comfort.

In addition to the tire placard on the driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel filler flap for any additional information pertaining to special driving situations. For more information, see “Important notes on tire inflation pressure” (

컄 page 307).

i

Data shown on placard examples is for illustration purposes only. Tire data is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in the illustrations below. Refer to placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.

Placard (Example A)

1 Tire and Loading Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures

Placard (Example A) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment.

306

Operation


Placard (Example B) Important notes on tire inflation pressure

Warning!

G

If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly drops:

앫

앫

Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects.

Check to see whether air is leaking from the valves or from around the rim.

1 Vehicle Tire Information placard with recommended cold tire inflation pressures

Placard (Example B) lists the recommended cold tire inflation pressures for maximum loaded vehicle weight. The tire inflation pressures listed apply to the tires installed as original equipment.

i

Placard (Example B) may list recommended cold tire inflation pressures for different vehicle loads.

Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure are also increased while driving, depending on the driving speed and the tire load.

If you will be driving your vehicle at high speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, where it is legal and conditions allow, consult the placard on the inside of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can build up and result in sudden tire failure.

Be sure to readjust the tire inflation pressure for normal driving speeds. You should wait until the tires are cold before adjusting the tire inflation pressure.

Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure information for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Tire inflation pressure changes by approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind when checking tire inflation pressure where the temperature is different from the outside temperature.

307

Operation


Checking tire inflation pressure

Regularly check your tire inflation pressure at least once a month.

Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure when the tires are cold. The tires can be considered cold if the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than one mile (1.6 km).

If you check the tire inflation pressure when the tires are warm (the vehicle has been driven for several miles or sitting less than three hours), the reading will be approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to match the specified cold tire inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be underinflated.

Checking tire inflation pressure manually

Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure:

왘

Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.

왘

Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.

왘

Read tire inflation pressure on tire gauge and check against the recommended tire inflation pressure on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar

(

컄 page 306). If necessary, add air to achieve the recommended tire inflation pressure.

i

If you have overfilled the tire, release tire inflation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge.

왘

왘

Install the valve cap.

Repeat this procedure for each tire.

Run Flat Indicator*

While the vehicle is being driven, the Run

Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rotational speed. This allows the system to detect a significant loss of pressure in a tire.

If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due to falling tire inflation pressure, you will see a corresponding warning message in the multifunction display.

앫

앫

The Run Flat Indicator may function in a restricted manner or with a delay if:

앫 snow chains are mounted to the vehicle winter road conditions prevail you are driving on a loose surface (e.g. sand or gravel)

앫 you are driving in a very sporty manner

(involving rapid acceleration or high speeds in curves)

308

Warning!

G

When the multifunction display shows the message

Low pressure mode Check tires max. Speed 50 mph

, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper tire inflation pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Each tire, including the spare, should be checked monthly when cold and set to the recommended tire inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle placard and owner’s manual.

Operation


i

The recommended tire inflation pressures for your vehicle can be found on the tire placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar (

컄 page 301). The tire inflation pressures are not listed in the owner’s manual.

Warning!

G

The Run Flat Indicator does not indicate a warning for wrongly selected tire inflation pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pressure according to the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or fuel filler flap.

The Run Flat Indicator does not replace regular checks of the tire inflation pressures since a gradual pressure loss in all four tires cannot be detected by the Run Flat

Indicator.

The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering maneuvers.

309

Operation


Warning!

G

Follow recommend tire inflation pressures.




Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.

앫

앫

Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator

The tire inflation pressure monitor must be reactivated in the following situations:

앫

If you have changed the tire inflation pressure

If you have replaced the wheels or tires

If you have installed new wheels or tires

왘

Using the tire placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if available, the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.

왘

왘

왘


컄 page 35).

The standard display menu appears in the multifunction display (

컄 page 122)

Press button k or j

repeatedly until the following message appears in the multifunction display:

Run Flat Indicator active

Reactivation poss.: +

Press button

æ

.

The following message will appear in the multifunction display:

Tire pres. now

OK?

Warning!

G

The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in a reliable manner if you have set the correct tire inflation pressures for each tire.

If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set, the system will monitor the pressure according to the incorrect value.

310

Operation


If you wish to confirm activation:

왘

Press button

æ

.

The following message will appear in the multifunction display:

Run Flat Indicator reactivated

After a certain “learning phase”, the Run

Flat Indicator checks the set pressure values for all four tires.

If you wish to cancel activation:

왘

Press button

ç

.

or

왘

Wait until the message

Tire pres. now

OK?

disappears.

Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires

앫

앫

앫

Underinflated tire inflation pressure

Underinflated tires can: cause excessive and uneven tire wear adversely affect fuel economy

앫 lead to tire failure from being overheated adversely affect handling characteristics

앫

앫

앫

앫

Overinflated tire inflation pressure

Overinflated tires can:

앫 adversely affect handling characteristics cause uneven tire wear be more prone to damage from road hazards adversely affect ride comfort increase stopping distance

Warning!

G



Warning!

G




311

Operation


MO

Extended

system*

The MO

Extended

system allows you to continue driving your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires.

You may only use the MO

Extended

system in conjunction with the Run Flat Indicator*.

!

The maximum distance in emergency mode depends on the vehicle’s load. It is 30 miles (50 km) if the vehicle is partially loaded and 18 miles (30 km) if the vehicle is fully loaded.

The point at which the maximum driving distance begins in emergency mode is when the warning message appears in the multifunction display indicating that there is a loss of tire inflation pressure.

Do not exceed the maximum speed of

50 mph (80 km/h).

Warning!

G

In emergency mode, your vehicle’s driving characteristics are diminished in such situations as:

앫

앫

앫 driving around curves while braking while accelerating rapidly

Therefore, your driving style must be adapted accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, as well as driving over obstacles (road curbs, potholes, or off-road areas). This is especially important if the vehicle is heavily loaded.

The emergency driving distance that can be achieved greatly depends on the demands placed on the vehicle. Depending on speed, load, driving maneuvers, road conditions, outside temperature, etc., the distance can be significantly shorter or, if the vehicle is driven cautiously, somewhat longer.

Do not continue driving in emergency mode if

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫 you notice knocking sounds the vehicle starts to shake smoke develops and you smell rubber

ESP is intervening continuously you notice tears on the tire sidewalls

After driving in emergency mode, you must have the rims inspected by an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center to check if they are suitable for further use. The failed tire must be replaced in any case.

i

When replacing individual or all tires on the vehicle, make sure only tires marked with “MO

Extended

” are mounted in the size specified for your vehicle

(

컄 page 413).

312

Operation


Tire labeling

Besides tire name (sales designation) and manufacturer name, a number of markings can be found on a tire.

Following are some explanations for the markings on your vehicle’s tires:

1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards

(

컄 page 320)

2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

(

컄 page 318)

3 Maximum tire load (

컄 page 319)

4 Maximum tire inflation pressure

(

컄 page 320)

5 Manufacturer

6 Tire ply material (

컄 page 322)

7 Tire size designation, load and speed rating (

컄 page 313)

8 Load identification (

컄 page 317)

9 Tire name i

For illustration purposes only. Actual data on tires is specific to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in above illustration.

For more information, see “Rims and tires” (

컄 page 413).

Tire size designation, load and speed rating

1 Tire width

2 Aspect ratio in %

3 Radial tire code

4 Rim diameter

5 Tire load rating

6 Tire speed rating i


313

Operation


General:

Depending on the design standards used, the tire size molded into the sidewall may have no letter or a letter preceding the tire size designation.

No letter preceding the size designation

(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire based on European design standards.

Letter “P” preceding the size designation:

Passenger car tire based on U.S. design standards.

Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:

Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards.

Letter “T” preceding the size designation:

Temporary spare tires which are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only.

Tire width

The tire width 1 (

컄 page 313) indicates the nominal tire width in mm.

Aspect ratio

The aspect ratio 2 (

컄 page 313) is the dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width and is expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing section height by section width.

Tire code

The tire code 3 (

컄 page 313) indicates the tire construction type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diagonal or bias ply construction; letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction.

At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire with a speed capability above 149 mph

(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).

For additional information, see “Tire speed rating” (

컄 page 315).

Rim diameter

The rim diameter 4 (

컄 page 313) is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).

Tire load rating

The tire load rating 5 (

컄 page 313) is a numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support.

For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs

(615 kg) the tire is designed to support.

See also “Maximum tire load”

(

컄 page 319) where the maximum load associated with the load index is indicated in kilograms and lbs.

314

Operation


Warning

G

The tire load rating must always be at least half of the GAWR (

컄 page 323) of your vehicle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result which may cause an accident and/or serious personal injury to you or others.

Always replace rims and tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the original part.

Warning!

G

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure.

For additional information on tire load rating, see “Load identification”

(

컄 page 317).

i

Tire load rating 5 (

컄 page 313) and

Tire speed rating 6 (

컄 page 313) are also referred to as “service description”.

Tire speed rating

The tire speed rating 6 (

컄 page 313) indicates the approved maximum speed for the tire.

Warning!

G

Even when permitted by law, never operate a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.

Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or personal injury and possible death, for you and for others.

i

Tire load rating 5 (

컄 page 313) and

Tire speed rating 6 (

컄 page 313) are also referred to as “service description”.

315

Operation


Summer tires

Y

(Y)

ZR

T

H

V

W

R

S

Index

Q

Speed rating

up to 100 mph (160 km/h) up to 106 mph (170 km/h) up to 112 mph (180 km/h) up to 118 mph (190 km/h) up to 130 mph (210 km/h) up to 149 mph (240 km/h) up to 168 mph (270 km/h) up to 186 mph (300 km/h) above 186 mph (300 km/h) above 149 mph (240 km/h)

앫

At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire with a speed capability above

149 mph (240 km/h) can include a

“ZR” in the size designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the maximum speed capability of the tire, the service description for the tire must be referred to.

The service description is comprised of the tire load rating 5 (

컄 page 313) and the tire speed rating 6

(

컄 page 313).

If your tire includes “ZR” in the size designation and no service description 5 and 6 (

컄 page 313) is given, the tire manufacturer must be consulted for the maximum speed capability.

If a service description 5 and 6

(

컄 page 313) is given, the speed capability is limited by the speed symbol in the service description.

Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.

In this example, “97Y” is the service description. The letter “Y” designates the speed rating and the speed capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph

(300 km/h).

앫

Any tire with a speed capability above

186 mph (300 km/h) must include a

“ZR” in the size designation AND the service description must be placed in parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18

(99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in parenthesis designates the maximum speed capability of the tire as being above

186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual maximum permissible speed of the tire.

316

Operation


All-season and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S up to 149 mph (240 km/h) i

The marking “M+S” next to the service description designates tires with mud and snow capabilities.

Load identification

1 Load identification i


In addition to tire load rating, special load information may be molded into the tire sidewall following the letter designating the tire speed rating 1 (

컄 page 317).

No specification given: absence of any text

(like in above example) indicates a standard load (SL) tire.

XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load

(or reinforced) tire.

Light Load: designates a light load tire.

C, D, E: designates load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure.

317

Operation


DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

U.S. tire regulations require each new tire manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a

TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchasers the means to easily identify such tires.

The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date of manufacture”.

1 DOT

2 Manufacturer’s identification mark

3 Tire size

4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire manufacturer)

5 Date of manufacture i


DOT (Department of Transportation)

A tire branding symbol 1 (

컄 page 318) which denotes the tire meets requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation.

Manufacturer’s identification mark

The manufacturer’s identification mark 2

(

컄 page 318) denotes the tire manufacturer.

New tires have a mark with two symbols.

Retreaded tires have a mark with four symbols. For more information on retreaded tires, see (

컄 page 297).

Tire size

The code 3 (

컄 page 318) indicates the tire size.

318

Operation


Tire type code

The code 4 (

컄 page 318) may, at the option of the manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code for identifying significant characteristics of the tire.

Maximum tire load

Date of manufacture

The date of manufacture 5 (

컄 page 318) identifies the week and year of manufacture.

The first two figures identify the week, starting with “01” to represent the first full week of the calendar year. The second two figures represent the year.

For example, “3202” represents the 32nd week of 2002.

1 Maximum tire load rating i


Warning!

G

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit or vehicle capacity weight as indicated on the placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires can overheat them, possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also result in handling or steering problems, or brake failure.

For more information on tire load rating

(

컄 page 314).

For information on calculating total and cargo load capacities (

컄 page 303).

The maximum tire load is the maximum weight the tires are designed to support.

319

Operation


Maximum tire inflation pressure

1 Maximum permissible tire inflation pressure i


This is the maximum permissible tire inflation pressure for the tire.

Always follow the recommended tire inflation pressure (

컄 page 306) for proper tire inflation.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

(U.S. vehicles)

Warning!

G

Never exceed the max. tire inflation pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.




Tire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear, traction and temperature resistance.

1 Treadwear

2 Traction

3 Temperature resistance i


320

Operation


Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear Traction

200 AA

Temperature

A

All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1

1

/

2

) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning!

G

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

321

Operation


Temperature

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

Warning!

G

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possible tire failure.

Tire ply material

1 Plies in sidewall

2 Plies under tread i


This marking tells you about the type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

322

Operation


Tire and loading terminology

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not).

Bar

Another metric unit for air pressure. There are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.

Bead

The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Air pressure

The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire.

Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or bars.

Cold tire inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than one mile (1.6 km).

Aspect ratio

Dimensional relationship between tire section height and section width expressed in percentage.

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and additional optional equipment, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT (Department of Transportation)

A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire meets requirements of the

U.S. Department of Transportation.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle must never exceed the GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers and cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue load. The GWV must never exceed the

GWVR indicated on the certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.

323

Operation


GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all options, passengers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue load). It is indicated on certification label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.

Kilopascal (kPa)

The metric unit for air pressure. There are

6.9 kPa to one psi; another metric unit for air pressure is bars. There are

100 kilopascals (kPa) to one bar.

Maximum load rating

The maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity weight and production options weight.


This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under normal driving conditions.

PSI (Pounds per square inch)

A standard unit of measure for air pressure

-> bar, kilopascal (kPa).

Normal occupant weight

The number of occupants the vehicle is designed to seat, multiplied by

68 kilograms (150 lbs).


Recommended tire inflation pressure listed on placard located on driver’s door

B-pillar for normal driving conditions.

Provides best handling, tread life and riding comfort.

Occupant distribution

The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their designated seating positions.

Rim

A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated.

Production options weight

The combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over

5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.

Sidewall

The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.

324

Operation


TIN (Tire Identification Number)

Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in recall situations or other safety matters concerning tires and gives purchases the means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date of manufacture”.

Tire load rating

Numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can support.


Part of tire designation; indicates the speed range for which a tire is approved.

Traction

Force exerted by the vehicle on the road via the tires. The amount of grip provided.

Tread

The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

Tire ply composition and material used

This indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

Treadwear indicators

Narrow bands, sometimes called

“wear bars” that show across the tread of a tire when only

1

/

6 in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.


A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle capacity weight

Rated cargo and luggage load plus

68 kilograms (150 lbs) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity.

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing it by two.

325

Operation


Rotating tires

Warning!

G

Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires are of the same dimension.

If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible.

Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles with tires of the same dimension all around. If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the same dimension all around, tires can be rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation pattern that will maintain the intended rotation (spinning) direction of the tire (

컄 page 300).

In some cases, such as when your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not possible.

If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configuration, tires can be rotated according to the tire manufacturer’s recommended intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty pamphlet located in your vehicle literature portfolio. If none is available, tires should be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles

(5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of tire wear.

The same rotation (spinning) direction must be maintained (

컄 page 300).

Rotate tires before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear on front tires and tread center wear on rear tires).

Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.

Check for and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.

Warning!

G

Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. Wheels could become loose if not tightened with a torque of

80 lb-ft (110 Nm).

Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.

For information on wheel change, see the

“Practical hints” section (

컄 page 369) and

(

컄 page 388).

326

Operation

Winter driving

왔

Winter driving

Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center. This service includes:

앫

Checking anticorrosion and antifreeze concentration.

앫

앫

Adding of cleaning concentrate to the water of the windshield and headlamp cleaning* system. Add

MB Concentrate “S” to a pre-mixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze which is formulated for temperatures below freezing point (

컄 page 429).

Battery test. Battery capacity drops with decreasing ambient temperature.

A well charged battery helps to make sure the engine can be started, even at low ambient temperatures.

앫

Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth of approximately

1

/

6 in (4.0 mm) on all four wheels for the winter season.

!

When scraping ice or snow from the rear window, be careful not to damage the sealing strip or apertures along the side of the window.

Winter tires

Always use winter tires at temperatures below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry road conditions prevail. Using winter tires is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS and ESP in winter operation.

For safe handling, make sure all mounted winter tires are of the same make and have the same tread design.

Warning!

G

Winter tires with a tread depth under

1

/

6

in

(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter operation.

Always observe the speed rating of the winter tires mounted to your vehicle. If the maximum speed for which your tires are rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect where it will be seen by the driver. Such notices are available at your tire dealer or any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

327

Operation

Winter driving

Warning!

G

If you use your spare tire when winter tires are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that the difference in tire characteristics may very well impair turning stability and that overall driving stability may be reduced.

Adapt your driving style accordingly.

Have the spare tire replaced with a winter tire at the nearest authorized


Snow chains

Snow chains should only be driven on snow-covered roads at speeds not higher than 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon as possible when driving on roads without snow.

i

When driving with snow chains, you may wish to deactivate the ESP

(

컄 page 83) before setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve the vehicle’s traction.

Please observe the following guidelines when using snow chains:

앫

Use of snow chains is not permissible with all wheel/tire combinations.

앫

앫

앫

Snow chains should only be used on the rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s mounting instructions.

Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to advise you on this subject.

Use of snow chains may be prohibited depending on location. Always check local and state laws before installing snow chains.

앫

앫

!

Use of snow chains is not permissible with the collapsible tire, MO

Extended

tires in general, and with the following tire sizes:

245/40 R17

245/35 ZR18 92Y XL (Extra Load)

328

Operation

Maintenance

왔

Maintenance

In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining, and caring for your vehicle.

We strongly recommend that you have your vehicle serviced by an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center, in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet at the times called for by the maintenance service indicator display.

Failure to have the vehicle maintained in accordance with the Maintenance Booklet and maintenance service indicator at the designated times/mileage will result in vehicle damage not covered by the


The maintenance service indicator will notify you when your next maintenance service is due.

Starting approximately one month before maintenance service is due, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you switch on the ignition (example service A):

Service A in XXXXX miles (km)

Service A in XXX days

Service A in X day

Carry out service A

The maintenance services will be indicated by showing a service type A through type H in the multifunction display.

Types A through H are classified based on estimated time needed to perform the maintenance service, ranging: from Service A

(approx. one hour) to Service H

(approx. eight hours)

When the service type appears, you can use the vehicle’s control system to view a list of service items (1-13) that need to be performed at the called for maintenance service type (

컄 page 333).

i

Vehicles equipped with FSS (Flexible

Service System) only (Canada vehicles): The interval between maintenance services depends on your driving habits. A gentle driving style, moderate engine speeds and the avoidance of short-distance trips will lengthen the interval between maintenance services.

329

Operation

Maintenance

Clearing the maintenance service indicator

The maintenance service indicator is automatically cleared after 30 seconds.

You can also clear it yourself.

왘

Press reset button

J

(

컄 page 24) for clearing the maintenance service indicator.

The maintenance service indicator is cleared and the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display

(

컄 page 122).

Maintenance service term exceeded Calling up the maintenance service indicator

If you have exceeded the suggested maintenance service term, you will see the following message in the multifunction display:

Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles (km)

Service A exceeded by XXX days

Service A exceeded by X day

In addition, a signal sounds when the message appears.

Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will reset the maintenance service indicator following a completed maintenance service.

왘

왘


컄 page 35).


컄 page 122).

Press button j or k

repeatedly on the multifunction steering wheel until the maintenance service indicator

9

appears in the multifunction display (

컄 page 118).

i

If the battery is disconnected, the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the maintenance service indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance service deadline, you will need to subtract these days from the days shown in the maintenance service indicator.

Do not confuse the maintenance service indicator with the engine oil level indicator

:

.

330

Resetting the maintenance service indicator

In the event that the maintenance service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the maintenance service indicator reset. The automotive maintenance facility carrying out the maintenance service will find the information for resetting the maintenance service indicator in the maintenance-relevant information for your vehicle. Such information is available from either your authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz.

Operation

Maintenance

i

If the maintenance service indicator was inadvertently reset, have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.

Only reset if the proper maintenance service has been performed. Resetting the system without performing the proper maintenance service as called for by the maintenance service indicator will result in engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Setting the date for special works

You can enter appointments for exhaust gas analysis and general inspection using the maintenance system.

왘


컄 page 35).

왘


컄 page 122).

Press button j or k


9


컄 page 118).

왘


J

(

컄 page 24) for about five seconds.

The

Service menu


컄컄

331

Operation

Maintenance

컄컄 왘

왘

Select the Addit. work menu with button

+ or

-

.

Press button

ÿ

.

The maintenance service indicator now displays the Addit. work menu.

왘

Press button

ÿ

.

The maintenance service indicator now displays the

Next due date

menu.

왘

Press button

è

repeatedly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display (

컄 page 122).

The maintenance system now recalculates the values. You cannot call up the maintenance service indicator or the service menu during this time.

왘 Select the

Exh.-gasanalysis or

General Inspection

menu with button

+ or

-

.

왘

왘

Select Month: a nd Year: with button

+ or

-

.

Press button k or j

for setting month and year.

왘

왘

Select Confirm with button

+ or

-

.

Press button

ÿ

.

The new date is set.

332

Operation

Maintenance

Calling up the maintenance service data information

The maintenance service indicator shows the maintenance service type (letters A H ) in the multifunction display approximately one month before the maintenance service appointment is due in miles or km (distance criterion) or in days (time criterion).

This maintenance service type is based on the maintenance service items to be carried out. The maintenance service items are described in the Maintenance Booklet.

The maintenance service items to be carried out under the corresponding maintenance service type can be displayed in the multifunction display.

Calling up the service item menu

왘


컄 page 35).

왘

Make sure the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display

(

컄 page 122).

Press button j or k


9


컄 page 118).

왘


J

(

컄 page 24) for about five seconds.

The

Service menu


왘

Select the Items menu with button

+ or

-

.

왘

Press button

ÿ

.

The maintenance service indicator now displays the

Items menu.

i

The maintenance service items to be carried out are shown in this menu.

Please refer to the Maintenance Booklet for a description of each maintenance service item.

왘

Press button

è

repeatedly until the standard display menu appears in the multifunction display (

컄 page 122).

333

Operation

Vehicle care

Cleaning and care of vehicle

Warning!

G

Many cleaning products can be hazardous.

Some are poisonous, others are flammable.

Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the inside.

Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle.

While in operation, even while parked, your vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the undercarriage and cause lasting damage.

앫

앫

앫

앫

Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but also by:

Air pollution

Road salt

Tar

Gravel and stone chipping

To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Grease and oil

Fuel

Coolant

Brake fluid

Bird droppings

Insects

Tree resins, etc.

Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of the above adverse influences.

앫

앫

More frequent washings are necessary to deal with unfavorable conditions: near the ocean in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust emissions)

앫 during winter operation

You should check your vehicle from time to time for stone chipping or other damage.

Any damage should be repaired as soon as possible to prevent corrosion.

In doing so, do not neglect the undercarriage of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the undercarriage followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated.

334

Operation

Vehicle care

Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body cavities which will last for the lifetime of the vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither necessary nor recommended by

Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility of incompatibility between materials used in the production process and others applied later.

We have selected car-care products and compiled recommendations which are specially matched to our vehicles and which always reflect the latest technology.

You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products at an authorized


Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or damage due to negligent or incorrect care cannot always be removed or repaired with the car-care products recommended here.

In such cases it is best to seek aid at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The following topics deal with the cleaning and care of your vehicle and give important

“how-to” information as well as references to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products.

Power washer

When using a power washer for cleaning the vehicle, always observe manufacturer’s operating instructions.

!

Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires. The intense jet of water can result in damage to the tire.

Always replace a damaged tire.

Always keep the jet of water moving across the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber parts.

Tar stains

Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and become more difficult to remove. A tar remover is recommended.

335

Operation

Vehicle care

Paintwork, painted body components

Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should be applied when water drops on the paint surface do not “bead up”, normally every three to five months, depending on climate and washing detergent used.

Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner should be applied if the paint surface shows signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss).

Do not apply any of these products or wax if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood is still hot.

Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for quick and provisional repairs of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle doors, etc.).

Engine cleaning

Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from the intrusion of water and cleaning agents.

Corrosion protection, such as

MB Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the engine compartment after every engine cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax.

Vehicle washing

Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle in direct sunlight. Only use a mild car wash detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.

Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak spray towards the ventilation intake. Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge and chamois frequently.

Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the finish.

Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle through an automatic car wash to prevent damage to the mirrors.

336

Operation

Vehicle care

To prevent damage to the antenna, unscrew and remove antenna on left rear side of vehicle before taking the vehicle through a car wash. Note that without the antenna on the left rear side of the vehicle installed, the signaling range of the

SmartKey is considerably reduced. Hold the SmartKey in close proximity towards the antenna base when locking and unlocking the vehicle.

In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of road salt as soon as possible.

When washing the undercarriage, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.

Ornamental moldings

For regular cleaning and care of very dirty chrome-plated parts, use a chrome cleaner.

Headlamps, side makers, tail lamps, turn signal lenses

Use a mild car wash detergent, such as

Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water.

To prevent scratches, never apply strong force and use only a soft, non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth or sponge.

Wiper blades

!

The windshield wipers must be in a vertical position before folding them away from the windshield. They could otherwise damage the hood.

왘 Switch on wipers and place them in a vertical position.

For information on placing the wipers in a vertical position, see “Replacing wiper blades” (

컄 page 386).

컄컄

337

Operation

Vehicle care

컄컄

Warning!

G

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch before cleaning the wiper blades. Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury.

Window cleaning

!

The windshield wipers must be in a vertical position before folding them away from the windshield. They could otherwise damage the hood.

왘

Clean the wiper blade inserts with a clean cloth and detergent solution.

!

Fold the windshield wipers back onto the windshield before turning the


Hold on to the wiper when folding the windshield wiper back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.

왘 Switch on wipers and place them in a vertical position.

For information on placing the wipers in a vertical position, see “Replacing wiper blades” (

컄 page 386).

Warning!

G

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch before cleaning the wiper blade. Otherwise, the wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury.

왘

Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces.

An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.

!

Fold the windshield wipers back onto the windshield before turning the


Hold on to the wiper when folding the windshield wiper back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.

!

Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto the windshield before turning the


Hold onto the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.

338

Operation

Vehicle care

Rear window cleaning

Clean the rear window with the hardtop fully raised and closed.

Warning!

G

Do not clean the rear window with the hardtop in a position other than the fully raised and closed position. Otherwise, the hardtop may move unexpectedly which may result in personal injury to you or others.

왘

Use a window cleaning solution on all glass surfaces.

An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.

Light alloy wheels

Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care should be used for regular cleaning of the light alloy wheels.

If possible, clean wheels once a week with

Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of water.

Follow instructions on container.

i

Only use acid-free cleaning materials.

Acid may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat.


Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use scouring agents.

Steering wheel and gearshift/gear selector lever

Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved

Leather Care.

Cup holder

Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use scouring agents.

339

Operation

Vehicle care

Hard plastic trim items

Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior

Care onto a soft lint-free cloth and apply with light pressure.

Headliner

Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive dirt.

Seat belts

The webbing must not be treated with chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear, lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the webbing at temperatures above 176°F

(80°C) or in direct sunlight.

Upholstery

Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing clothing that have the tendency to give off coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will be prevented.

Plastic and rubber parts

Do not use oil or wax on these parts.

Wood trims

Dampen cloth using water and use damp cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.

Do not use solvents like tar remover or wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these may be abrasive.

Leather upholstery

Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with

Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.

Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not become wet.

Warning!

G


340

Practical hints

What to do if …

Where will I find...?

Unlocking/locking in an emergency

Opening/closing in an emergency

Replacing SmartKey batteries

Replacing bulbs

Replacing wiper blades

Flat tire

Battery

Jump starting

Towing the vehicle

Fuses

341

Practical hints


Lamps in instrument cluster

General information:

If any of the following lamps in the instrument cluster fails to come on during the bulb self-check when switching on ignition

(

컄 page 35), have the respective bulb checked and replaced if necessary.

Problem

-

The yellow ABS indicator lamp comes on while driving.

Possible cause

The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off. The BAS and

ESP are also switched off (see messages in display).

Suggested solution

왘

Continue driving with added caution.

Wheels may lock during hard braking, reducing steering capability.

The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.

왘

왘

Read and observe the messages in the display (

컄 page 348).

Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as the automatic transmission* may also be malfunctioning.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an accident.

The charging voltage has fallen below

10 volts and the ABS has switched off.

왘

Switch off electrical consumers that are currently not needed, e.g. seat heating*.

The battery might not be charged sufficiently.

왘

If necessary, have the generator and battery checked.

When the voltage is above this value again, the ABS is operational again.

342

Practical hints


Problem

;

(USA only)

3

(Canada only)

Possible cause Suggested solution

The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving and you hear a warning sound.

You are driving with the parking brake set.

왘

(

Release the parking brake

컄 page 49).

The red brake warning lamp comes on while driving.

There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.

왘

Risk of accident! Carefully stop the vehicle and notify an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

Warning!

G

Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately if the brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.

!

If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.

343

Practical hints


Problem

?

(USA only)

±

(Canada only)

Possible cause

The yellow engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving.

There is a malfunction in:

앫

앫 the fuel management system the ignition system

앫 the emission control system

앫 systems which affect emissions

Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and may switch the engine to its limp-home

(emergency operation) mode.

Your fuel tank is empty.

왘


왘

Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

An on-board diagnostic connector is used by the service station to link the vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through the readout of diagnostic trouble codes. It is located in the front left area of the footwell near the hood release.

After refueling start, turn off and restart the engine three or four times in succession.

Additionally you see the message Check gas cap

See Operator’s

Manual in the multifunction display.

A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaking.

왘

The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your vehicle checked.

Check the fuel cap (

컄

If it is not closed properly: page 284).

왘

Close the fuel cap.

If it is closed properly:

왘

Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

344

Practical hints


Problem

v

The yellow ESP warning lamp comes on while driving.

Possible cause

The ESP is deactivated.


왘

Switch the ESP back on (

컄 page 84).

Risk of accident!

Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road, weather and traffic conditions.

If the ESP cannot be switched back on, have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center as soon as possible.

The yellow ESP warning lamp flashes while driving.

The ESP or traction control has come into operation because of detected traction loss in at least one tire.

왘

왘

왘

When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.

While driving, ease up on the accelerator.

Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather conditions.

왘

Do not deactivate the ESP.

Exceptions: (

컄 page 82).


4

The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp comes on while driving.

Additionally you see the message

Reserve fuel in the multifunction display.

The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.

왘

Refuel at the next gas station (

컄 page 284).

After refueling you will see the message

1 Malfunction


왘

Press reset button

J

to confirm the message

(

컄 page 24).

345

Practical hints


Problem

4

The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp flashes after starting the engine.

<

The red seat belt telltale comes on after starting the engine and with all doors closed.

Possible cause

The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passenger to fasten your seat belts.


The fuel cap is not closed properly.

왘

Close the fuel cap.

왘

Fasten your seat belts.

For more information, see “Seat belts”

(

컄 page 69).

1

The red SRS indicator lamp comes on while driving.

There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or emergency tensioning devices

(ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to deploy in an accident.

왘

Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Warning!

G

In the event that a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be operational. For your safety, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise the SRS may not be activated when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in an accident and/or injury to you or to others.

346

Practical hints


Lamp in center console

Problem

75

The passenger front air bag off indicator lamp comes on (

컄 page 75).

Possible cause

A BabySmart

TM1

child seat is installed on the passenger seat. Therefore the passenger front air bag is switched off.


The system is malfunctioning when there is no BabySmart

TM

child seat installed on the passenger seat.

왘


The passenger front air bag off indicator lamp does not come on with a BabySmart

TM

child seat properly installed on the passenger seat.

The system is malfunctioning.

왘

왘

Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat.

Check installation of the child seat

(

컄 page 73).

If the passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out:

왘


Do not use the BabySmart

TM

restraint to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

1

BabySmart

TM

is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.

347

Practical hints


Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

Warning and malfunction messages appear in the multifunction display located in the instrument cluster.

Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.

Address these messages accordingly and follow the additional instructions given in this Operator’s Manual.

Selecting the vehicle status message memory menu in the control system

(

컄 page 126) displays both cleared and uncleared messages.

High-priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red color.

Certain messages of high priority cannot be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button

J

(

컄 page 24) or button j

, k

,

·

, or

è

on the stering wheel.

Other high-priority messages and messages of less immediate priority (regular display colors) can be cleared from the multifunction display using the reset button

J

(

컄 page 24) or button j

, k

,

·

, or

è

on the stering wheel.

They are then stored in the vehicle status message memory (

컄 page 126). Remember that clearing a message will only make the message disappear. Clearing a message will not correct the condition that caused the message to appear.

Warning!

G

All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Failure to repair condition noted may cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz

Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.

348

Warning!

G

No messages will be displayed if either the instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative.

Contact your nearest authorized


Practical hints


i

Switching on ignition (

컄 page 35) causes all instrument cluster lamps

(except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator lamps unless activated) as well as the multifunction display to come on. Make sure the lamps and multifunction display are in working order before starting your journey.

앫

앫

On the pages that follow, you will find a compilation of the most important warning and malfunction messages that may appear in the multifunction display.

For your convenience the messages are divided into two sections:

Text messages (

컄 page 350)

Symbol messages (

컄 page 355)

349

Practical hints


Text messages

Display message

ABS

malfunction

Visit workshop

Display malfunction

Visit workshop

Possible cause Possible solution

The ABS has detected a malfunction and has switched off. The ESP and the BAS are also deactivated.

왘



The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.

왘

Have the system checked at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.


The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning.

왘



왘




350

Practical hints


Display message

BAS

not available

See Operator’s Manual

Cruise control

malfunction

Visit workshop

Display malfunction

Visit workshop

Cruise control

Drive to workshop


The charging voltage has fallen below ten volts. The BAS has switched off.

The battery might not be charged sufficiently.

왘

왘

The brake system is still functioning normally but without the BAS available.

The BAS has detected a malfunction and switched off.

왘

왘


When the voltage is above this value again, the BAS is operational again.





The brake system is still functioning normally but without the BAS available.

The BAS or the BAS display is malfunctioning.


왘

왘




Cruise control is malfunctioning.


왘

Have cruise control checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

351

Practical hints


Display message

ESP

malfunction

Visit workshop unavailable



The ESP was deactivated because of a malfunction.

The ABS might not be operational.

왘

왘


Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ESP available.


The self-diagnosis has not been completed.

The display will clear after driving a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).


The charging voltage has fallen below ten volts. The ESP has switched off.

왘


왘


When the voltage is above this value again, the ESP is operational again.


352

Practical hints


Display message

ESP

Display malfunction

Visit workshop

SRS

Transmission

Restraint system malfunction

Drive to workshop

Visit workshop


The ESP or the ESP display is malfunctioning.

왘

왘




The SRS system is malfunctioning.

왘

Drive with added caution to the nearest



The provided operating safety of the automatic transmission is reduced.

왘

Drive with added caution to the nearest


353

Practical hints


Display messages

Run Flat Indicator inactive

Low pressure mode

Check tires max. Speed 50 mph

(Canada: max. Speed 80 km/h

)

Check tires

Then reactivate

Run Flat Indicator

Run Flat Indicator unavailable

Warning!

G

Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.

Possible cause

The Run Flat Indicator is malfunctioning.

The pressure is too low in one or more tires.

There was a warning message about a loss in tire inflation pressure and the Run Flat Indicator has not been reactivated yet.

왘

왘

The Run Flat Indicator has been switched off due to an error.

왘

왘

왘

Possible solution

왘

Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

왘

Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.

왘

Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure as required (

컄 page 308).

If necessary, change the wheel (

컄 page 388).

Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting the tire inflation pressure values (

컄 page 284).

Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each tire.

Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator.

Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

You may lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

354

Practical hints


Symbol messages

Display symbol Display message

#

Battery/Alternator

Visit workshop

Possible cause

The battery is no longer charging.

Possible causes:

앫

앫

Alternator malfunctioning

Broken poly-V-belt

Do not forget that the brake system requires electrical energy and may be operating with restricted capability. Considerably greater brake pedal force is required and the stopping distance is increased.


왘

Stop immediately and check the poly-V-belt.

If it is broken:

왘

Do not continue to drive. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

If it is in order:

왘

Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking responsiveness.

355

Practical hints



USA only:

;

Canada only:

!

2

Release parking brake

Brake wear

Visit workshop

3

Brake fluid

Visit workshop

Possible cause

You are driving with the parking brake set.


왘

Release parking brake (

컄 page 49).

Warning!

G

Driving with this message displayed can result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately. Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system.

Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be seriously burned.

The brake pads have reached their wear limit.

왘

There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.

왘

Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible.

Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle and notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

!

If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.

!

Brake pad thickness must be visually checked by a qualified technician at the intervals specified in the Maintenance

Booklet.

356

Practical hints



Ï

Coolant

Stop, engine off

During severe operating conditions and stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).


The poly-V-belt could be broken.

왘

Stop immediately and check the poly-V-belt (

If it is broken:

컄 page 411).

왘

Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

If it is in order:

왘

왘

Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Drive immediately to the nearest authorized


Observe the coolant temperature display (

컄 page 122).

!

The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F

(120°C).

Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the


357

Practical hints



Ï

Coolant

Stop, engine off

/

Coolant

Check level

Warning!

G

Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.

Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns and can occur just by opening the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

358

Possible cause

The coolant is too hot.

The coolant level is too low.

The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C).

Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz

Limited Warranty.

Warning!

G

Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.

Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You can be seriously burned.


왘

왘

Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.

왘

Only start the engine again after the message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine.

Add coolant (

컄 page 293).

왘

If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

!

Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with this message and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.

Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will overheat, causing major engine damage.

Practical hints



±

G

J

Display malfunction

Visit workshop

Display malfunction

Visit workshop

Doors open


Certain electronic systems are unable to relay information to the control system. The following systems may have failed:

왘

Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

앫

Coolant temperature display

앫

앫

Tachometer

Cruise control display

The instrument cluster display is malfunctioning.

When the display is malfunctioning, warnings and malfunction messages might not be displayed.

The displays for several systems have malfunctioned. Some systems themselves may also have malfunctioned.

왘

왘

You are attempting to drive with one or more doors open.

왘

왘

왘




Have the electronic systems checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Close all doors.

359

Practical hints



:

USA only:

Add 1 qt. engine oil when next refueling

Possible cause

SLK 55 AMG only:

The engine oil level is too low.


왘

Add engine oil (

컄 page 292) and check the engine oil level (

컄 page 288).

Canada only:

Add 1 liter engine oil when next refueling

Check oil level when next refueling

SLK 350 only:

왘

Check the engine oil level (

컄 page 288) and add engine oil as required (

컄 page 292).

The engine oil level has dropped to a critical level.

왘

If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine checked for possible leaks.

When the message Add 1 qt. (Canada:

1 liter ) engine oil when next refueling (SLK 55 AMG) or Check oil level when next refueling (SLK 350) appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped to approximately the minimum level.

When this occurs, the warning will first come on intermittently and then stay on if the oil level drops further.

Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil leaks are noted, drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be topped to the required level with an approved oil specified in the Factory

Approved Service Products pamphlet.

!

The engine oil level warnings should not be ignored. Extended driving with the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.

360


:

Engine oil level

Stop, engine off

Engine oil level

Visit workshop

Engine oil level

Reduce oil level

Engine oil

Visit workshop

Practical hints


Possible cause

SLK 55 AMG only:

There is no oil in the engine. There is a danger of engine damage.

SLK 55 AMG only:

왘

왘


왘

Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as possible.

왘


Add engine oil (

컄 page 292) and check the engine oil level (

컄 page 288).

Have the measuring system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The measuring system is malfunctioning.

SLK 55 AMG only:

왘

You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of damaging the engine or the catalytic converter.

SLK 55 AMG only:

왘

Have oil siphoned or drained off.

Observe all legal requirements with respect to its disposal.

Have the engine oil checked.

There may be water in the engine oil.

361

Practical hints



A

K

O

F

Fuel reserve

Check gas cap


Lock retractable roof

Retractable roof

Visit workshop

Close hood

Replace key

Possible cause

The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.

The fuel cap may not be closed properly.


왘

Refuel at the next gas station (

왘

Close the fuel cap.

If it is closed properly:

컄

왘

Check the fuel cap (

컄 page 284).

If it is not closed properly: page 284).

왘

Have the fuel system checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The retractable hardtop is not locked properly.

The retractable hardtop is malfunctioning.

왘

왘

Push the retractable hardtop switch forward or rearward until the retractable hardtop is completely closed or open (

컄 page 237).

Have the retractable hardtop checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

You are driving with the hood open.

왘

Close the hood (

컄 page 287).

The SmartKey is malfunctioning.

왘

Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

362

Practical hints



.

3rd brake light

Possible cause

The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of

LEDs have stopped working.

Tail lamp / brake lamp left

Back-up lamp on

The left tail lamp/brake lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of


A backup bulb has been brought into use.

Tail lamp / brake lamp right

Back-up lamp on

The right tail lamp/brake lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of


A backup bulb has been brought into use.

Brake lamp

Visit workshop

Front foglamp, L

Brake lamp illumination is delayed or lamp is permanently on.

The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.

Front foglamp, R The right front foglamp is malfunctioning.


왘


왘


왘


왘

왘

왘




363

Practical hints



.

Rear foglamp

Back-up lamp on

High beam, left

High beam, right

Lamp sensor

Drive to workshop

Left license plate lamp malfunction

Right license plate lamp malfunction

Possible cause

The rear fog lamp on the driver’s side is malfunctioning. A backup bulb has been brought into use.

The left high beam lamp (halogen headlamps)/high beam flasher lamp (Bi-Xenon* headlamps) is malfunctioning.

왘


왘

Replace the bulb as soon as possible.


The right high beam lamp (halogen headlamps)/high beam flasher lamp (Bi-Xenon* headlamps) is malfunctioning.

왘

The light sensor is malfunctioning.

The headlamps switch on automatically.

왘

왘


In the control system, set lamp operation to manual (

컄 page 137).

Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch (

컄 page 106).

왘

왘



The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning.

The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.

왘


364


.

Low beam, left

Low beam, right

Park. light, front left

Park. light, front right

Remove key

Side marker lamp, front left

Side marker lamp, front right

Practical hints


Possible cause

The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning.


Halogen headlamp:

왘


Bi-Xenon* headlamp:

왘


The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Halogen headlamp:

왘


Bi-Xenon* headlamp:

왘

The left front parking lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

The right front parking lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

You have forgotten to remove the

SmartKey.

왘

The left front side marker lamp is malfunctioning.

왘

The right front side marker lamp is malfunctioning.

왘







365

Practical hints



.

Rear left side marker lamp malfunction

Rear right side marker lamp malfunction

Tail light, left

Back-up lamp on

Tail light, right

Back-up lamp on

Turn off lights

Possible cause

The left rear side marker lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of


The right rear side marker lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of


왘

The left tail lamp is malfunctioning.

This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working. A backup bulb has been brought into use.

왘


왘




The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working. A backup bulb has been brought into use.

왘

You have forgotten to switch off the headlamps when exiting the vehicle and no SmartKey is in the starter switch.

왘


Switch off the headlamps.

366

Practical hints



.

Turn signal in mirror, left

Turn signal in mirror, right

Turn signal front left

Turn signal , front right

,

Rear left turn signal

Back-up lamp on

Rear right turn signal

Back-up lamp on


The left turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of


왘


The right turn signal in the side mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have stopped working.

왘

The left front turn signal is malfunctioning.

왘

The right front turn signal is malfunctioning.

왘




The left rear turn signal is malfunctioning. A backup bulb has been brought into use.

왘

The right rear turn signal is malfunctioning. A backup bulb has been brought into use.

왘



367

Practical hints



<

Seat belt system

Visit workshop t

Function

Not available

Ê

W

Close trunk lid

Washer fluid

Top up


The seat belt system is malfunctioning.

This display appears if button s or t

on the multifunction steering wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped with a telephone*.

왘

This message will appear whenever the trunk lid is open.

왘


Close the trunk lid.

The fluid level in the windshield washer fluid reservoir has dropped below its minimum mark.

왘

Add washer fluid (

컄 page 295).

368

Practical hints


왔


First aid kit

The first aid kit is stored in a parcel net behind the driver’s seat.

Vehicle tool kit, vehicle jack

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

The vehicle tool kit is stored in a storage compartment under the trunk floor.

The following is included:

Collapsible chock

Vehicle jack

Protective wrap

Alignment bolt

Towing eye bolt

Wheel wrench

Spare fuses

Fuse extractor

Valve extractor

Electric air pump

Removing the vehicle tool kit

왘

왘

1 Spare wheel

2 Vehicle tool kit (under collapsible tire, together with wheel bolts for spare wheel with collapsible tire)

3 Retaining screw

왘

Lift up trunk floor.

왘

Loosen retaining screw counter-clockwise.

3 by turning it

Remove spare wheel 1

Remove vehicle tool kit

.

2 .

1 Collapsible chock

2 Vehicle jack

3 Protective wrap

4 Alignment bolt

5 Towing eye bolt

6 Wheel wrench

7 Spare fuses, fuse extractor and valve extractor

8 Electric air pump

369

Practical hints


Vehicle jack

Warning!

G

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into both sides of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack.

Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Make sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle.

The vehicle jack is located in the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor.

Storage position

왘

Remove vehicle jack from its compartment.

왘

Push crank handle up.

앫

앫

Operational position

왘

Turn crank handle clockwise until it engages (operational position).

Before storing the vehicle jack in its compartment:

It should be fully collapsed.

The handle must be folded in (storage position).

370

Practical hints


Setting up the collapsible wheel chock

The collapsible wheel chock serves to additionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while changing the wheel.

왘

왘

왘

Tilt both plates upward 1 .

Fold the lower plate outward 2 .

Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way into the openings of the base plate 3 .

Spare wheel with collapsible tire

The spare wheel is stored in the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor.

1 Tilt the plate upward

2 Fold the lower plate outward

3 Insert the plate

왘

왘

1 Spare wheel

2 Vehicle tool kit (under collapsible tire, together with wheel bolts for spare wheel with collapsible tire)

3 Retaining screw

왘

Loosen retaining screw counterclockwise.

3 by turning it

Remove spare wheel 1 .

Take off the wheel bolts for spare wheel 1 .

371

Practical hints


Storing the spare wheel with collapsible tire

If you wish to store the spare wheel after use, carry out the following steps. Otherwise the spare wheel will not fit the storage compartment.

!

Make sure the collapsible tire is dry when storing it.

왘

Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the collapsible tire.

왘

왘

Take the valve extractor from the vehicle tool kit ( 컄 page 369).

Unscrew the valve insert from the valve and allow the air to escape.

i

It may take a few minutes for the collapsible tire to deflate completely.

왘

왘

왘

Screw the valve insert back into the valve.

Screw the valve cap back on the valve.

Pull the protective wrap provided with the vehicle tool kit over the spare wheel.

왘

Store the spare wheel and the valve extractor in the storage compartment underneath the trunk floor.

왘

왘

Pierce the protective wrap with retaining screw 3 .

Secure the spare wheel by turning retaining screw 3 clockwise.

Warning!

G

The dimensions of the spare wheel with collapsible tire are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a spare wheel with collapsible tire mounted.

The spare wheel with collapsible tire should only be used temporarily, and should be replaced with a regular road wheel as quickly as possible.

372

In the case of a flat tire, you may temporarily use the spare wheel with collapsible tire when observing the following restrictions:

앫

Do not exceed a vehicle speed of

50 mph (80 km/h).

앫

앫

Drive to the nearest tire repair facility to have the flat tire repaired or replaced as appropriate.

Do not operate vehicle with more than one spare wheel with collapsible tire mounted.

For more information, see “Rims and tires”

(

컄 page 413).

Spare wheel bolts

1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims

2 Wheel bolt for spare wheel with collapsible tire (located in trunk with vehicle tool kit)

Practical hints


!

Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting the spare wheel with collapsible tire. The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the spare wheel with collapsible tire will physically damage the vehicle’s brakes.

Warning!

G

Make sure to use the original length wheel bolts when remounting the original wheel after it has been repaired.

373

Practical hints


Unlocking the vehicle Removing the mechanical key Unlocking the driver’s door

If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey, open the driver’s door and the trunk using the mechanical key. i

Unlocking the driver’s door and/or the trunk with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.


앫

Press button

Œ or

‹ on the

SmartKey.

앫


1 Mechanical key locking tab

2 Mechanical key

왘

Move locking tab 1 direction of arrow.

왘

Slide mechanical key housing.

2 out of the

1 Unlocking

왘

Insert the mechanical key into the driver’s door lock until it stops.

왘

Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1 .

The driver’s door is unlocked.

374

Practical hints


Unlocking and opening the trunk

A minimum height clearance of

5.78 ft (1.76 m) is required to open the trunk lid.

The trunk lid lock is located next to the handle above the rear license plate recess.

Trunk lid lock

1 Unlocking in an emergency

왘

왘

왘

Fully insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid lock.

Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1 until it stops, and simultaneously pull the trunk lid handle and lift lid.

!

Always make sure there is sufficient overhead clearance.

왘

Turn the mechanical key back and remove it from the trunk lid lock.

Locking the vehicle

If you are unable to lock the vehicle with the SmartKey, do the following:

왘

Close the passenger door and the trunk lid.

왘

왘

Press the central locking switch in the upper part of the center console

(

컄 page 98).

Check to see whether the lock button on the passenger door has moved down.

왘

If necessary, push it down manually.

The passenger door is locked.

왘

Exit the vehicle and close the driver’s door.

컄컄

375

Practical hints


컄컄

Manually unlocking the gear selector lever (automatic transmission*)

In the case of power failure, the gear selector lever can be manually unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.

1 Locking

왘

Insert the mechanical key into the driver’s door lock until it stops.

왘

Turn the mechanical key clockwise to position 1 .

The driver’s door is locked.

1 Gear selector lever cover

2 Release

왘

Pull out gear selector lever cover 1 in direction of arrows.

왘

Push down and hold release rection of arrow.

2 in di-

왘

Simultaneously move gear selector lever out of position

P

.

The gear selector lever is unlocked now.

i

The gear selector lever is locked again as soon as you place it in position

P

again.

376

왔


Raising retractable hardtop manually

Warning!

Warning!

G

If the retractable hardtop does not completely open or close, the roof hydraulics will lose pressure and the retractable hardtop is lowered

앫 after approximately seven minutes when the ignition is switched on

앫 after approximately 15 seconds when the ignition is switched off

Shortly before the hardtop is lowered, a warning will sound. In the multifunction display you will see

K

and the message


.

앫

Properly lock retractable hardtop before continuing to drive (

컄 page 237).

G

Manually closing the retractable hardtop is a complicated and technically demanding procedure and should only be performed by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or qualified technician. Attempting to manually close the retractable hardtop may cause damage to the retractable hardtop and/or personal injury.

Practical hints


Warning!

G

To prevent possible accidents, drive the vehicle only with the retractable hardtop either completely closed and locked, or fully lowered into its storage compartment.

377

Practical hints


If the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked. It is recommended to have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.


Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.

Warning!

G

Keep the batteries out of reach of children.

If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help immediately.

i

When inserting the batteries, make sure they are clean and free of lint.

When replacing batteries, always replace both batteries.

The required replacement batteries are available at any Mercedes-Benz

Center.

378

SmartKey

Replacement batteries: Lithium, type

CR 2025 or equivalent.

왘

Remove the mechanical key

(

컄 page 374).

Practical hints


왘

왘

왘

Insert mechanical key 1 in side opening and push gray slide.

Battery compartment 2 is unlatched.

Pull battery compartment 2 out of the housing in direction of arrow.

Remove the discharged batteries.

왘

Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries 3 under contact spring 4 with the plus (+) side facing up.

왘

Return battery compartment 2 into the housing until it engages.

왘

Slide mechanical key 1 back into the

SmartKey.

왘

Check the operation of the SmartKey.

1 Mechanical key

2 Battery compartment

3 Battery

4 Contact spring

379

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Safe vehicle operation depends on proper exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all times.

Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely important. Have headlamps checked and readjusted at regular intervals and when a bulb has been replaced. See an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center for headlamp adjustment.

i

If the headlamps are fogged up on the inside as a result of high humidity, driving the vehicle a short distance with the lights on should clear up the fogging.

Bulbs

i

Backup bulbs will be brought into use when lamps malfunction. Observe the messages in the multifunction display

(

컄 page 363).

380

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Front lamps

Lamp

1 Additional turn signal lamp

2 Turn signal lamp

3 Halogen headlamp:

Low beam

Type

LED

PY 21 W

H7 (55 W)

Bi-Xenon* headlamp:

Low and high beam

1

4 Front fog lamp

5 Parking and standing lamp

D2S-35W

HB4 (51 W)

W 5 W

6 Halogen headlamp:

High beam/high beam flasher H7 (55 W)

Bi-Xenon* headlamp:

High beam flasher H7 (55 W)

7 Side marker lamp W 5 W

1

Vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Low beam and high beam use the same D2S-35W lamp. Do not replace the Bi-Xenon* bulbs yourself. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Rear lamps

Lamp Type

8 Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)

P 21 W

9 High mounted brake lamp a Tail, parking, standing, side marker lamp and brake lamp

LED

LED b License plate lamps c Backup lamp d Turn signal lamp

C 5 W

P 21 W

P 21 W i

Vehicles equipped with cornering fog lamps*:

Front fog lamps use H7 (55 W) lamps.

Warning!

G

Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.

Keep bulbs out of reach of children.

Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas.

A bulb can explode if you:

앫

앫

앫 touch or move it when hot drop the bulb scratch the bulb

Wear eye and hand protection.

Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician.

381

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

Notes on bulb replacement

앫

Only use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and with the specified watt rating.

앫

앫

Switch lights off before changing a bulb to prevent short circuits.

Always use a clean lint-free cloth when handling bulbs.

앫

앫

Your hands should be dry and free of oil and grease.

If the newly installed bulb does not come on, visit an authorized


Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following lamps replaced by an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center:

앫

Additional turn signal lamps in the exterior rear view mirrors

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Bi-Xenon* lamps

Front fog lamps

High mounted brake lamp

Brake lamps

Front and rear side marker lamps

Parking/standing lamps in the tail lamp assemblies i

Have the headlamp adjustment checked regularly.

Replacing bulbs for front lamps

Before you start to replace a bulb for a front lamp, do the following first:

왘

왘


M

(

컄 page 106).

Open the hood (

컄 page 287) (except for side marker lamps).

382

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

1 Housing cover for low beam (halogen headlamps only)

Housing cover for Bi-Xenon* headlamps.

Do not remove.

2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp

3 Bulb socket for high beam/high beam flasher lamp

4 Bulb socket for parking and standing light lamp

Warning!

G

Do not remove the cover 1 for the Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because of high voltage in

Bi-Xenon lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp and its components. We recommend that you have such work done by a qualified technician.

Low beam bulb (Halogen headlamps only)

왘

Turn housing cover wise and remove.

1 counterclock-

왘

Turn bulb socket 5 with the bulb counterclockwise and remove.

왘

왘

왘

Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 5 .

Press the new bulb into bulb socket 5 .

Place bulb socket 5 back into the lamp and turn it clockwise.

왘

Reinstall housing cover 1 .

5 Bulb socket for low beam bulb (Halogen headlamps only)

383

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

High beam/high beam flasher bulb

(Halogen headlamps) / High beam flasher bulb (Bi-Xenon* headlamps)

왘


왘

왘

왘




Front turn signal bulb

왘


왘

왘

왘

Press gently onto the bulb and turn it counterclockwise out of bulb socket 2 .

Press the new bulb gently into bulb socket 2 and turn it clockwise.


Replacing bulbs for rear lamps

Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear lamp, do the following first:

왘

왘


M

(

컄 page 106).

Open the trunk lid (

컄 page 95).

Tail lamp unit

Parking and standing lamp bulb

왘


왘

왘

왘




1 Bulb socket for rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)

2 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp

3 Bulb socket for backup lamp

384

왘

왘

Fold corresponding trim to side.

Turn the respective bulb socket counterclockwise and remove.

왘

왘

Press gently onto the bulb and turn counterclockwise out of its bulb socket.

Press the new bulb gently into its bulb socket and turn clockwise.

왘

왘

Reinstall the bulb socket and turn clockwise until it engages.

Reinstall trim.

License plate lamp

1 Screw

Practical hints

Replacing bulbs

왘

왘

왘

왘

왘

Loosen both screws 1 .

Remove the license plate lamp.

Replace the bulb.

Reinstall the license plate lamp.

Retighten screws 1 .

385

Practical hints


Removing wiper blades

Warning!

G

For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove the SmartKey from the starter switch before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, the motor could suddenly turn on and cause injury.

!

To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper arms should only be folded forward when in the vertical position.

왘

왘

Turn combination switch to wiper setting

II

(

컄 page 53).

왘


1

.

With wiper arms in vertical position, turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to position

0

.

왘

Fold the wiper arms forward until they engage.

1 Wiper blade

2 Cover

3 Attachment

4 Tab

5 Removing

왘

Press tabs 4 together and tilt wiper blade 1 to detach tabs 4 on both recesses of attachment 3 .

왘

Wiper blade 1 is released on one end.

Maintaining its tilted position, slide wiper blade 1 out of attachment 3 in direction of arrow 5 .

386

Installing wiper blades

1 Installing

2 Tabs

3 Attachment

4 Guide tab

5 Cover

왘

왘

왘

왘

Slide the wiper blade into attachment 3 in direction of arrow 1 .

Make sure guide tab 4 will be placed under cover 5 when fully inserting the wiper blade into attachment 3 .

Let tabs 2 latch in into both recesses of attachment 3 .

Check if the wiper blade is securely fastened.

왘

Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the windshield.

Make sure you hold on to the wiper arm when folding it back.

Practical hints


!

Never open the hood when the wiper arms are folded forward.

Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm back. If released, the force of the impact from the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.

Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the windshield glass without a wiper blade inserted.

Make sure the wiper blades are properly installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may cause windshield damage.

For your convenience, you should have this work carried out by an authorized


387

Practical hints

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle

왘

왘

왘

왘

왘

Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving traffic on a hard surface.

Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

Turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels are in a straight ahead position.

Set the parking brake (

컄 page 49).

Move the gear selector lever* to

P

(manual transmission to first or reverse gear).

왘

왘

Turn off the engine (

컄 page 58).


i

Open door only when conditions are safe to do so.

왘

Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the roadway.

Mounting the spare wheel

Warning!

G

The dimensions of the spare wheel with collapsible tire are different from those of the road wheels. As a result, the vehicle handling characteristics change when driving with a spare wheel with collapsible tire mounted. Adapt your driving style accordingly.

The spare wheel with collapsible tire is for temporary use only. When driving with spare wheel with collapsible tire mounted, ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do not exceed vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible to have the spare wheel with collapsible tire replaced with a regular road wheel.

Never operate the vehicle with more than one spare wheel with collapsible tire mounted.

388

Practical hints

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle

Prepare the vehicle as described

(

컄 page 388).

왘

Take the collapsible tire, wheel wrench, wheel bolts, jack, and electric air pump out of the trunk (

컄 page 369).

Lifting the vehicle

왘

Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking wheels with wheel chocks

(not included) or other sizeable objects.

One wheel chock is included with the vehicle tool kit (

컄 page 369).

When changing wheel on a level surface:

왘

Place the wheel chock in front of and another sizable object behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed.

When changing wheel on a hill:

왘

Place the wheel chock and another sizable object on the downhill side blocking both wheels of the other axle.

Warning!

G

The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built into either side of the vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel change. Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from the area under the lifted vehicle. Always firmly set parking brake and block wheels before raising vehicle with jack.

Do not disengage parking brake while the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack on level surface. Be sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient capacity jackstands before working under the vehicle.

389

Practical hints

Flat tire

1 Wheel wrench

왘

On wheel to be changed, loosen but do not yet remove the wheel bolts in direction of arrow (approximately one full turn with wheel wrench 1 ).

The jack take-up brackets are located directly behind the front wheel housings and in front of the rear wheel housings.

2 Jack

3 Take-up bracket

왘

Place jack 2 on firm ground.

왘

Position jack 2 under take-up bracket 3 so that it is always vertical

(plumb-line) as seen from the side, even if the vehicle is parked on an incline.

Warning!

G

Position the jack only on the jack take-up brackets designed for this purpose.

If the jack is not properly positioned, the vehicle may fall off of the jack.

왘

Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. Never start engine while vehicle is raised.

Warning!

G

The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for performing maintenance work under the vehicle.

앫

Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised.

앫

Never lie down under the raised vehicle.

390

Practical hints

Flat tire

Removing the wheel Mounting the spare wheel

4 Alignment bolt

왘

Unscrew the upper-most wheel bolt and remove.

왘

왘

Replace this wheel bolt with alignment bolt 4 supplied in the vehicle tool kit.

Remove the remaining bolts.

!

Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.

This could result in damage to the bolt and wheel hub threads.

1 Wheel bolt for light alloy rims

2 Wheel bolt for spare wheel with collapsible tire (located in trunk with spare wheel)

왘

Remove the wheel.

!

Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mounting the spare wheel with collapsible tire. The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts 2 for the spare wheel with collapsible tire will physically damage the vehicle’s brakes.

왘

Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel hub.

!

To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat against hub and hold it there while installing first wheel bolt.

391

Practical hints

Flat tire

Warning!

G

Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.

Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.

Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call

Roadside Assistance.

Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off. This could cause an accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel bolts.

Warning!

G

Use only genuine equipment

Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel bolts may come loose.

Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jack.

왘

Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment bolt and push it on.

왘

Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them slightly.

왘

Unscrew the alignment bolt, install last wheel bolt and tighten slightly.

392

Practical hints

Flat tire

Inflating the collapsible tire

Warning!

G

Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is properly mounted.

Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric pump (

컄 page 369) before lowering the vehicle.

Warning!

Observe instructions on air pump label.

G

!

Do not lower the vehicle before inflating the collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may be damaged.

1 Flap

2 Air pump switch

3 Electrical plug

4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent screw

5 Union nut

왘

왘

왘

왘

왘

Take the electric air pump out of the trunk (

컄 page 369).

Open flap 1 on air pump.

Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose with pressure gauge 4 .

Close vent screw on air hose 4 .

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.

왘

Screw air hose 4 with union nut 5 onto the collapsible tire valve.

왘

Make sure electric air pump switch 2 is set to

0

.

왘

Insert electrical plug 3 cigarette lighter socket.

into vehicle

왘


1

.

컄컄

393

Practical hints

Flat tire

컄컄 왘

Press

I

on electric air pump switch 2 .

The electric air pump switches on and inflates the collapsible tire.

왘

Inflate the collapsible tire to approximately 51 psi (3.5 bar).

This takes about five minutes for the collapsible tire. Air hose 4 and union nut 5 can become hot during inflation. Exercise proper caution to avoid burning yourself when using the equipment.

!

Do not operate the electric air pump longer than six minutes without interruption. Otherwise it may overheat.

You may operate the electric air pump again after it has cooled off.

왘

왘

Press

0

on electric air pump switch 2 .


0

.

왘

The electric air pump should now be switched off.

If the tire inflation pressure is above

51 psi (3.5 bar), release excess tire inflation pressure using the vent screw on air hose 4 .

Warning!

G





왘

왘

왘

Detach the electric air pump.

Reinstall collapsible tire valve cap.

Store electrical plug 3 and air hose 4 behind flap 1 and place the electric air pump back in the trunk.

394

Practical hints

Flat tire

Lowering the vehicle

Warning!

G

Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric pump (

컄 page 393) before lowering the vehicle.

Warning!

G

Have the tightening torque checked after changing a wheel. The wheels could come loose if they are not tightened to a torque of

80 lb-ft (110 Nm).

왘

왘

Lower vehicle by turning the crank counterclockwise until vehicle is resting fully on its own weight.

Remove the jack.

왘

Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly in the direction of the arrow, following the diagonal sequence illustrated

( 1 to 5 ), until all bolts are tight.

Observe a tightening torque of

80 lb-ft (110 Nm).

왘

왘

Fully collapse the jack.

왘

Place the vehicle tool kit, electric air pump, and the jack back in the storage compartment under the trunk floor.

Wrap the damaged wheel in the protective sheet provided with the spare wheel and put the wheel in the trunk.

i

The flat tire may be transported in the trunk when the retractable hardtop is closed.

1 5 Wheel bolts

395

Practical hints

Battery

The battery is located in the engine compartment on the right-hand side below the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

1 Battery

2 Positive terminal

3 Negative terminal

Warning!

G

Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.

Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries, see “Battery” (

컄 page 294).

Never lean over batteries while connecting them, as you could otherwise be injured.

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water and seek medical help if necessary.

A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc.

Warning!

G

Do not place metal objects on the battery as this could result in a short circuit.

Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk of acid burns in the event of an accident.

!

Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running or the SmartKey is in the starter switch.

Otherwise the alternator and other electronic components could be severely damaged.

Have the battery checked regularly by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Refer to Maintenance Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information.

396

Practical hints

Battery

Disconnecting the battery

Warning!

G

With a disconnected battery

앫 you will no longer be able to turn the

SmartKey in the starter switch

앫 automatic transmission*: the gear selector lever will remain locked in position

P

1 Water tray

2 Lock

왘

Depress parking brake firmly or move gear selector lever* to position

P

(manual transmission to Neutral).

Switch off all electrical consumers.

왘

왘

왘

왘

왘

왘

Remove SmartKey from starter switch.

Open the hood (

컄 page 287).

Turn locks 2 one quarter turn.

Remove water tray 1 .

Read and observe safety instructions and precautions (

컄 page 396).

Disconnect the battery negative lead.

왘

왘

왘

Remove the cover from the positive terminal.

Disconnect the battery positive lead.

Removing the battery

Charging and reinstalling battery

Warning!

G

Never charge a battery while still installed in the vehicle unless the accessory battery charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is being used. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.

An accessory battery charge unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available, permitting the charging of the battery in its installed position. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information and availability. Charge battery in accordance with the separate instructions for the accessory battery charger.

컄컄

왘

왘

왘

Remove the screw on the swivel bar.

Remove the swivel bar.

Take out the battery.

397

Practical hints

Battery

컄컄 왘

Charge battery in accordance with the instructions of the battery charger manufacturer.

왘

Reinstall the charged battery. Follow the previously described steps in reverse order.

Reconnecting the battery

왘

왘


Connect the positive lead and fasten its cover.

왘

Connect the negative lead.

!

Never invert the terminal connections!

앫

앫 i

The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of battery power (e.g. due to reconnection):

Set the clock (

컄 page 133).

Resynchronize side windows

(

컄 page 236).

왘 Reinstall the water tray.

!

The battery, its filler caps and the vent tube must always be securely installed when the vehicle is in operation.


Large 12-volt storage batteries contain lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred method of disposal. Many states require sellers of batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.

398

왔

Jump starting

Warning!

G

Failure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can lead to a battery explosion and severe injury or death.

Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting, as you could otherwise be injured.

Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help if necessary.

A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and very explosive. Keep flames or sparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc.

Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury.

Read all instructions before proceeding.

If the battery is discharged, the engine can be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:

앫

Jump starting should only be performed when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.

앫

앫

Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.

Only jump start from batteries with the same voltage rating (12V). Jump starting with a more powerful battery could damage the vehicle’s electrical system, which will not be covered by the


앫

앫

Only use jumper cables with sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.

Always make sure the jumper cables are not on or near pulleys, fans, or other parts that move when an engine is started or running.

Practical hints

Jump starting

!

Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.

Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit.

If the engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it checked at the nearest authorized


Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated failed starting attempts may damage the catalytic converter and may present a fire risk.

Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose or missing insulation.

Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any other metal part while the other end is still attached to a battery.

399

Practical hints

Jump starting

Warning!

G

Keep flames or sparks away from battery.

Do not smoke.

Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries

(

컄 page 294).

왘

Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.

왘

왘

왘


Apply parking brake.

Shift gear selector lever* to position

P

(manual transmission to Neutral).

Open the hood (

컄 page 287).

왘

왘

Remove the cover from positive under hood terminal 2 in front of discharged battery.

1 Positive terminal of charged battery

2 Positive under hood terminal in front of discharged battery

3 Negative under hood terminal in front of discharged battery

4 Negative terminal of charged battery

왘

Connect positive terminal 1 of the charged battery with positive under hood terminal 2 in front of the discharged battery with one jumper cable.

Clamp the cable to positive terminal 1 of the charged battery first.

왘

Start the engine of the vehicle with the charged battery and run at idle speed.

왘

Connect negative terminal 4 of the charged battery with negative under hood terminal 3 in front of the discharged battery with the second jumper cable. Clamp the cable to negative terminal 4 of the charged battery first.

왘

Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.

You can now switch on the electrical consumers. Do not switch on the lights under any circumstances.

왘

Remove the jumper cables first from negative terminals 3 and 4 and then from positive terminals 2 and 1 .

You can now switch on the lights.

왘

Have the battery checked at the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

!

Never invert the terminal connections.

i


Do not tow-start vehicle.

400

왔


Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.

!


Do not tow-start vehicle.

!

Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment with the SmartKey in the starter switch in position

0

.

Do not tow with sling-type equipment.

Towing with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will damage radiator and supports.

To prevent damage during transport, do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts.

Switch off the tow-away alarm

(

컄 page 86) and the automatic central locking (

컄 page 97).

When circumstances do not permit the recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the ground or front wheels raised only so far as necessary to have the vehicle moved to a safe location where the recommended towing methods can be employed.

!

To be certain to avoid a possibility of damage to the transmission, however, we recommend the drive shaft be disconnected at the rear axle drive flange for any towing beyond a short tow to a nearby garage.

Practical hints


!

If the vehicle is towed with the front axle raised, the engine must be shut off

(SmartKey in starter switch position

0

or

1

). Otherwise, the ESP will immediately be engaged and will apply the rear wheel brakes.

When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, the gear selector lever* must be in position

N

(manual transmission: gear shift lever in neutral position) and the SmartKey must be in starter switch position

1

.

When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground or the front axle raised, the vehicle may be towed only for distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed 30 mph

(50 km/h).

401

Practical hints


Warning!

G

앫

앫

If circumstances require towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, always tow with a tow bar if: the engine will not run there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle.

Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in starter switch position

2

.

If the SmartKey is left in starter switch position

0

for an extended period of time, it can no longer be turned in the switch. In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert.

Warning!

G

With the engine not running, there is no power assistance for the brake and steering systems. In this case, it is important to keep in mind that a considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.

i

To signal turns while being towed with the hazard warning flasher in use, switch on ignition and activate the combination switch for the left or right turn signal in the usual manner – only the selected turn signal will operate.

Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.

!

When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the ground, please note the following:

With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter switch position

2

, the vehicle doors lock if the left front wheel as well as the right rear wheel are turning at vehicle speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.

To prevent the vehicle door locks from locking, deactivate the automatic central locking (

컄 page 97).

Switch off the tow-away alarm

( 컄 page 86).

The vehicle should only be towed using a properly installed towing eye bolt.

Never attach a tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, frame or suspension parts.

402

i

The gear selector lever* will remain locked in position

P

(vehicles with automatic transmission*) and the Smart-

Key will not turn in the starter switch if the battery is disconnected or discharged. See notes on the battery

(

컄 page 396) or on jump starting

(

컄 page 399).


For information on manual unlocking of transmission selector lever, see

(

컄 page 376).

1 Cover in front bumper

Installing towing eye bolt

The towing eye bolt is supplied with the vehicle tool kit, located in the compartment underneath the trunk floor (

컄 page 369).

The towing eyes are located on the passenger side in the front and rear bumper.

왘

Take vehicle tool kit out of trunk

(

컄 page 369).

2 Cover in rear bumper

Practical hints


왘

Press mark on corresponding cover 1 or 2 in direction of arrow for folding down.

왘

Lift cover off to reveal threaded hole for towing eye bolt.

왘

Do not remove cover completely.

Screw towing eye bolt in to its end stop and tighten with lug wrench.

왘

For removing towing eye bolt and reinstalling cover, follow the previously described steps in reverse order.

i

When closing the cover, insert the latches first and gently press on the opposite side until the cover fully engages.

Make sure the cover’s check strap does not get caught when closing.

403

Practical hints

Fuses

앫

앫

앫

The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to stop the supply of electricity to a device that is malfunctioning. This helps to prevent damage to the other vehicle electronics.

The following aids are available to help you change fuses:

Fuse chart

Spare fuses

Fuse extractor

Warning!

G

Only use fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz with the specified amperage for the system in question. Otherwise, a short circuit could result and cause a fire.

!

Only install fuses that have been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz and that have the specified amperage rating.

Otherwise, electrical parts or systems could be damaged.

Never attempt to repair or bridge a blown fuse. Have the cause determined and remedied by an authorized


Aids for changing fuses

Fuse chart

The fuse chart is found in the main fuse box in the passenger compartment

(

컄 page 405). The amperages of the fuses are also given there.

Spare fuses

Spare fuses are found in the vehicle tool kit in the spare wheel well (

컄 page 369).

The electrical fuses are located in different fuse boxes:

앫

앫

Main fuse box in passenger compartment ( 컄 page 405).

Fuse box in engine compartment

(

컄 page 406).

Fuse extractor

The fuse extractor is also found in the vehicle tool kit in the spare wheel well

(

컄 page 369).

404

Main fuse box in passenger compartment

1 Main fuse box cover

!

Do not use sharp objects such as a screw driver to open the fuse box cover 1 in the dashboard, as this could damage it.

Practical hints

Fuses

Opening

왘

왘

Open the driver’s door.

Insert flat, blunt object as a lever into the edge of cover 1 at the position indicated by the arrow.

왘

Loosen cover the lever.

1 from dashboard using

왘

Using your hands, pull cover and remove.

1 out

Closing

왘

왘

Attach cover

Fold cover

1

1

in the front.

in until it engages.

405

Practical hints

Fuses

Fuse box in engine compartment

The fuse box is located in the engine compartment on the driver’s side.

왘

왘

왘

왘

Opening

Open the hood (

컄 page 287).

With a dry cloth, remove any moisture from the fuse box.

Release clamps 2 .

Remove fuse box cover 3 .

Closing

왘

Make sure the sealing rubber is properly positioned.

왘

Press fuse box cover 3 down and secure with clamps 2 .

1 Fuse box

2 Clamp

3 Fuse box cover

406

Technical data

Parts service

Warranty coverage

Identification labels

Layout of poly-V-belt drive

Engine

Rims and tires

Electrical system

Main Dimensions

Weights

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

407

Technical data

Parts service

The “Technical data” section provides the necessary technical data for your vehicle.

All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a stock of genuine

Mercedes-Benz parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers provide quick and reliable parts service.

More than 300 000 different parts for

Mercedes-Benz models are available.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to

Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be installed.

!

The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and accessories not authorized by Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which is not covered by the

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety.

408

Technical data


앫

앫

앫

앫

왔


Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and

Warranty Information booklet. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle in accordance with the terms of the following warranties:

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emission System Warranty

Emission Performance Warranty

California, Maine, Massachusetts, and

Vermont Emission Control Systems

Warranty

Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and

Accessories warranties, copies of which are available at any authorized


Loss of Service and Warranty

Information Booklet

Should you lose your Service and Warranty

Information booklet, have an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.

409

Technical data

Identification labels

1 Certification label (includes paintwork code)

2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), located behind the passenger seat under the floor cover

3 Engine number (engraved on engine)

4 VIN, visible (lower edge of windshield)

5 Vacuum line routing diagram label

6 Emission control information label, includes both federal and California certification exhaust emission standards i

When ordering parts, please specify vehicle identification and engine numbers.

410

왔


SLK 350 SLK 55 AMG

1 Idler pulley

2 Idler pulley

3 Automatic belt tensioner

4 Power steering pump

5 Air conditioning compressor

6 Crankshaft

7 Coolant pump

8 Generator (alternator)

1 Automatic belt tensioner

2 Power steering pump

3 Air conditioning compressor

4 Crankshaft

5 Coolant pump

6 Generator (alternator)

7 Idler pulley

Technical data


411

Technical data

Engine

Model

Engine

Mode of operation

No. of cylinders

SLK 350 (171.456)

272

1

4-stroke engine, gasoline injection

SLK 55 AMG (171.473)

113

1

4-stroke engine, gasoline injection

Bore

Stroke

Total piston displacement

Compression ratio

Output according to SAE J 1349

6

3.66 in (92.90 mm)

3.39 in (86.00 mm)

213.5 cu in (3498 cm

3

)

10.7:1

268 hp/6000 rpm

2

(200 kW/6000 rpm)

258 lb-ft/2400 - 5000 rpm

(350 Nm/2400 - 5000 rpm)

8

3.82 in (97.00 mm)

3.60 in (92.00 mm)

331.8 cu in (5439 cm

3

)

11:1

355 hp/5750 rpm

2

(265 kW/5750 rpm)

376 lb-ft/4000 rpm

(510 Nm/4000 rpm)

Maximum torque according to

SAE J 1349

Maximum engine speed

Firing orde

r

6500 rpm

1-4-3-6-2-5

6700 rpm

1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8

Poly-V-belt

2404 mm 2380 mm

1

2

The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special equipment.

Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.

412

왔

Rims and tires

!

Only use tires which have been specifically developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by

Mercedes-Benz. Tires approved by

Mercedes-Benz are developed to provide best possible performance in conjunction with the driving safety systems on your vehicle such as ABS or

ESP. Tires specially developed for your vehicle and tested and approved by

Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding the following on the tire’s sidewall:

앫 MO = Mercedes-Benz Original equipment tires

앫

MO

E

= Mercedes-Benz Original

Extended

(tires with limited run-flat characteristics) original equipment tires

Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that is not covered by the


i

For information on driving with

MO

Extended

tires*, see

“MO

Extended

system” (

컄 page 312).

!

Using tires other than those approved by Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental effects, such as

앫

앫

앫 poor handling characteristics increased noise increased fuel consumption

Moreover, tires and rims not approved by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics that could cause them to come into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the result.

Technical data

Rims and tires

i

Further information on tires and rims is available at any authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center. A placard with the recommended tire inflation pressures is located on the driver’s door

B-pillar. Some vehicles may have supplemental tire inflation pressure information for driving at high speeds

(

컄 page 307) or for vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. If such information is provided, it can be found on the placard located on the inside of the fuel filler flap. The tire inflation pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance recommendation included with vehicle.

413

Technical data

Rims and tires

Same size tires

17" tires

Rims (light alloy)

Wheel offset

Summer tires (radial-ply tires)

Winter tires (radial-ply tires)

SLK 350

7

1

/

2

J x 17 H2

1.42 in (36 mm)

-

225/45 R17 91H M+S or

225/45 R17 91H M+S MO

Extended

1

1

2

Must be used in conjunction with Run-Flat Indicator* only.

For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

SLK 350 (Sport Package*)

SLK 55 AMG

7

1

/

2

J x 17 H2

1.46 in (37 mm)

-

205/50 R17 89H M+S

2 or

225/45 R17 91H M+S

2 or

225/45 R17 91H M+S MO

Extended

1,2

414

18" tires


Wheel offset


Winter tires (radial-ply tires)

SLK 55 AMG

7

1

/

2

1.46 in (37 mm)

-

J x 18 H2

225/40 R18 92H XL (Extra Load) M+S

1

For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

1

Technical data

Rims and tires

415

Technical data

Rims and tires

Mixed size tires

SLK 350

Front axle:


Wheel offset

7

1

/

2

J x 17 H2

1.42 in (36 mm)


225/45 R17 91W or

225/45 R17 91W MO

Extended

1

Rear axle:


8

1

/

2

J x17 H2

Wheel offset


1.18 in (30 mm)

245/40 R17 91W

2 or

245/40 R17 91W MO

Extended

1,2

1

2

Must be used in conjunction with Run Flat Indicator* only.

Must not be used with snow chains.

SLK 350 (Sport Package*)

7

1

/

2

J x 17 H2

1.46 in (37 mm)

225/45 R17 91W or

225/45 R17 91W MO

Extended

1

8

1

/

2

J x17 H2

1.18 in (30 mm)

245/40 R17 91W

2 or

245/40 R17 91W MO

Extended

1,2

416

Front axle:


Wheel offset


Rear axle:


Wheel offset


1


SLK 55 AMG

7

1

/

2

J x 18 H2

1.46 in (37 mm)


8

1

/

2

J x18 H2

1.18 in (30 mm)


1

Technical data

Rims and tires

417

Technical data

Rims and tires

Spare wheel with collapsible tire

Rim (light alloy)

Wheel offset

Collapsible tire

1


i

Please note that the tire inflation pessure of the collapsible tire differs from the tire inflation pressure of the road tires.

Inflate the collapsible tire to approximately 51 psi (3.5 bar).

All models

4.5 B x 17 H2

0.47 in (12 mm)

145/70-17 92P

1

418

왔


Model

Generator (alternator)

Starter motor

Battery

Spark plugs

Electrode gap

Tightening torque

SLK 350

14 V/150 A

12 V/1.7 kW

12 V/74 Ah

Bosch Platin Y 7 MPP33

NGK PLKR 6A

0.031 in (0.8 mm)

15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm)

Technical data


SLK 55 AMG

14 V/150 A

12 V/1.7 kW

12 V/74 Ah

NGK IFR6D10

0.039 in (1.0 mm)

18 – 22 lb-ft (25 – 30 Nm)

419

Technical data

Main Dimensions

Model

Overall vehicle length

Overall vehicle width

Overall vehicle height

Wheelbase

Track, front

Track, rear

SLK 350

160.7 in (4082 mm)

70.4 in (1788 mm)

51.1 in (1298 mm)

95.7 in (2430 mm)

60.0 in (1526 mm)

61.0 in (1549 mm)

SLK 55 AMG

160.9 in (4087 mm)

70.6 in (1794 mm)

50.0 in (1271 mm)

95.7 in (2430 mm)

60.0 in (1524 mm)

61.0 in (1549 mm)

420

왔

Weights

Model

Maximum roof load

Maximum trunk load

!

This vehicle is not designed to carry items on its roof. Roof rails and any roof-mounted devices, unless expressly approved by Mercedes-Benz for use on this vehicle model, must not be used as they will damage the vehicle and retractable hardtop.

At time of printing, Mercedes-Benz does not offer any roof racks or any other roof-mounted devices for use on this vehicle.

SLK 350

110 lb (50 kg)

220 lb (100 kg)

!

This vehicle is not designed to carry any items on its trunk lid or accommodate any type of trunk lid rack or device. Using such devices may damage the vehicle and retractable hardtop mechanism.

SLK 55 AMG

110 lb (50 kg)

220 lb (100 kg)

Technical data

Weights

421

Technical data


Capacities

Vehicle components and their respective lubricants must match. Therefore, only use products tested and approved by

Mercedes-Benz.

Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Engine with oil filter

Model

SLK 350

Capacity

8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

SLK 55 AMG 8.5 US qt (8.0 l)

Automatic transmission

* SLK 350 10.4 US qt (9.8 l)


Rear axle

SLK 55 AMG 10.4 US qt (9.8 l)

SLK 350 1.6 US qt (1.5 l)

SLK 350 1.2 US qt (1.1 l)

SLK 55 AMG 1.3 US qt (1.2 l)

Power steering

Front wheel hubs

Brake system

Cooling system

SLK 350 1.1 US qt (1.0 l)

SLK 55 AMG 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) approx. 2.1 oz (60 g) each

0.5 US qt (0.5 l)

SLK 350 approx.11.2 US qt (10.2 l)

SLK 55 AMG approx. 11.7 US qt (11.1 l)

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Approved engine oils

MB Automatic Transmission Fluid

MB Manual Transmission Oil

Hypoid gear oil SAE 85 W 90

MB Power Steering Fluid (Pentosin CHF 11S)

High temperature roller bearing grease

MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4)

MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze Agent

422

Technical data


Fuel tank including a reserve of

Model

SLK 350

Capacity

approx. 18.5 US gal (70.0 l) approx. 2.4 US gal (9.0 l)

Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Premium unleaded gasoline:

Minimum posted Octane 91 (average of

96 RON/86 MON)

SLK 55 AMG approx. 18.5 US gal (70.0 l) approx. 2.6 US gal (10.0 l)

Air conditioning system

R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant oil

(never R-12)

MB Hydraulic Fluid

Hydraulic system for retractable hardtop

Windshield washer system and headlamp cleaning system

*

0.19 US qt (0.18 l)

7.4 US qt (7.0 l) MB Windshield washer concentrate

1

1

Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate“S” and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (

컄 page 429).

423

Technical data


Engine oils

Engine oils are specifically tested for their suitability in our engines and durability for our service intervals. Therefore, only use approved engine oils and oil filters required for vehicles with Maintenance

System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles). For a listing of approved engine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory

Approved Service Products pamphlet, or contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

Using engine oils and oil filters of specification other than those expressly required for the Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals longer than those called for by the

Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or

FSS (Canada vehicles) will result in engine damage not covered by the


Please follow Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS (Canada vehicles) recommendations for scheduled oil changes.

Failure to do so will result in engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz

Limited Warranty.

Engine oil additives

Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.

They may damage the engine. Damage or malfunctions resulting from blending oil additives are not covered by the


Air conditioning refrigerant

R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special

PAG lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning system. Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil, otherwise damage to the system will occur.

Brake fluid

During vehicle operation, the boiling point of the brake fluid is continuously reduced through the absorption of moisture from the atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency. Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced every two years, preferably in the spring. Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will provide you with additional information.

424

Technical data


Premium unleaded gasoline Fuel requirements Gasoline additives

!

To maintain the engine’s durability and performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded is not available and low octane fuel is used, follow these precautions:

앫 Have the fuel tank only partially filled with unleaded regular and fill up with premium unleaded as soon as possible.

앫

앫

앫

Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceleration.

Do not exceed an engine speed of

3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such as two persons and no luggage.

Do not exceed

2

/

3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in mountainous terrain.

Only use premium unleaded fuel:

앫

The octane number (posted at the pump) must be 91 min. It is an average of both the Research (R) octane number and the Motor (M) octane number:

(R+M)/2). This is also known as the

ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, IPA, IBA, and TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one of these oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed

10%; MTBE not to exceed 15%.

The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.

Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not allowed. Gasohol, which contains

10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be used.

These blends must also meet all other fuel requirements, such as resistance to spark knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz only recommends the use of quality gasoline containing additives that prevent the build-up of carbon deposits.

After an extended period of using fuels without such additives, carbon deposits can build up especially on the intake valves and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as:

Warm-up hesitation

Unstable idle

Knocking/pinging

Misfire

Power loss

425

Technical data


In areas where carbon deposits may be encountered due to lack of availability of gasolines which contain these additives,

Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of additives approved by us for use on

Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to the

Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet for a listing of approved product(s).

Follow directions on product label.

Do not blend any specific fuel additives with fuel. This only results in unnecessary costs and may be harmful to engine operation.

Damage or malfunction resulting from poor fuel quality or from blending additional fuel additives other than those tested and approved by us for use on

Mercedes-Benz vehicles listed in the

Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet are not covered by the


Coolants

앫

앫

앫

The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:

Corrosion protection

Freeze protection

Boiling protection (by increasing the boiling point)

The cooling system was filled at the factory with a coolant providing freeze protection to approximately -22°F (-30°C) and corrosion protection.

If the antifreeze mixture is effective to

-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).

The coolant solution must be used year round to provide the necessary corrosion protection and increase boil-over protection. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for information on replacement intervals.

Coolant system design and coolant used determine the replacement interval. The replacement interval published in the

Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if

MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze solution or other Mercedes-Benz approved products of equal specification (see

Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet) are used to renew the coolant concentration or bring it back up to the proper level.

To provide important corrosion protection, the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze protection to approx. -22°F [-30°C]). If you use a solution that is more than 55% anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection to approx. -49°F [-45°C]), the engine temperature will increase due to the lower heat transfer capability of the solution. Therefore, do not use more than this amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.

426

Technical data


If the coolant level is low, water and

MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage). Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions.

The water in the cooling system must meet minimum requirements, which are usually satisfied by normal drinking water. If you are not sure about the water quality, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Anticorrosion/antifreeze

Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.)

Therefore, the following product is strongly recommended for use in your vehicle:

Mercedes-Benz 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze agent.

Before the start of the winter season (or once a year in hot southern regions), you should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked. The coolant is also regularly checked each time you bring your vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center for service.

427

Technical data


Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity

Model

SLK 350

SLK 55 AMG

Approx. freeze protection

–35°F (–37°C)

5.4 US qt (5.1 l)

5.9 US qt (5.5 l)

–49°F (–45°C)

6.0 US qt (5.6 l)

6.4 US qt (6.1 l)

428

Technical data



Both the windshield washer system and the headlamp cleaning system* are supplied from the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

The washer fluid reservoir has a capacity of approximately 7.4 US qt (7.0 l).

왘

Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield

Washer Concentrate “S” and water (or concentrate and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures).

Warning!

G

Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts because it may ignite and burn. You could be seriously burned.

Windshield washer and headlamp cleaning* fluid mixing ratio

For temperatures above freezing point, use

MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water:

앫

1 part “S” to100 parts water

[40 ml (1.34 fl oz) “S” to 1 gallon (4 l) water]

For temperatures below freezing point, use

MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:

앫

1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent

[40 ml (1.34 fl oz) “S” to 1 gallon (4 l) solvent].

429

430

Technical terms

ABS

(Antilock Brake System)

Prevents the wheels from locking up during braking so that the vehicle can continue to be steered.

Accessory weight

(

컄 page 323)

Air pressure

(

컄 page 323)

AIRSCARF neck-level heating

AIRSCARF neck-level heating provides the surrounding area of the occupants’ necks with a heated air stream flowing from openings in the head restraints.

Alignment bolt

Metal pin with thread. The centering pin is an aid used when changing a tire to align the wheel with the wheel hub.

Aspect ratio

(

컄 page 323)

BabySmart

TM1

air bag deactivation system

This system detects if a special system-compatible child restraint seat is installed on the passenger seat.

The system will automatically deactivate the passenger front air bag when such a seat is properly installed

(the

75 indicator lamp located in the center console comes on).

BabySmart

TM

compatible child seats

Special restraint system for children.

The sensor system for the passenger seat prevents deployment of the passenger front air bag if a BabySmart

TM compatible child seat is installed. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for availability.

Bar

(

컄 page 323)

BAS

(Brake Assist System)

System for potentially reducing braking distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it senses an emergency based on how fast the brake is applied.

Bead

(

컄 page 323)

Bi-Xenon headlamps

Headlamps which use an electric arc as the light source and produce a more intense light than filament headlamps.

Bi-Xenon headlamps produce low beam and high beam.

CAC

(Customer Assistance Center)

Mercedes-Benz customer service center, which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide assistance in the event of a breakdown.

1

BabySmart

TM


Automotive Corp.

431

Technical terms

CAN system

(Controller Area Network)

Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or windshield wiping.

Cockpit

All instruments, switches, buttons and indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle operation and monitoring.

Cold tire inflation pressure

(

컄 page 323)

Collapsible tire

An especially compact spare tire that must be inflated with a provided air pump before using. It should only be used to bring the vehicle to the nearest service station.

COMAND

(Cockpit Management and

Data System)

Information and operating center for vehicle sound and communications systems, including the radio,

CD changer and navigation system, as well as other optional equipment (e.g. telephone).

Control system

The control system is used to call up vehicle information and to change component settings. Information and messages appear in the multifunction display. The driver uses the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel to navigate through the system and to adjust settings.

Cruise control

Driving convenience system for automatically maintaining the vehicle speed set by the driver.

Curb weight

(

컄 page 323)

DOT

(Department of Transportation)

(

컄 page 323)

Engine number

The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the cylinder block to uniquely identify each engine produced.

Engine oil viscosity

Measurement for the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an oil can tolerate without becoming thin, or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the better the viscosity.

ESP

(Electronic Stability Program)

Improves vehicle handling and directional stability.

432

Technical terms

ETD

(Emergency Tensioning Device)

Device which deploys in certain frontal and rear collisions exceeding the system's threshold to tighten the seat belts. ->SRS

FSS (Canada vehicles)

(Flexible Service System)

Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle maintenance service is due. FSS evaluates engine temperature, oil level, vehicle speed, engine speed, distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service, and calls for the next maintenance service accordingly.

GAWR

(Gross Axle Weight Rating)

(

컄 page 323)

Gear range

Number of gears which are available to the automatic transmission for shifting.

The automatic gear shifting process can be adapted to specific operating conditions using the selector lever.

GPS

(Global Positioning System)

Satellite-based system for relaying geographic location information to and from vehicles equipped with special receivers.

GVW

(Gross Vehicle Weight)

(

컄 page 323)

GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)

(

컄 page 324)

Head-thorax air bag

Installed in the doors, these air bags protect occupants during side impact collisions exceeding a preset threshold. Unlike normal side air bags, head-thorax air bags are also designed to provide protection for the head area.


The displays and indicator/warning lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer, coolant temperature and fuel gauge.

Kickdown

Depressing the accelerator past the point of resistance shifts the automatic transmission down to the lowest possible gear. This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal acceleration needs.

Kilopascal (kPa)

(

컄 page 324)

433

Technical terms

Line of fall

The direct line an object moves downhill when influenced by the force of gravity alone.

Locking knob

Button on the door which indicates whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the locking knob down on an individual door from inside locks that door.

Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles)

Maintenance service indicator in the multifunction display that informs the driver when the next vehicle maintenance service is due. The Maintenance

System in your vehicle tracks distance driven and the time elapsed since your last maintenance service, and calls for the next maintenance service accordingly.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

(

컄 page 324)

Maximum load rating

(

컄 page 324)


(

컄 page 324)

Memory function

Used to store three individual seat, steering wheel and mirror positions for each SmartKey.

MON

(Motor Octane Number)

The Motor Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline’s ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both the MON (Motor Octane Number) and

->RON (Research Octane Number) is posted at the pump, also known as

ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

Multifunction display

Two display fields in the instrument cluster used to present information provided by the control system.


Steering wheel with buttons for operating the control system.

Normal occupant weight

(

컄 page 324)

Overspeed range

Engine speeds within the red marking of the tachometer dial. Avoid this engine speed range, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.

Poly-V-belt drive

Drives engine components (alternator,

AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.

434

Technical terms

Power train

Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit motive power to the drive axles, including

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

앫

Engine

Clutch/torque converter

Transmission

Transfer case

Drive shaft

Differential

Axle shafts/axles

Production options weight

(

컄 page 324)

Program mode selector switch

Used to switch the automatic transmission between standard operation (

S

) and comfort operation (

C

).

Vehicles with steering wheel gearshift control and manual shift program: in addition to

S

and

C

(for regular

S

or comfort

C

operation, see above), you can use

M

for manual shift program.

PSI

(Pounds per square inch)

(

컄 page 324)


(

컄 page 324)

REST

(Residual engine heat utilization)

Feature that uses the engine heat stored in the coolant to heat the vehicle interior for a short time after the engine has been turned off.

Restraint systems

Seat belts, belt tensioners, air bags and child restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective functions complement one another.

Rim

(

컄 page 324)


Hardtop that can be opened and closed at the push of a button and stored in the trunk.

435

Technical terms

Roll bar

Occupant protection system which consists of tubular steel sheathed in plastic.

RON

(Research Octane Number)

The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline’s ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both the ->MON (Motor Octane Number) and RON (Research Octane Number) is posted at the pump, also known as

ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.

Shift lock

When the vehicle with automatic transmission is parked, this lock prevents the gear selector lever from being inadvertently moved out of position

P

without the SmartKey turned and the brake pedal depressed.

Sidewall

(

컄 page 324)

Speedshift

Steering wheel gearshift control for vehicles with automatic transmission.

You can change the gears yourself with the steering wheel gearshift buttons.

SRS

(Supplemental Restraint System)

Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and air bags. Though independent systems, they are closely interfaced to provide effective occupant protection.

Tele Aid system

(Telematic Alarm Identification on

Demand)

The Tele Aid system consists of three types of response: automatic and manual emergency, Roadside Assistance and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber agreement and placing an acquaintance call.

The Tele Aid system is operational provided that the vehicle’s battery is charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.

Tightening torque

Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug wrench) with which threaded fasteners such as wheel bolts are tightened.

436

Technical terms

TIN

(Tire Identification Number)

(

컄 page 325)

Tire load rating

(

컄 page 325)

Tire ply composition and material used

(

컄 page 325)


(

컄 page 325)

Traction

(

컄 page 325)

Tread

(

컄 page 325)

Treadwear indicators

(

컄 page 325)


(

컄 page 325)

Vehicle capacity weight

(

컄 page 325)

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

(

컄 page 325)

VIN

(Vehicle Identification Number)

The number set by the manufacturer and placed on the body to uniquely identify each vehicle produced.

Wind screen

Screen for deflecting wind from the vehicle interior when the hardtop is lowered.

437

438

Index

A

ABS 80

Braking 80

Description 431

Display message 350

Emergency brake maneuver 80

Indicator lamp 342

Accelerator position, automatic transmission 159

Accessory weight 323

Accident 55

Adjusting (Getting started) 37

Air bags 63

BabySmart

TM

air bag deactivation system 75

BabySmart

TM

air bag deactivation system, description 431

BabySmart

TM

compatible child seat 74

BabySmart

TM

self-test 76

Children 64

Front 68

Head-thorax 69

Head-thorax, description 433

Kneebag 68

Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp 76

Safety guidelines 66

Air conditioning

Automatic climate control 188

Climate control 178

Air conditioning refrigerant 424

Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure

AIRSCARF neck level heating

(Seats) 102

Description 431

Alarm system see Anti-theft systems

Alignment bolt (Vehicle tool kit) 369,

391

Description 431

Anticorrosion/antifreeze 427

Antilock brake system see ABS

Anti-theft systems 85

Activating 86

Alarm system 85

Canceling alarm 86

Canceling alarm (Tow-away) 87

Deactivating 86

Immobilizer 85

Tow-away alarm 86

Transporting the vehicle 87

Ashtray 253

Aspect ratio 323

AUDIO menu (Control system) 123

Audio system 191

Adjusting balance 196

Adjusting sound functions 195

Adjusting volume 195

Audio and telephone, operation 191

Button and soft key operation 194

CD changer 209

CD operation 207

Introduction to satellite radio

(USA only) 202

Operating and display elements 192

Operating safety 191

Operation 194

Radio operation 197

Returning sound functions to factory settings 196

Returning volume distribution to factory settings 197

Switching on/off 194

Telephone muting 197

Telephone operation 216

Weather band 201

439

Index

Auto-dimming for rear view mirrors 168

Automatic climate control

Air conditioning 188

Air distribution 186

Air recirculation mode 186

Air volume 186

Automatic mode, basic setting 185

Control panel 185

Defrosting 189

Overview 182

REST 189

Switching off 190

Temperature 185

Automatic locking

Control system 141

When driving 97

Automatic shift program 158

Automatic transmission 152

Accelerator position 159

Automatic transmisson fluid

(ATF) 293

Comfort program mode 158

Driving 50

Emergency operation

(Limp Home Mode) 166

Fluid level 293

440

Gear ranges 155

Gear selector lever 152

Gear selector lever

(Unlocking manually) 376

Gear selector lever position 152, 156

Gear shifting malfunctions 166

Gearshift pattern 48

Kickdown 159

Manual shifting 154

One-touch gearshifting 154

Program mode selector switch 158

B

BabySmart

TM

Air bag deactivation system 75

Air bag deactivation system, description 431

Compatible child seat 74, 75

Compatible child seats, description 431


Self-test 76

Back-up lamp 381

Bar 323

BAS 81

Description 431

Display message 351

Battery (SmartKey)

Replacing 378

Battery (Vehicle) 294, 396

Charging 397

Disconnecting 397

Jump starting 399

Removing 397

Bead 323

Bi-Xenon

Description 431

Headlamps 381

Bolts

For spare wheel 373

Brake Assist System see BAS

Brakes 274

Brake fluid 286, 424

Display message 356

Salty roads 274

SLK 55 AMG 275

Warning lamp 343

Break-in period 272

Bulbs

Front/rear lamps 380

Replacing 380

Buttons (Audio system) 194

C

CAC 431

California, important notice 11

CAN system, description 432

Capacities

(Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.) 422

Catalytic converter 282

CD

Changer 250

Player/changer, operation 125

CD changer (Audio system) 207, 209

CD operation (Audio system) 207

Center console

Lamp 347

Overview 28

Central locking

Automatic (Control system) 141

Automatic (When driving) 97

From outside (SmartKey) 59

Locking/unlocking from inside 97

Central locking/unlocking switches 98

Certification label 410

CHECK ENGINE indicator lamp 344

Child safety

Air bags 64

Children in the vehicle 73

Cigarette lighter 254

Cleaning tires 299

Climate control 172

Air conditioning 178

Air distribution 176

Air recirculation mode 176

Air volume 176

Control panel, overview 175

Defrosting 181

Maximum cooling 179

Rear window defroster 171

Switching on/off 175

Temperature 175

Clock 116

Cockpit

Description 432

Overview 22

Cold tire inflation pressure 323

Collapsible tire, description 432

Collapsible wheel chock 371

Index

441

Index

COMAND 116

Description 432

Navigation 126

Radio transmitter 281

Combination switch 110

High beam flasher 110

High beam headlamps 52, 110

Low beam headlamps 52

Turn signals 52

Turn signals, additional in mirrors 381

Windshield wipers 53

Comfort driving

Transmission program mode 158

Compatible child seat see Baby Smart

TM

Control system 117

AUDIO menu 123

Automatic locking 141

Calling up range 146

CD player/CD changer 125

Clock, hours 134

Clock, minutes 134

Convenience submenu 142

Coolant temperature 122

Date, day 136

442

Date, month 135

Date, year 136

Daytime running lamp mode 137

Description 432

Easy-entry/exit feature 142

Fuel consumption statistics 144

Functions 118

Instrument cluster submenu 131

Interior lighting delayed shut-off 140

Key-dependency 143

Language 132

Lighting submenu 137

Locator lighting 138

Maintenance service indicator 329

Menus 118

Messages in display 348

Multifunction display 117

Multifunction steering wheel 118

NAV menu 126

Night security illumination 139

Outside temperature/speed 132

Overview (Menus) 120

Overview (Settings submenus) 130

Parking position 144

Radio station 124

Resetting all settings 128

Resetting single settings 129

Satellite radio (USA only) 124

Settings menu 127

Settings submenus 129

Speed/outside temperature 123

Speedometer, display mode 131

Standard display 122

Submenus, selecting and scrolling 129

TEL menu 146

Temperature, display mode 131

Time and date synchronization with head unit 133

Time/date submenu 133

Trip computer menu 144

Vehicle status message memory menu 126

Vehicle submenu 141

Controller Area Network see CAN system

Convenience closing

Power windows 235

Retractable hardtop 242

Index

Coolant 293

Adding water 286

Anticorrosion/antifreeze 427

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

426

Technical data 422

Temperature 283

Temperature, checking

(Control system) 122

Cornering fog lamps (Lighting) 111

Cruise control 244

Canceling 246

Cruise control lever 244

Description 432

Display message 351

Driving uphill/downhill 246

Fine adjustment 248

Saving current speed 245

Set to last stored speed 248

Setting higher/lower speed 247

Cup holder 252

Cleaning 339

Curb weight 323

Customer Assistance Center see CAC

D

Date (Control system)

Day 136

Month 135

Year 136


Control system 137

Deep water see Standing water

Defrosting see Automatic climate control

Defrosting see Climate control

Department of Transportation see DOT

Differential, driving after replacement 272

Difficulties with starting 49

Direction of rotation (Tires) 300

Display elements (Audio system) 192

Display text see Messages in display

Door

Control panel, overview 31

Entry lamps 114

Doors

Locking from outside 92

Opening from inside 94

Unlocking from outside 92

Unlocking with Tele Aid 263

DOT 323

Downshifting


Drink holder see Cup holder

Drinking and driving 273

Driver’s air bag see Air bags

Driver’s door

Locking in an emergency 375

Unlocking in an emergency 374

Driving 50

And drinking 273


Brakes 274

Catalytic converter 282

Coolant temperature 283

Driving off 276

Emission control 282

Fuel saving 273

General instructions 44, 273

Hydroplaning 277

In winter 279

Manual transmission 50

On salty roads 274

Parking 276

Pedals 273

443

Index

Power assistance 273

Radio transmitters, control and operation 281

Standing water 280

Tires 277

Tires (Speed rating) 278

Tires (Traction) 278

Traveling abroad 281

Driving safety systems 80

ABS 80

BAS 81

ESP 82

Driving systems

Cruise control 244

Driving the first

1000 miles/1500 km 272

E

Easy-entry/exit feature (Seats) 99

Control system 142

Electric air pump 371

Electrical outlet 254

Electrical system

Technical data 419

Electronic Stability Program see ESP

Emergency call (911) 229

Emergency call system 257

GPS 258

Initiating an emergency call 259

Requirements 257

Tele Aid 258

Emergency operation

(Limp Home Mode) 166

Emergency operations

Locking driver’s door and trunk 375

Releasing trunk lid from inside 96

Remote door unlock 263


Selector lever, unlocking manually 376

Unlocking the vehicle 374

Unlocking trunk 375

Unlocking vehicle 374

Emergency tensioning device see ETD


Information label 410

Engine

Cleaning see Vehicle care

Compartment 287

Driving after replacement 272

Number (Label) 410

Number, description 432

Starting (Automatic transmission) 48

Starting (Manual transmission) 48

Technical data 412

Turning off with SmartKey 58

Engine oil 288, 424

Adding 292

Additives 424

Checking level (Control system) 289

Checking level (Dipstick) 291

Consumption 288

Display message 290

Viscosity 432

444

Index

ESP 82

Description 432

Display message 352

On/off switch 84

Warning lamp 345

ETD 71, 72

Description 433


Seat belt force limiter 72

Exterior lamp switch 106

Exterior lighting

Lamps 381

Replacing bulbs 380

Exterior rear view mirrors see Mirrors

F

First aid kit 369

Flat tire 388

Inflating collapsible spare tire 393

Lifting vehicle 389

Lowering vehicle 395

Mounting spare wheel 388, 391

Removing wheel 391

Floormat (Driver’s side only) 255

Fog lamps 109, 381

Cornering fog lamps 111

FSS (Canada vehicles)

Control system 329

Description 433

Fuel

Additives 425

Consumption statistics


Filler flap 284

MON 284

Premium unleaded gasoline 284, 425

Refueling 284

Requirements 425

Reserve warning lamp 345, 346

RON 284

Saving fuel 273

Technical data 422

Fuel filler flap

Localization 25, 284

Fuel gauge (Instrument cluster) 25

Fuel tank capacity 423

Fuse extractor (Vehicle tool kit) 369

Fuses 404

Auxiliary fuse box 406

Main fuse box 405

Spare fuses (Vehicle tool kit) 369

445

Index

G

Garage door opener 264

Canadian programming 268

Operation of remote control 269

Programming/reprogramming 266

Rolling code programming 267

Gasoline see Fuel

GAWR 323

Gear range


Description 433

Limiting 155

Shifting into optimal 154

Gear range limit

Canceling 154


Position

(Automatic transmission) 152, 156

Global locking/unlocking see SmartKey

Global Positioning System see GPS

Glove box 250

Good visibility 167

GPS 85, 86

Description 433

Tele Aid system 257

Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR

Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW

GSM network phones (Telephone) 216

GVW 323

GVWR 324

H

Hazard warning flasher 112

Head restraint height (Seats) 40

Headlamps

Bi-Xenon 381

Bi-Xenon, description 431

Cleaning system 167, 295, 429

Night security illumination


Switching off 57

Switching on 52

Head-thorax air bag 433

Also see Air bags

Heating

Seats 101

Steering wheel 270

High beam

Flasher 110

Headlamps 52, 110

Headlamps, bulbs 381

High mounted brake lamp 381

High-performance brake system

(SLK 55 AMG) 275

Hood 287

Horn 23

Hydroplaning 277

446

I

Identification labels see Labels

Ignition (Position in starter switch) 35

Immobilizer see Anti-theft systems

Infant and child restraint systems 73

Information

About maintenance and warranty 10

Button for Tele Aid 261

Terminating a call (Tele Aid) 262

Instrument cluster 115

Cleaning 339

Clock 116

Description 433

Fuel gauge 25

Illumination 25, 115

Lamps, indicator and warning 342

Language in display


Outside temperature indicator


Overview 24

Reset button 25

Tachometer 115

Trip odometer 116

Instruments and controls see Cockpit

Interior lighting

Delayed shut-off


Operation 113

Interior rear view mirror see Mirrors

Intermittent wiping see Windshield wipers

Intermittent/interval wiping see

Windshield wipers

J

Jack (Vehicle tool kit) 369

Lifting vehicle 389

Lowering vehicle 395

Jump starting 399

Index

447

Index

K

Key 197

Key-dependency (Control system) 143

Kickdown 159

Description 433

Kilometers/miles in speedometer


Kilopascal 324

Kneebag see Air bags

L

Labels

Certification 410


Engine number 410

Identification 410

Vacuum line routing diagram 410

VIN (Vehicle Identification

Number) 410

Lamp in center console 347

Lamps in instrument cluster 342

Lamps, indicator and warning

ABS 342

Battery (SmartKey) 92

Brakes 343

CHECK ENGINE 344

ESP 82, 84, 345

Fuel reserve 345, 346

Passenger front air bag off 347

Seat belts 346

SRS 62, 63, 346

Language in multifunction display


Layout of poly-V-belt drive 411

License plate lamps 381

Light alloy wheels

Cleaning 339

Technical data 414, 415

Lighter see Cigarette lighter

Lighting 106

Combination switch 110

Cornering fog lamps 111


Door entry lamps 114

Exterior lamp switch 106

Exterior lamps, cleaning 337

Fog lamps 109

Hazard warning flasher 112

Headlamp mode, automatic/manual 107

High beam 110

High beam flasher 110

Individual settings


Instrument cluster illumination 115

Interior delayed shut-off


Interior lighting 113

Locator lighting (Control system) 138

Low beam headlamps 106

448

Index



Reading lamps 114

Standing lamps 106

Trunk 113

Limiting the gear range 155

Limp Home Mode 166

Line of fall, description 434

Loading 249

Loading terminology 323

Loading the vehicle 300

Locator lighting (Control system) 138

Locking

And Parking 56

Centrally (Control system) 141

Centrally from inside 97

Locking knob (Doors) 94

Description 434

Long trip, checking before 285

Loss of

Service and Warranty Booklet 409

SmartKey or mechanical key 94

Low beam headlamps 106, 381

Lubricants, technical data 422

Luggage cover 238

M

Main dimensions 420

Maintenance service indicator


Maintenance system

Service data information 333

Service indicator, calling up 330

Service indicator, setting dates 331

Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles)

Description 434

Manual seat see Seats

Manual shift program SLK 55 AMG 164

Manual transmission 150

Downshifting 151

Driving 50

Gearshift pattern 48

Shifting into reverse 151

Starting with SmartKey 48

Maximum inflation pressure 324

Maximum load rating 324

Maximum loaded vehicle weight 324

Mechanical Key see SmartKey

Memory

Radio station 206

Memory function 103

Description 434

Memory button 104

Memory position switch 104

Recalling positions 104

Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position 105

Storing positions 104

Menus

AUDIO 123

Convenience submenu 142

Instrument cluster submenu 131

Lighting submenu 137

NAV 126

Overview 120, 121, 130

Settings 127

Settings submenus 129

Standard display 122

TEL 146

Time/Date submenu 133

Trip computer 144

Vehicle status message memory 126

Vehicle submenu 141

449

Index

Messages in display 348

Cruise control 351

ESP 352


SRS 353

Symbols 355

Transmission 353

Vehicle status message memory 126

Miles/kilometers in speedometer


Mirror lamp see Sun vizors

Mirrors 167

Additional turn signals 381

Adjusting 42

Antiglare position 167

Auto-dimming 168

Exterior rear view mirror parking position (Parking aid) 169

Exterior rear view mirrors 43

Interior rear view mirror 42

Parking position


Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position 105

MO

Extended

system 312

MON 284

Description 434

Motor Octane Number see MON

Multifunction display 117

Description 434

Displaying gear range 155

Engine oil messages 289

Messages 126

Messages with symbols 355

Messages with text 348

Operation see Control system

Multifunction steering wheel

Description 434

Heating 270

Overview 26, 118

450

N

NAV menu 126

Navigation system see NAV

Neck-level heating see AIRSCARF (Seats)



Normal occupant weight 324

Index

O

Occupant distribution 324

Occupant safety 62

Air bags 63

Children and air bags 64

Children in the vehicle 73

Fastening the seat belts 44

Infant and child restraint systems 69, 73

Seat belts 44, 66, 69

Oil see Engine oil

One-touch gearshifting 154

Canceling gear range limit 154

Downshifting 154

Upshifting 154

Operating safety 16

Audio system 191

Operating vehicle outside the USA and

Canada 13

Operation

Refueling 284

Regular checks 285

Operator’s Manual 10

Ornamental moldings see Vehicle care

Outside temperature indicator

Display (Control system) 116, 123

Display mode (Control system) 131

Outside temperature/speed

Mode (Control system) 132

Overhead control panel, overview 30

Overspeed range

Description 434

Tachometer 115

P

Paintwork see Vehicle care

Panic alarm 78

Panic button on SmartKey 78

Parcel net (Storage compartment) 251

Parking 276

And locking 56

Parking aid see Parking position

Parking brake 49, 56

Parking lamps 106, 381

Parking position

Activation (Control system) 144

Exterior rear view mirrors 169

Parking position (Memory function) 105

Parts service 408

Passenger air bag see Air bags

Passenger compartment 281


Passenger safety see Occupant safety

Pedals 273

Phone book see Telephone

Poly-V-belt drive

Description 434

Layout 411

451

Index

Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires 311

Power assistance 273

Power seat see Seats

Power train, description 435

Power washer see Vehicle care

Power windows 232

Express-open/-close 233

Opening and closing 232

Operating rear side windows 234

Operating with retractable hardtop switch 234

Stopping windows 234

Summer opening/convenience closing 235

Synchronizing 236

Practical hints

Fuses 404

Lamps in instrument cluster 342

Spare wheel bolts 373

Towing vehicle 401

Vehicle jack 370

What to do if...

342

Premium unleaded gasoline 425

Problems

Accident 55

Coolant too hot 55

Misfiring 55

Running erratically 55

While driving 55

With vehicle 17

Product information 9

Production options weight 324

Program mode selector switch


Description 435

PSI 324

452

R

Radio

Operation (Audio system) 197

Operation (Control system) 123

Satellite (USA only) 124

Radio transmitters, control and operation 281

Range (Distance to empty,

Control system) 146

Reading lamps 114

Rear view mirrors see Mirrors

Rear window defroster 171

Recommended inflation pressure 324

Recovery services for stolen vehicle 264

Refrigerant (Air conditioning) 424

Refueling 284

Regular checks 285

Remote

Door unlock with Tele Aid 263

Remote control see SmartKey

Removing

Vehicle tool kit 369

Reporting, safety defects 18

Research Octane Number see RON

Reset button (Instrument cluster) 25

Index

Residual engine heat utilization see REST

REST

Automatic climate control 189

Description 435

Restraint systems, description 435


Description 435

Locking after raising/lowering 240

Opening and closing 237

Operating manually 377

Problems when operating 240

Summer opening/convenience closing 242

Wind screen 243

Rim 324

Rims 413

Roadside Assistance 12

Tele Aid 260

Roll bar, description 436

RON 284

Description 436

Roof rack 249

Run Flat Indicator 308

S

Safety belts see Seat belts

Safety defects, reporting 18

Safety, occupant 62

Salty roads (Brakes) 274

Satellite radio

Additional text information 206

General information 202

Manual channel input 204

Storing of station 206

Satellite radio (USA only) 124

Introduction (Audio system) 202

Seat belts 69

Cleaning 340

Fastening 44

Force limiter 72

Proper use of 46, 71

Release button 46


Warning lamp 346

Seating capacity 302

Seats 99

Adjusting 37

Easy-entry/exit feature 99

Head restraint height 40

Heating 101

Power seats 39

Selecting radio mode

(Audio system) 197

Selective setting see SmartKey

Selector lever lock 48

Description 436

Service

Information 12

Maintenance Booklet 12

Service and warranty

Booklet 409

Information 10

Service life (Tires) 298

Service system


Parts service 408

Setting

Radio station 204

Settings menu (Control system)

Individual vehicle settings 127

Resetting all settings 128

Resetting single settings 129

Submenus 129

Shelf behind roll bar 252

453

Index

Shift lock, description 436

Shifting


Gear selector lever positions 156

Into optimal gear range

(Automatic transmission) 154

Side marker lamps 381

Side windows see Power windows

Sidewall 324

Single CD mode selector 193

Single wipe see Windshield wipers

SmartKey 90

Battery check lamp 92

Checking batteries 93

Factory setting 92

Global locking 92

Global unlocking 92

Key-dependent settings


Locking 56

Locking and unlocking 90

Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key 94

Mechanical key 374

Panic button 78

Positions in starter switch 35

Power windows, opening/closing 235

Remote control 90

Replacing batteries 378

Restoring to factory setting 93

Retractable hardtop, opening/closing 242

Selective setting 92

Starting engine 47

Turning off engine 58

Unlocking 34

Unlocking the trunk lid 93

Snow chains 328

Soft keys (Audio system) 194

Spare fuses (Vehicle tool kit) 369

Spare parts see Parts service

Spare wheel 371

Bolts 373

Inflating 393

Mounting 388

Speed/outside temperature

Display (Control system) 123

Mode (Control system) 132

454

Speedometer, display mode


Speedshift

Description 436

Speedshift (SLK 55 AMG) 162

SRS 71

Description 436

Display message 353

Indicator lamp 346

Standard display menu


Standing lamps 106, 381

Standing water, driving instructions 280

Starter switch positions 35

Starting

Difficulties with 49

Engine 47

Position in starter switch 35

The engine 35

With automatic transmission 48

With manual transmission 48

Station (Satellite radio)

Selecting 204

Storing 204, 206

Index

Steering column see Steering wheel

Steering wheel

Electrical adjustment 41

Heating 270

Manual adjustment 41

Steering wheel gearshift control 160

SLK 350 161

SLK 55 AMG 162

Stolen vehicle, Recovery services 264

Storage compartments 250

Storing tires 299

Summer opening

Power windows 235


Sun vizors 170

Supplemental Restraint System see SRS

Symbols in display 355

T

Tachometer 115

Tail lamps 381

Tar stains see Vehicle care

TDMA or CDMA network phones

(Telephone) 223

Technical data

Air conditioning refrigerant 424

Brake fluid 424

Coolants 426

Electrical system 419

Engine 412

Engine oil 424

Fuel additives 425

Fuel requirements 425

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

422

Headlamp cleaning system 429

Main dimensions 420

Parts service 408

Premium unleaded gasoline 425

Rims and tires 413

Weights 421

Windshield washer system 429

Tele Aid system 257

Description 436

Emergency calls 258

GPS 257

Information button 261

Initiating an emergency call 259

Remote door unlock 263

Requirements 257

Roadside Assistance 260

Roadside Information, terminating a call 262

Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 264

System self-check 258

Upgrade scenario 262

Telephone 256

Compartment 250

GSM network phones 216

Operation (Audio system) 191

Operation (Control system) 146

Temperature

Tires 307

Tightening torque

Description 436

Wheel bolts 395

Time and date synchronization with head unit (Control system) 133

TIN 325

455

Index

Tire

Vehicle maximum load on 325

Tire and Loading Information 301

Tire and loading terminology 323

Tire care and maintenance 298

Tire Identification Number see TIN

Tire inflation pressure

Air pressure 323

Checking 306, 308

Tire inflation pressure see the placard on the fuel filler flap

Tire inspection 298

Tire load rating 325

Tire ply composition and material used 325

Tire speed rating 315, 325

Tire terminology 323

Tires 297, 413

Cleaning 299

Collapsible (Spare wheel) 432

Direction of rotation 300

Driving instructions 277

Flat tire 388

Important guidelines 297

Inflating with air pump 393

MO

Extended

system 312

Mounting wheel 391

Removing wheel 391

Retreads 297

Rims and tires 413

Rotating 326

Run Flat Indicator 308

Service life 298

Sizes 413

Snow chains 328

Spare wheel 371

Speed rating 278

Storing 299

Supplemental tire inflation pressure information 284

Temperature 307, 322

Traction 278

Tread depth 299, 327

Treadwear indicators (TWI) 277

Wear pattern 326

Wheel chock (Vehicle tool kit) 369

Winter 327

Tools see Vehicle tool kit

Tow-away alarm see Anti-theft systems

Towing (Vehicle) 401

Towing eye bolt (Vehicle tool kit) 369

Traction 158, 325

Transmission, display message 353

Transporting the vehicle see Anti-theft systems

Traveling abroad 281

Tread 325

Tread depth 299

Tread depth (Tires) 327

Treadwear indicators 325

Treadwear indicators (TWI) 277

Trip computer menu


Trip odometer (Control system) 116

Trunk 95

Lighting 113

Luggage cover 238

Trunk lid emergency release 96

Trunk lid lock 375


Unlocking with SmartKey 93

Turn signals 52, 381

Additional in mirrors 381

TWI see Treadwear indicators

456

Index

U

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards 325

Unlocking 34

Centrally from inside 97

In an emergency 263

With SmartKey 34

Upgrade scenario (Tele Aid) 262

Upshifting 154

Useful features

Ashtray 253

Cigarette lighter 254

Cup holder 252

Electrical outlet 254

Floormat (Driver’s side only) 255

Garage door opener 264

Heated steering wheel 270

Parcel net 251

Storage compartments, interior 250

Tele Aid 257

Telephone 256

V

Valve extractor (Vehicle tool kit) 369

Vehicle

Battery 294, 396

Battery, charging 397

Bulbs 380

Fuses 404

Individual settings


Jump starting 399

Lifting with jack 389

Lowering with jack 395

Proper use of 16

Towing 401


Vehicle capacity weight 325

Vehicle care 334

Cup holder 339

Engine cleaning 336

Exterior lamps 337

Gearshift/gear selector lever 339

Hard plastic trim items 340

Headliner 340

Instrument cluster 339

Light alloy wheels 339

Ornamental moldings 337

Paintwork 336

Plastic and rubber parts 340

Power washer 335

Rear window 339

Seat belts 340

Steering wheel 339

Tar stains 335

Upholstery 340

Washing 334, 336

Window cleaning 338

Wiper blades 337

Wood trims 340

Vehicle Identification Number see VIN

Vehicle jack 370

Vehicle loading terminology 323

Vehicle maximum load on the tire 325

Vehicle status message memory menu


Vehicle tool kit 369

Collapsible wheel chock 371

Removing 369

Vehicle washing see Vehicle care

VIN 410

Description 437

457

Index

W

Warning sounds

Anti-theft alarm system 85

Driver’s seat belt 69

Exterior lighting 58, 107


Panic alarm 78

Parking brake 50, 343

Tow-away alarm 86

Warranty coverage 409

Washing the vehicle see Vehicle care

Wear pattern (Tires) 326

Weights 421

Wheel bolts 373

Wheel chock (Vehicle tool kit) 369

Wheel wrench (Vehicle tool kit) 369

Wheels see Tires

Wheels, tightening torque 395

Where will I find...?

369

Wind screen 243

Description 437

Windows see Power windows

Windshield

Washer fluid reservoir 295

Washer system 429

Windshield wipers 53

Intermittent wiping 54

Intermittent/interval wiping 53

Replacing wiper blades 386

Single wipe 54

Wiper blades, cleaning 337

Wiping with windshield washer fluid 54

Winter driving 327

Instructions 279

Snow chains 328

Tires 327

Winter tires see Tires

Wiper blades, replacing 386

Wiping and washing see Windshield wipers

Wood trims, cleaning 340

458

Service and Literature

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle properly. For expert advice and quality service, see an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.

For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site

www.mbusa.com

or

www.mercedes-benz.ca

.

Warning!

G

To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.

If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.

Title illustration no. P00.01-2930-31

Press time June 28, 2004

GSP/TIP

Printed in Germany